INSTRUCTION HANDBOOK - Utax

CDC 1520 | 1525 | 1532 

INSTRUCTION HANDBOOK 

DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM 

ADVANCED

Sample of Color Setting Adjustment 

This section explains the color calibration feature together with the following examples. 

NOTE: To illustrate the difference between features, the copy sample colors in this document 

have been modified from the actual colors output by this machine. 

One touch Image Adjust 

Adjust images as desired to more vivid or more dull images. (Refer to One touch Image Adjust on page 1-52 for 

configuration details) 

Sharp Dull Light 

Original Original Original 

Smooth Vivid Dark 

i

Color Balance Adjust 

Adjust the strength of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black to make fine hue adjustments. (Refer to Color Balance Adjust 

on page 1-49 for configuration details) 

Original 

More Yellow More Magenta More Cyan More Black 

Less Yellow Less Magenta Less Cyan Less Black 

ii

Hue Adjust 

Adjust the color (hue) of images. Make adjustments such as adjusting red to a strong yellow-red or yellow to a strong 

green-yellow to make more creative copies. (Refer to Hue Adjust on page 1-50 for configuration details) 

Original 

Adjust yellow to more green, adjust 

blue to more magenta... (1) 

Adjust yellowish-red to more yellow, 

adjust bluish-cyan to more blue... (2) 

Sharpness Adjust 

Adjust the sharpness of image outlines. (Refer to Sharpness Adjust on page 1-33 for configuration details) 

Less Sharp 

Original 

More Sharp 

iii

Legal and Safety Information 

Please read this information before using your machine. 

Regarding Tradenames 

• PRESCRIBE and ECOSYS are registered trademarks of Kyocera Corporation. 

• KPDL is trademark of Kyocera Corporation. 

• Windows and Windows Server are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. 

• Windows NT is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation. 

• PCL and PJL are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company. 

• Adobe, Adobe Acrobat and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems 

Inc. 

• PowerPC is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. 

• CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation. 

• This product was developed using the Tornado Real Time Operating System and Tools 

from Wind River Systems. 

• This product uses PeerlessPrintXL to provide the HP LaserJet compatible PCL 6 language 

emulation. PeerlessPrintXL is a trademark of Peerless Systems Corporation, 2381 

Rosecrans Ave. El Segundo, CA 90245, U.S.A. 

• TrueType is a registered trademark of Apple Computer Inc. 

• All resident fonts in this printer are licensed from Monotype Imaging Inc. 

• Helvetica, Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype-Hell AG. 

• ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Bookman, ITC ZapfChancery and ITC Zapf Dingbats are 

registered trademarks of International Typeface Corporation. 

• This product contains UFST and MicroType ® from Monotype Imaging Inc. 

All other brand and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective 

companies. The designations and ® will not be used in this Operation Guide. 

iv

IBM PROGRAM LICENSE AGREEMENT 

THE DEVICE YOU HAVE PURCHASED CONTAINS ONE OR MORE SOFTWARE 

PROGRAMS (“PROGRAMS”) WHICH BELONG TO INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES 

CORPORATION (“IBM”). THIS DOCUMENT DEFINES THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS 

UNDER WHICH THE SOFTWARE IS BEING LICENSED TO YOU BY IBM. IF YOU DO NOT 

AGREE WITH THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE, THEN WITHIN 14 DAYS 

AFTER YOUR ACQUISITION OF THE DEVICE YOU MAY RETURN THE DEVICE FOR A 

FULL REFUND. IF YOU DO NOT SO RETURN THE DEVICE WITHIN THE 14 DAYS, THEN 

YOU WILL BE ASSUMED TO HAVE AGREED TO THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS. 

The Programs are licensed not sold. IBM, or the applicable IBM country organization, grants you 

a license for the Programs only in the country where you acquired the Programs. You obtain no 

rights other than those granted you under this license. 

The term “Programs” means the original and all whole or partial copies of it, including modified 

copies or portions merged into other programs. IBM retains title to the Programs. IBM owns, or 

has licensed from the owner, copyrights in the Programs. 

1. License 

Under this license, you may use the Programs only with the device on which they are installed 

and transfer possession of the Programs and the device to another party. If you transfer the 

Programs, you must transfer a copy of this license and any other documentation to the other 

party. Your license is then terminated. The other party agrees to these terms and conditions by 

its first use of the Program. 

You may not: 

1) use, copy, modify, merge, or transfer copies of the Program except as provided in this 

license; 

2) reverse assemble or reverse compile the Program; or 

3) sublicense, rent, lease, or assign the Program. 

2. Limited Warranty 

The Programs are provided “AS IS.” 

THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES COVERING THE PROGRAMS (OR CONDITIONS), 

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES 

OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. 

Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties, so the above exclusion may 

not apply to you. 

SUPPLEMENT TO AGREEMENT FOR SOFTWARE BUNDLING AND DISTRIBUTION FOR 

ALDC 

3. Limitation of Remedies 

IBM's entire liability under this license is the following; 

1) For any claim (including fundamental breach), in any form, related in any way to this 

license, IBM’s liability will be for actual damages only and will be limited to the greater of; 

a) the equivalent of U.S.$25,000 in your local currency; or 

b) IBM's then generally available license fee for the Program 

This limitation will not apply to claims for bodily injury or damages to real or tangible personal 

property for which IBM is legally liable. IBM will not be liable for any lost profits, lost savings, or 

any incidental damages or other economic consequential damages, even if IBM, or its 

authorized supplier, has been advised of the possibility of such damages. IBM will not be liable 

for any damages claimed by you based on any third party claim. This limitation of remedies also 

applies to any developer of Programs supplied to IBM. IBM’s and the developer’s limitations of 

remedies are not cumulative. Such developer is an intended beneficiary of this Section. Some 

jurisdictions do not allow these limitations or exclusions, so they may not apply to you. 

4. General 

You may terminate your license at any time. IBM may terminate your license if you fail to comply 

with the terms and conditions of this license. In either event, you must destroy all your copies of 

the Program. You are responsible for payment of any taxes, including personal property taxes, 

resulting from this license. Neither party may bring an action, regardless of form, more than two 

years after the cause of action arose. If you acquired the Program in the United States, this 

license is governed by the laws of the State of New York. If you acquired the Program in 

Canada, this license is governed by the laws of the Province of Ontario. Otherwise, this license 

is governed by the laws of the country in which you acquired the Program. 

v

Monotype Imaging License Agreement 

1. “Software” shall mean the digitally encoded, machine readable, scalable outline data as 

encoded in a special format as well as the UFST Software. 

2. You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display 

weights, styles and versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (“Typefaces”) 

solely for your own customary business or personal purposes at the address stated on the 

registration card you return to Monotype Imaging. Under the terms of this License 

Agreement, you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three printers. If you need to have 

access to the fonts on more than three printers, you need to acquire a multi-user license 

agreement which can be obtained from Monotype Imaging. Monotype Imaging retains all 

rights, title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights are granted to you other 

than a License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement. 

3. To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging, you agree to maintain the Software and 

other proprietary information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish 

reasonable procedures regulating access to and use of the Software and Typefaces. 

4. You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces, except that you may make 

one backup copy. You agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices 

as those appearing on the original. 

5. This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces, unless sooner 

terminated. This License may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with 

the terms of this License and such failure is not remedied within thirty (30) days after notice 

from Monotype Imaging. When this License expires or is terminated, you shall either return 

to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the Software and Typefaces and 

documentation as requested. 

6. You agree that you will not modify, alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or 

decompile the Software. 

7. Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software will perform 

in accordance with Monotype Imaging-published specifications, and the diskette will be free 

from defects in material and workmanship. Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the 

Software is free from all bugs, errors and omissions. 

The parties agree that all other warranties, expressed or implied, including warranties of 

fitness for a particular purpose and merchantability, are excluded. 

8. Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the 

Software and Typefaces is repair or replacement of defective parts, upon their return to 

Monotype Imaging. 

In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits, lost data, or any other incidental 

or consequential damages, or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the 

Software and Typefaces. 

9. Massachusetts U.S.A. law governs this Agreement. 

10. You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise transfer the Software and/or Typefaces 

without the prior written consent of Monotype Imaging. 

11. Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the 

Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at FAR 252-227-7013, subdivision 

(b)(3)(ii) or subparagraph (c)(1)(ii), as appropriate. Further use, duplication or disclosure is 

subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52.227-19 

(c)(2). 

12. You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement, understand it, and agree to be bound 

by its terms and conditions. Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation 

not contained in this Agreement. No change in this Agreement is effective unless written and 

signed by properly authorized representatives of each party. By opening this diskette 

package, you agree to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement. 

vi

About this Operation Guide 

This Operation Guide contains the following chapters: 

1 Copy Functions 

Describes the full-featured copying functions of the machine. 

2 Document and Output Management Functions 

Explains the copier’s versatile functions for managing original documents and jobs during 

copying. 

3 Printer Settings 

Explains how to configure the printer function. 

4 Scanner Settings 

Explains the scanner functions and settings that can be configured from the machine touch 

panel. 

5 Setting Scanner from a Web Browser 

Explains the scanner settings that can be configured from a web browser. 

6 Included Scanner Utilities 

Introduces the scanner utilities. 

7 System Menu 

Covers general default settings. 

8 Job Accounting 

Explains how to manage job accounting to share usage among various departments. 

Appendix 

Lists the machine specifications (mechanical and performance specifications and supported 

paper) and intercompatible functions. Includes a glossary. 

vii

Included Guides 

The following guides are included with this machine. Refer to the proper guide based on your 

requirements. 

Operation Guide 

Included Printer Utilities 

Describes how to load paper, basic copy, print and scan operations, and troubleshooting. 

Advanced Operation Guide (This Guide) 

Explains copying, printing and scanning features in depth, as well as default settings. This guide 

is contained on the CD-ROM as a PDF file. 

Extended Driver User Guide 

Explains how to install and setup the printer driver. This guide is contained on the CD-ROM as a 

PDF file. 

PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference 

Explains each command for realizing various features and controls through prescribed 

commands. This guide is contained on the CD-ROM as a PDF file. 

This product includes the following printer utilities Install them as necessary. For details, refer to 

the manual included with each utility. 

• Network Tool for Clients 

• Direct Printing 

• Print Monitor 

• Port Setup 

• Quick Setup 

viii

Conventions in This Guide 

The following conventions are used depending on the nature of the description. 

Convention Description Example 

Bold Indicates a message or button 

displayed on the machine’s operation 

panel key or a computer screen. 

Press the Start key. 

[Regular] Indicates touch panel keys. Press [Basic]. 

Italic Indicates touch panel messages. Ready to copy is displayed. 

Note Indicates supplemental information or 

operations for reference. NOTE: - 

Important 

Indicates items that are required or 

prohibited so as to avoid problems. IMPORTANT: - 

ix

Originals and Paper Sizes 

This section explains the notation used in this guide when referring to sizes of originals or paper 

sizes. 

As in A4 and B5, which may be used either in the horizontal or vertical direction, in order to 

indicate the orientation of the original/paper, horizontal orientation is indicated by an additional R 

character. 

Set direction Indicated size † 

Vertical direction 

B 

B 

A4, B5, A5, B6, A6, 16K 

A 

A 

Original 

Size 

For original/paper, dimension A is longer than B. 

Horizontal direction 

B 

B 

A4R, B5R, A5R, B6R, A6R, 

16KR 

A 

A 

Original 

Size 

For original/paper, dimension A is shorter than B. 

† The size of original/paper that can be used depends on the function and source tray. For 

further details, refer to the page detailing that function or source tray. 

x

Contents 

Sample of Color Setting Adjustment ............................................................................................................... i 

One touch Image Adjust .............................................................................................................. i 

Color Balance Adjust .................................................................................................................. ii 

Hue Adjust ................................................................................................................................. iii 

Sharpness Adjust ...................................................................................................................... iii 

Legal and Safety Information ........................................................................................................................ iv 

Regarding Tradenames ............................................................................................................. iv 

About this Operation Guide ......................................................................................................................... vii 

Included Guides ....................................................................................................................... viii 

Conventions in This Guide ........................................................................................................ ix 

Originals and Paper Sizes .......................................................................................................... x 

1 Copy Functions ............................................................................................. 1-1 

Selecting Paper Source ......................................................................................................... 1-2 

Selecting original size ............................................................................................................. 1-3 

Copy Quantity ......................................................................................................................... 1-6 

Orientation of Original Document ............................................................................................ 1-7 

Offset Mode ............................................................................................................................. 1-9 

Stapling ................................................................................................................................. 1-10 

Punching ............................................................................................................................... 1-12 

Combine Mode ...................................................................................................................... 1-14 

Margin Mode ......................................................................................................................... 1-17 

Centering Originals ............................................................................................................... 1-18 

Border Erase ......................................................................................................................... 1-19 

Poster .................................................................................................................................... 1-22 

Page Numbering ................................................................................................................... 1-23 

Cover Mode ........................................................................................................................... 1-25 

Booklet from Sheets .............................................................................................................. 1-26 

Booklets from Facing Pages ................................................................................................. 1-28 

Memo Mode .......................................................................................................................... 1-30 

Batch Scanning ..................................................................................................................... 1-32 

Sharpness Adjust .................................................................................................................. 1-33 

Background Exposure Adjust ................................................................................................ 1-34 

Proof Copy ............................................................................................................................ 1-35 

Repeat Copy ......................................................................................................................... 1-36 

OHP Backing Sheet Mode .................................................................................................... 1-39 

Auto Rotation ....................................................................................................................... 1-41 

Selecting Output Destination ................................................................................................. 1-42 

EcoPrint ................................................................................................................................. 1-43 

Inverted Copying .................................................................................................................. 1-44 

Mirror Copying ....................................................................................................................... 1-45 

Auto Selection Mode ............................................................................................................. 1-46 

Image Repeat Copy .............................................................................................................. 1-48 

Color Balance Adjust ............................................................................................................. 1-49 

Hue Adjust ............................................................................................................................. 1-50 

One touch Image Adjust ........................................................................................................ 1-52 

Color/B&W Selection ............................................................................................................. 1-53 

MonoColor Copy ................................................................................................................... 1-54 

Programmed Copying .......................................................................................................... 1-55 

Assigning Register Keys ....................................................................................................... 1-57 

Job Build ............................................................................................................................... 1-58 

2 Document and Output Management Functions ......................................... 2-1 

Document Management Functions ......................................................................................... 2-2 

Output Management Functions ............................................................................................. 2-11 

xi

3 Printer Settings ............................................................................................. 3-1 

Print Status Page .................................................................................................................... 3-2 

Interface Configuration .......................................................................................................... 3-5 

Emulation .............................................................................................................................. 3-10 

Font Setting .......................................................................................................................... 3-13 

Page Set Configuration ........................................................................................................ 3-17 

Print Quality .......................................................................................................................... 3-21 

Setting Color Mode ............................................................................................................... 3-22 

Paper Handling ..................................................................................................................... 3-23 

Handling Memory Devices .................................................................................................... 3-27 

e-MPS Functions .................................................................................................................. 3-34 

Other Settings ....................................................................................................................... 3-41 

4 Scanner Settings .......................................................................................... 4-1 

Setting Scanner Functions ..................................................................................................... 4-2 

Scanner Default Settings ...................................................................................................... 4-12 

Programmed Scanning ......................................................................................................... 4-20 

Confirming Sending History .................................................................................................. 4-23 

5 Setting Scanner from a Web Browser ........................................................ 5-1 

Web Page Feature ................................................................................................................ 5-2 

System Setting ....................................................................................................................... 5-6 

Scan to PC Setting ............................................................................................................... 5-16 

Send E-mail Setting .............................................................................................................. 5-20 

Scan to FTP Setting ............................................................................................................. 5-25 

6 Included Scanner Utilities ............................................................................ 6-1 

Introducing the Scanner Utilities ............................................................................................. 6-2 

Scanner File Utility .................................................................................................................. 6-3 

Address Editor ...................................................................................................................... 6-13 

Address Book for Scanner .................................................................................................... 6-32 

TWAIN Source ...................................................................................................................... 6-42 

DB Assistant ......................................................................................................................... 6-49 

7 System Menu ................................................................................................. 7-1 

Default Settings ...................................................................................................................... 7-2 

Setting MP Tray .................................................................................................................... 7-29 

Registering Non-standard Sizes for Originals ...................................................................... 7-30 

User Adjustment ................................................................................................................... 7-31 

Setting Document Management Defaults ............................................................................. 7-38 

Hard Disk Management ........................................................................................................ 7-42 

Printing Reports .................................................................................................................... 7-43 

Checking Total Copy Count .................................................................................................. 7-46 

Character Input Method ........................................................................................................ 7-47 

8 Job Accounting ............................................................................................. 8-1 

Overview of Job Accounting ................................................................................................... 8-2 

Managing Accounts ................................................................................................................ 8-4 

Copy Count per Department ................................................................................................. 8-13 

Activating and Deactivating Job Accounting ......................................................................... 8-16 

Job Accounting Default Settings ........................................................................................... 8-17 

Using Job Accounting ........................................................................................................... 8-22 

9 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................ 9-1 

Solving Malfunctions ............................................................................................................... 9-2 

Responding to Error Messages .............................................................................................. 9-6 

xii

Appendix ..................................................................................................... Appendix-1 

Paper .......................................................................................................................... Appendix-2 

Specifications ............................................................................................................. Appendix-8 

Intercompatibility of Functions .................................................................................. Appendix-14 

Glossary ................................................................................................................... Appendix-23 

Index ................................................................................................................... Index-1 

xiii

xiv

1 Copy Functions 

This chapter covers the following topics. 

• Selecting Paper Source...1-2 

• Selecting original size...1-3 

• Copy Quantity...1-6 

• Orientation of Original Document...1-7 

• Offset Mode...1-9 

• Stapling...1-10 

• Punching...1-12 

• Combine Mode...1-14 

• Margin Mode...1-17 

• Centering Originals...1-18 

• Border Erase...1-19 

• Poster...1-22 

• Page Numbering...1-23 

• Cover Mode...1-25 

• Booklet from Sheets...1-26 

• Booklets from Facing Pages...1-28 

• Memo Mode...1-30 

• Batch Scanning...1-32 

• Sharpness Adjust...1-33 

• Background Exposure Adjust...1-34 

• Proof Copy...1-35 

• Repeat Copy...1-36 

• OHP Backing Sheet Mode...1-39 

• Auto Rotation...1-41 

• Selecting Output Destination...1-42 

• EcoPrint...1-43 

• Inverted Copying...1-44 

• Mirror Copying...1-45 

• Auto Selection Mode...1-46 

• Image Repeat Copy...1-48 

• Color Balance Adjust...1-49 

• Hue Adjust...1-50 

• One touch Image Adjust...1-52 

• Color/B&W Selection...1-53 

• MonoColor Copy...1-54 

• Programmed Copying...1-55 

• Assigning Register Keys...1-57 

• Job Build...1-58 

1-1

Copy Functions 

Selecting Paper Source 

To select paper of different sizes, change the cassette or MP tray paper source. 

Follow the steps as below to select the paper source. 

1 Place the original. 

When [APS] is selected, paper matching 

the size of the original will be selected 

automatically. 

NOTE: You may override the automatic 

paper selection default. For further 

details, refer to Setting Auto Paper 

Selection on page 7-6. 

Ready to copy. ( ) 

11×8½" 

Plain 

11×17" 

Color 

11×8½" 

Plain 

11×8½" 

Plain 

Basic 

APS Auto % 

MP tray 

Plain 

User choice 

100% 

Reduce 

/Enlarge 

Paper Size 

Full-Color 11×8 

100% 

Function 

Auto 

Exposure 

Exposure 

Mode 

Color func. 

Staple Off 

Staple 

Left Top 

Staple 

Program 

2 To change the paper size, press the button corresponding to the desired paper size to select that 

paper source. 

When using the MP tray, refer to Chapter 2 of Operation Guide: Setting Paper Type and Size for the 

Cassettes and MP Tray to set the paper size and paper type. 

3 Press the Start key. Copying begins. 

1-2


Selecting original size 

Specify the size of originals that will serve as the basis for scanning. Be sure to specify the original 

size when copying originals of nonstandard sizes. 

Select the original size from the following groups of original size. 

• Standard Sizes – Select from commonly used standard sizes. 

Inch models: 11 × 17", 8 1/2 × 14", 11 × 8 1/2", 8 1/2 ×11", 51/2 ×81/2", 8 1/2 ×51/2", 8 1/2 ×131/2", 

8 1/2 × 13", 11 × 15", A4 and A4R 

Metric models: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, B6, B6R, A6R, Folio, 11 × 15", 11 × 8 1/2" 

and 8 1/2 ×11" 

• Other Standard Sizes – Select from special-purpose standard sizes. 

Inch models: A3, B4, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, B6, B6R, A6R, Folio, P. Card, OUFUKU HAGAKI, 8K, 

16K and 16KR 

Metric models: 11 × 17", 8 1/2 ×14", 51/2 ×81/2", 8 1/2 ×51/2", 8 1/2 ×131/2", 8 1/2 × 13", Pstcard, 

OUFUKU HAGAKI, 8K, 16K and 16KR 

• Input Original Size – Enter the size for when not shown in the list of standard sizes. 

Inch models 

Vertical: 2 - 11 5/8" (1/8" increments), Horizontal: 2 - 17" (1/8" increments) 

Metric models 

Vertical: 50 - 297 mm (1 mm increments), Horizontal: 50 - 432 mm (1 mm increments) 

• Custom Size – Select entered and registered original sizes. For setting custom original sizes, 

refer to Registering Non-standard Sizes for Originals on page 7-30. 

Standard Sizes 

Follow the steps as below to specify the standard size. 


2 Press [Function]. 

3 Press [Select Orig. Size] ([Select Size Orig.]). 

4 Select the original size. 

Choose [Auto] to match the size of 

placed originals automatically. 

Ready to copy. 

Select Original Size 

( ) 

Paper Size 


100% 

Shortcut 

Back 

Custo 

Auto 

8½×14" 

8½×13½" 

1111/16 

Select 

size 

11×17" 

5½×8½" 

8½×13" 

1111/16 

Input size 

8½×11" 

8½×5½" 

A4 

1111/16 

Other 

stand.Size 

11×8½" 

11×15" 

A4 

1111/16 


Other Standard Sizes 

Follow the steps as below to specify the other standard sizes. 




1-3


4 Press [Other stand.Size] ([Others 

stand.Size]). 


( Full-Color ) 

Paper Size 

11×1 

100% 


Shortcut 

Back 

A3 

B4 

B6 

8K 

Select 

size 

A5 

B5 

Folio 

16K 

Input size A5 B5 

Other 

stand.Size 

A6 

B6 

P.Card 

OUFUKU 

HAGAKI 

16K 

5 Select the original size. 


Input Original Size 

Follow the steps as below to enter the original size when not listed in the standard sizes. 




4 Press [Input size]. 


( ) 

Paper Size 


100% 


Select 

size 

Input size 

Other 

stand.Size 

Shortcut 

( 2~115/8) ( 2~17) 

Y .2 " X .2 " 

Back 

Set original on platen an 

scanning range. (Y side, 

5 Press [+] or [–] to set the Y (height) and X (width) sizes. 

With the metric models, you may enter the size directly using the numeric keys by pressing 

[#-Keys]. 


Custom Size 

Follow the steps as below to specify one of the custom sizes. 




4 Select the original size from Custom 

Size (Use regist). 

to copy. ( Full-Color ) 

Paper Size Set 

11×8½" 

100% 

Size 

Shortcut 

Back 

Close 

Custom Size 

Auto 

8½×14" 

8½×13½" 

1111/16×169/16" 

11×17" 

5½×8½" 

8½×13" 

1111/16×169/16" 

8½×11" 

8½×5½" 

A4 

1111/16×169/16" 

11×8½" 

11×15" 

A4 

1111/16×169/16" 

1-4



1-5


Copy Quantity 

Sets the number of sheets to copy. You may specify up to 999 sheets for a single copy job. 

Follow the steps as below to specify the copy quantity. 


2 Use the numeric keys on the operation 

panel to enter the desired copy quantity. 



11×8½" 

100% 

NOTE: To clear the copy quantity, 

press the Stop/Clear key. Copy 

quantity will be reset to 1. 

APS Auto % 

MP tray 

Plain 

100% 

Auto 

Exposure 

Staple Off 

Staple 

Left Top 

Combine 

Margin/ 

Centering 

Sheet 

Erase 

Reduce 

/Enlarge 

Exposure 

Mode 

Staple 

User choice 

Function 

Color func. 

Program 


1-6


Orientation of Original Document 

Orientation of the original must be specified to to use the following functions. 

• Duplex Mode 

• Split Mode (separate copies from two-sided originals) 

• Margin Mode 

• Auto Center 

• Border Erase 

• Combine Mode 

• Memo Pages 

• Page Numbering 

• Booklet 

• Stapling (optional feature) 

• Punching (optional feature) 

Placing originals on the platen 

Original 

[Top Edge] 

([Back Edge]) 

[Left Top Edge] 

([Left top corner]) 

Placing originals in the optional document processor 

Original 

[Top Edge] 

([Back Edge]) 



NOTE: The default setting for the original orientation may be changed. For further details, refer to 

Orientation of Original Document on page 7-20. 

Follow the steps as below to specify the original orientation. 


2 Press [Function] and then press [ Down]. 

3 Press [Orig. Set Direction]. 

1-7


4 According to the placed orientation of 

the original, press [Top Edge] ([Back 

Edge]) or [Left Top Edge] ([Left top 

corner]). 

to copy. 

tion 


Shortcut 

Back 


11×8½" 

100% 

Select Original Image 

Direction. 

Close 

"Select Original Image Direction." can 

be shown at right side of display. 

Follow the steps. If setting mode is 

wrong, incorrect copy will result. 

Top Edge 

Left Top 

Edge 

5 Press [Close]. 

6 Configure the functions which require specification of the original orientation, such as Duplex mode. 


1-8


Offset Mode 

Outputs printed copies such that each set is stacked 

perpendicular (rotated 90 degrees) to the previous set. 

NOTE: Use of this feature requires paper of the same 

size must be loaded in the different cassettes with 

portrait and landscape orientations. 

3 

2 

1 

3 

2 

1 

3 

2 

1 

3 

2 

1 

Only 11 × 8 1/2", A4, B5 and 16K paper sizes may be 

used with Offset mode. 

Original 

Copy 

Follow the steps as below for using Offset mode. 


2 Press [Sort/Offset] ([Sort/Group]). 

3 Press [On] ([1 set] or [Output each 

page]). 


Paper Size 


100% 

Sort/Offset 

Shortcut 

Back 

Sort 

Offset 

Sort:Off 

Sort:On 

Off 

On 

4 Use the numeric keys to enter the copy quantity. 

5 Place the original and press the Start key. Copying begins. 

If the original has been placed on the optional document processor, copying begins automatically. 

If the original is placed on the platen, Scan next original(s) is displayed. Place the next original and 

press the Start key. 

If all original pages have been scanned, press [Scanning finished]. Copying begins. 

Copied pages are output to the output tray offset per each set. 

1-9


Stapling 

Staples sets of copies. 

NOTE: Requires the optional document finisher or 3000 sheet document finisher. 

The orientations of the original and corresponding staple positions are as follows. 

Cassette Paper 

Load Direction 

Cassette Paper 

Load Direction 

3000 Sheet 

Document Finisher 

Document 

Finisher 

3000 Sheet 

Document Finisher 

Document 

Finisher 

Original Orientation: 

Top Edge (Back Edge) 




Left Top Edge 

(Left top corner) 


Left Top Edge 


Follow the steps as below for stapling. 


2 Press [Staple/Punch]. 

1-10


3 Press [1 staple] or [2 staples]. 

Ready to copy. ( Full-Color ) 

Paper Size 

11×8 

100% 

Staple/Punch 

Shortcut 

Back 

Staple 

Position 

Punch 

Select Original I 

Direction. 

Off 

Left side 

Off 

1 staple 

Right side 

2 holes 

2 staples 

Top side 

3 holes 

Top Edge 

4 Select the staple position. 

5 Place the original and press the Start key. 





1-11


Punching 

Punch holes in sets of finished copies in preparation for binding. 

NOTE: Requires the optional 3000 sheet document finisher and punching unit. 

The orientations of the original and corresponding punch positions are as follows. 

Original 

Copy 

Orientation of Original 

Platen Document 

processor 

NOTE: The inch model provides two-hole and three-hole punching. The metric model provides 

two-hole and four-hole punching. 

Follow the steps as below for punching. 


2 Press [Staple/Punch]. 

1-12


3 Press [2 holes] or [3 holes] for the inch 

model. Press [2 holes] or [4 holes] for 

the metric model. 

Staple/Punch 

Staple 


Punch 

Shortcut 

Position 

Back 

Paper Size 

11×8 

100% 


Direction. 

Off 

Off 

Left side 

1 staple 

2 holes 

Right side 

2 staples 

3 holes 

Top side 

Top Edge 

4 Select the hole punch position. 






1-13


Combine Mode 

Images from either two or four originals are reduced and combined onto a single copy. The page 

boundary of each original can be indicated by a solid or dotted line. 

NOTE: Combine mode supports 11 × 17", 11 × 8 1/2", 8 1/2 × 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 8K and 

16K paper sizes. 

2-in-1 Mode 

Copy two originals onto a single sheet. This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy four 

originals onto one sheet. 

The orientations of the original and corresponding output are as follows. 

Original 

Copy 


Platen 

Document 

processor 

NOTE: When placing the original on the platen, copy originals in the page order. 

1-14


4-in-1 Mode 

For copying four originals onto a single sheet. This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy 

eight originals onto one sheet. 

The orientations of the original and corresponding output are as follows. 

Original 

Copy 


Platen 

Document 

processor 

NOTE: When placing the original on the platen, copy originals in the page order. 

Types of Page Boundary Lines 

Choose from the following options for lines to indicate page boundaries. 

None 

Solid 

Dotted 

Borders 

(Cropmark) 

Follow the steps as below to combine originals. 


2 Press [Combine] ([Merge copy]). 

1-15


3 Press either [2 in 1] ([2-in-1]) or [4 in 1] 

([4-in-1]). 


Paper Size 


50% 

Combine 

Off 

2 in 1 

4 in 1 

Layout 

Shortcut 

Border line 

None 

Solid 

Dotted 

Borders 

Back 


Direction. 

Top Edge 

4 Select desired page sequence from Layout. 

5 Select the page boundary line from Border line. 






1-16


Margin Mode 

You can shift the original image to make space on the copy for binding on the left (right) or top 

(bottom) side. Margin widths are as follows. 

Model Type 

Inch models 

Metric models 

Range 

0 - 3/4" (1/8" increments) 

0 - 18 mm (1 mm increments) 

Margin on the Back Side 

When duplexing, you can also specify the margin on the back side. 

Auto – automatically sets margins to match the front side setting. When [Auto] is specified, the left 

and right margins on the front are reversed on the back. In other words, when the left margin of the 

front side is set to 1/2" (10 mm), the back side right margin is set to 1/2" (10 mm). The top and 

bottom margin widths on the back will match those on the front. 

Separate Front/Back Margins – Enables you to specify the front and back settings separately. 

NOTE: You can set the default margin width. For further details, refer to Setting Margin Defaults on 

page 7-10. 

Follow the steps as below to use the Margin mode. 

1 Place the original so the top edge is aligned with the back or left of the platen. 


3 Press [Margin/Centering] ([Margin/Imag.Shift]). 

4 Press [Margin]. 


( ) 

Paper Size 


100% 

Margin/Centering 

Shortcut 

Back 

Off 

Front page 

( 0~¾) 

.0 " 


Direction. 

Margin 

Auto 

Center 

Left 

( 0~¾) 

.¼ 

" 

Auto 

Back page 

margin 

Top Edge 

5 Press [], [], [] or [] to adjust the top, bottom, left and right margins. 

6 For duplex copying, press [Back page margin]. 

7 Press [Auto] or [Front/Back margin]. 

[Auto] specifies the margin on the back 

side automatically based on the front 

margin. 

For [Front/Back margin], press [], [], 

[] or [] to adjust the top, bottom, left 

and right margins. 


Back page margin 

Back page 

Auto 

Front/Back 

( 0~¾) 

margin 

" 

Paper Size 

( Full-Color ) 11×8 

100% 

Back 

( 0~¾) 

Select Original Im 

Direction. 

" 

Top Edge 

8 Depending on the placed original, select [Top Edge] ([Back Edge]) or [Left Top Edge] ([Left top 

corner]) from Select Original Image Direction. 


1-17


Centering Originals 

When copying onto paper larger than the original size, centers the original image on the paper. 

Follow the steps as below for centering. 



3 Press [Margin/Centering] ([Margin/Imag.Shift]). 

4 Press [Auto Center] ([Image shift]). 


( ) 

Paper Size 


100% 


Shortcut 

Back 


Direction. 

Off 

Margin 

Auto 

Center 

Able to center scanned image on paper. 

Top Edge 

5 Depending on the placed original, select [Top Edge] ([Back Edge)] or [Left Top Edge] ([Left top 



1-18


Border Erase 

Prevents the appearance of shadows from around the edges of originals. 

Choose from the following Border Erase modes. 

• Sheet Border Erase – Use this mode to erase black borders around the single sheet original. 

Original 

Copy 

• Book Border Erase – Use this mode to erase black borders around the edges and in the 

middle of the original such as a thick books. You can specify the widths individually to erase the 

borders around the edges and in the center of the book. 

Original 

Copy 

• Separate Border Erase – Use this mode to specify border widths individually on all sides to 

erase. 

Original 

Copy 

The border widths that can be set for each mode are as follows. 

Model Type 

Inch models 

Metric models 

Range 

0 - 2" (1/8" increments) 


NOTE: You can set the default width for erasing borders. For further details, refer to Erasing 

Borders on page 7-10. 

Sheet Border Erase 

Follow the steps as below to erase the black borders from around the edges of the single sheet 

original. 



3 Press [Border Erase] ([Erase Mode]). 

1-19


4 Press [Sheet Erase] ([Border Erase]). 


( ) 

Paper Size 


100% 

Border Erase 

Off 

( 0~2 ) 

.¼ 

Border " 

Shortcut 

Back 

Sheet 

Erase 

Book 

Erase 

Individual 

BordrErase 

5 Press [+] or [–] to set the border erase width. 

With metric models, you can enter the border width directly using the numeric keys afer pressing 

[#-Keys]. 


Book Border Erase 

Follow the steps as below to erase the black borders around the edges of original such as a book. 




4 Press [Book Erase]. 


( ) 

Paper Size 


100% 

Border Erase 

Off 

Border 

Shortcut 

Back 

( 0~2 ) 

( 0~2 ) 

.¼ .½ 

" Center 

" 

Sheet 

Erase 

Book 

Erase 

Individual 

BordrErase 

5 Press [+] or [–] to set the Border (outer edges) and Center (middle) border widths. 

With metric models, you can enter the border width directly using the numeric keys afer pressing 

[#-Keys]. 


Separate Border Erase 

Follow the steps as below to erase the black borders specifying the width of the borders individually. 




1-20


4 Press [Individual BordrErase] 

([Individual Erase Mode]). 

Paper Size 


11×8 

100% 

Border Erase 

Shortcut 

Back 

Off 

¼" ¼" 

Top 

Bottom 


Direction. 

Sheet 

Erase 

Book 

Erase 

Individual 

BordrErase 

¼" ¼" 

Left 

Right 

Top Edge 

5 Depending on orientation of the placed original, select [Top Edge] ([Back Edge]) or [Left Top Edge] 

([Left top corner]) from Select Original Image Direction. 

6 From [Top], [Bottom], [Left] and [Right], select the desired border to adjust the border width. 

7 Press [+] or [–] to set the border erase 

width. 


( ) 

Paper Size 


100% 

With metric models, you can enter the 

border width directly using the numeric 

keys afer pressing [#-Keys]. 

Individual Border Erase 

Top 

( 0~2 ) 

.¼ 

" 

Back 


Direction. 

Top Edge 

8 Press [Close]. To specify widths of other borders to erase, repeat steps 6 - 8. 


1-21


Poster 

For using this device to make copies larger than the 

maximum paper size, use Poster mode to separate 

and copy an enlarged image onto multiple pages. 

The completed copies have overlapping areas. A 

single large page can be created by pasting those 

areas together. 

Choose from one of the following 3 enlargement 

settings. 

Original 

• Copy size – The output paper size is chosen from 

the following sizes. Copy is enlarged according to the selected paper size. 

Copy 

Model Type 

Paper size 

Inch models 34 × 44", 22 × 34", 17 × 22" 

Metric models A0, A1, A2 

• Auto zoom prioirty – Specify the output zoom size from 100 to 400%. Image will be output on 

the necessary number of copies for the specified zoom size. 

• No. of Shts – Select number of sheets to split the image from 2, 4, or 8 sheets. Copy is 

enlarged according to the selected number of pages. 

NOTE: The available original sizes are 11 × 17", 8 1/2 × 11", A3 and A4R. The available paper sizes 

are 11 × 17" and A3 only. 

Follow the steps as below to use poster enlargement. 



3 Press [Poster]. 

4 Select enlargement method. 

If [Copy size] is selected, set the output 

paper size. 

If [Auto zoom priority] is selected, set the 

output zoom size. 

If [No. of Shts] is selected, set the 

number of split pages. 


Poster 

Off 

Copy No.of Shts 

size 

Auto zoom 

priority 

Paper Size 

( Full-Color ) 11×1 

---% 

Copy size 

34×44" 

22×34" 

17×22" 

Shortcut 

Back 

Enlarge image to poster size 

[combine separ. pages to make a 

Please set the original in 

direction. 


1-22


Page Numbering 

Numbers multi-page originals in sequential order. The formats of numbering include: [- 1 -], [P. 1], or 

[1/n]. [1/n] prints the total number of pages in the place of ‘n’. 

The page number will be centered at the bottom of the page. 

Original [- 1 -] [P. 1] [1/n] 

Follow the steps as below for page numbering. 



3 Press [Page #] ([Page numbering]). 

4 Select the page stile from [- 1 -], [P. 1], or 

[1/n]. 


Paper Size 


100% 

Page # 

Shortcut 

Back 

Off 

-1- 

P.1 

1/n 

Start Page # Start # 

Select 

1st page 

Finish Page # 

Last page 

Select 

start # 

Denominator # 

Auto 


Direction. 

Select 

last page 

Sel denominator 

# 

Top Edge 

5 To start page numbering from the page other than the first page, press [Select 1st page] ([Setting 

1st page]). 

6 Press [+] or [–] to select the starting 

page and press [Close]. 


Paper Size 


100% 

Select 1st page 

Back 

( 1~10) 

Page 


Direction. 

Top Edge 

7 To specify the starting a number other than 1, press [Select start #] ([Setting Start page]). 

1-23


8 Press [+] or [–] to select the starting 

page and press [Close]. 

Paper Size 


11×8 

100% 

Press [# keys] ([#-Keys]) to enter with 

numeric keys. 

Select start # 

( 1~999) 

Back 


Direction. 

# keys 

Top Edge 

9 To specify the page to end numbering, press [Select last page] ([Setting last page]). 

10 Press [Manual]. 

Paper Size 


11×8 

100% 

Select last page 

Back 

( 0~-10) 

Page 


Direction. 

Auto 

Manual 

Top Edge 

11 Press [+] or [–] to select the starting page and press [Close]. 

12 For [1/n], to manually set the number for ‘n’, press [Select denominator #] ([Set Denomin. #]). 

13 Press [Manual]. 


Paper Size 


100% 

Select denominator # 

( 1~999) 

Back 


Direction. 

Auto 

Manual 

# keys 

Top Edge 

14 Press [+] or [–] to select the number for ‘n’ and press [Close]. 

Press [# keys] ([#-Keys]) to enter with numeric keys. 

15 Depending on the placed original, select [Top Edge] ([Back Edge]) or [Left Top Edge] ([Left top 


16 Press the Start key. 





1-24


Cover Mode 

Use a distinctive front and/or back cover. Change the paper source and copy the first and lage page 

of the original onto colored or thick paper. 

Cover sheet types 

Front cover 

Front Cvr + Back Cvr 

Description 

Copies the first page of the original onto cover sheet specified paper 

as the cover page. 

Copies the first page and last page of the original onto cover sheet 

paper as back and front covers. 

Paper for the cover page is fed from the MP tray. To supply cover paper from a cassette, refer to 

Specifying Cassette for Cover Paper on page 7-7. 

For duplex copying, The cover page is also printed on both sides. 

Follow the steps as below for adding covers. 



3 Press [Cover Mode]. 

4 Press [Front cover] or [Front Cvr + Back 

Cvr]. 


( ) 

Paper Size 


100% 

Cover Mode 

Shortcut 

Back 

No cover 

Front 

cover 

Front Cvr 

+ Back Cvr 

Automatically adds covers to the co 

set using paper (color or thick) fed 

from a different cassette. 

Load the paper for covers in the 

specified cassette. 

5 Press the Start key. 





1-25


Booklet from Sheets 

Delivers booklet of two-sided copies with facing pages from one-sided or two-sided originals. 

Booklets such as magazines can be created by folding at the center. Also, thick paper or colored 

paper may be inserted as a cover page. 

Paper for the cover page is fed from the MP tray. To supply cover paper from a cassette, refer to 

Specifying Cassette for Cover Paper on page 7-7. 

NOTE: Paper sizes available for booklet (sheet original) are limited to 11 × 17", 8 1/2 ×14", 

11 × 8 1/2", 8 1/2 × 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5 and B5R. 

Use the optional 3000 sheet document finisher and folding unit to bind&fold (staple down the middle 

of the finished output and fold in two). For this operation, the available paper sizes are limited to 

11 × 17", 8 1/2 ×14", 81/2 × 11", A3, B4 and A4R. 

For binding on the left side 

The folded copies can be read from left to right. 

Original 

Copy 

For binding on the right side 

The folded copies can be read from right to left. 

Original 

Copy 

For top binding 

The folded copies can be read from top to bottom. 

Original 

Copy 

Follow the steps as below for these booklet types. 


2 Press [Booklet]. 

1-26



2 sided mode. 

Paper Size 


11×1 

100% 

Booklet 

Shortcut 

Back 

Original 

Finished 

Stitching 

Off 


Direction. 

Off 

Booklet 

Book 

Booklet 

1 sided 

2-sided 

Left/Right 

2-sided 

Top/Bottom 

Open from 

left 

Open from 

right 

Open from 

top 

Stitching 

Front cvr 

Off 

Saddle 

Stitch 

Top Edge 

4 Select binding orientation for Original and Finished. 

If the message Cannot copy with these settings. Modify settings according to the original and 

finishing is displayed, verify that you are selecting the correct original orientation (shown at the right 

of the touch panel) and the correct settings for the original and finished copies. 

5 If the optional 3000 sheet document finisher and folding unit are installed, [Saddle stitch] ([Centre 

Staple]) is displayed. To set bind&fold, press [Saddle stitch] ([Centre Staple]). 

Press [Bind & Fold] and press [Close]. 

Up to 16 sheets (64 pages) can be 

processed with bind&fold. 

2 sided mode. ( Full-Color ) 

Saddle Stitch 

Paper Size 

11×1 

100% 

Back 

No cover 

Bind & 

Fold 

6 To insert a cover page, press [Stitching Front Cvr] ([Stitching Front cov.]). 

Press [On] and press [Close]. 

2 sided mode. ( ) 

Paper Size 


100% 

Stitching Front Cvr 

Back 

Off 

On 

Automatically adds covers in book 

binding mode using paper (color o 

thick) fed from a different cassette 

Load the paper for covers in the 

specified cassette. 


NOTE: When using the platen, be sure to place the originals in page order. 





1-27


Booklets from Facing Pages 

Copies book originals to booklets consisting of two-sided copies with facing pages. Booklets such 

as magazines can be created by folding at the center. Also, thick paper or colored paper may be 

inserted as a cover page. 

You can change the cassette set as the paper to be used for the cover page. For further details, 

refer to Specifying Cassette for Cover Paper on page 7-7. 

NOTE: Original sizes that can be used with Booklets from Facing Pages are limited to 11 × 17", 

8 1/2 × 11", A3, B4, A4R, B5R, A5R, 8K, and output paper size is limited to 11 × 17", 8 1/2 ×14", 

11 × 8 1/2", 8 1/2 × 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5 and B5R. 

Use the optional 3000 sheet document finisher and folding unit to bind&fold (staple down the middle 

of the finished output and fold in two). For this operation, the available paper sizes are limited to 

11 × 17", 8 1/2 ×14", 81/2 × 11", A3, B4 and A4R. 

Follow the steps as below for these booklet types. 

1 Place the book original and press [Function]. 


3 Press [BookBooklet]. 

Set first page. 

Press "Start" key. 

Paper Size 

11×1 

100% 

Booklet 

Off 

Booklet 

Book 

Booklet 

Book 

Left 

Book 

Right 

Open from 

left 

Open from 

right 

Shortcut 

Original Finished Stitching 

Off 

Copy on 

front cvr 

Off 

Saddle 

Stitch 

Back 

Set the book or 

top side direct 

4 Select the original and finished types. 

5 If the optional 3000 sheet document finisher and folding unit are installed, [Saddle stitch] ([Centre 

Staple]) is displayed. To set bind&fold, press [Saddle stitch] ([Centre Staple]). 

Press [Bind & Fold] and press [Close]. 

Up to 16 sheets (64 pages) can be 

processed with bind&fold. 

Set first page. 

Paper Size 

Press "Start" key. 11×1 

100% 

Saddle Stitch 

Back 

No cover 

Bind & 

Fold 

6 To insert a cover page, press [Copy on front cvr] ([Copy on front cov.]). 

7 Press [On] and press [Close]. 

Set cover page. 

Press "Start" key. 

Copy on front cover 

Paper Size 

11×1 

100% 

Back 

Set the book or 

top side direct 

Off 

On 

When selecting ON for copying on the 

front cover, follow the instruction. 

1.Scan front cover book original. 

2.Start scan book originals. 

1-28


8 Press the Start key. Scanning of the original begins. 

Scan next original(s) is displayed. Place the next original and press the Start key. 


1-29


Memo Mode 

Makes copies with a space for adding notes. You can also copy two originals onto the same sheet 

with a space for notes. 

NOTE: Memo page mode supports 11 × 17", 11 × 8 1/2", 8 1/2 × 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 8K, 

16K page sizes. 

Layout A 

Reduces images of one original page for copying onto half of a single page, leaving the other half 

blank for notes. 

Original 

Copy 

Layout B 

Reduces images of two original pages for copying onto half of a single page, leaving the other half 

blank for notes. 

Original 

Copy 

Types of Page Boundary Lines 

Choose from the following options for lines to indicate page boundaries. 

None 

Solid 

Dotted 

Borders 

(Cropmark) 

Follow the steps as below for Memo mode. 


1-30


2 Press [Memo Pages]. 

3 Press [Layout A] or [Layout B]. 


Paper Size 


50% 

Memo Pages 

Off 

Manual Layout A 

Layout B 

Layout 

Shortcut 

Border line 

None 

Solid 

Dotted 

Borders 

Back 


Direction. 

Top Edge 

4 Select desired page sequence from Layout. 

5 Select the page boundary line from Border line. 






1-31


Batch Scanning 

Scans multiple originals for a single copy job without using the optional document processor. Divide 

the original into smaller sets and scan each set with the document processor. In Batch Scanning 

mode, you can continue scanning originals until you press [Scanning finished]. 

Follow the steps as below to use batch scanning. 


2 Press [Batch Scanning]. 

3 Press [On]. 

Place originals then press Start key. 

Paper Size 

11×8 

100% 


Shortcut 

Back 

Off 

On 

Copy images from Document Proce 

platen for output as one job. 


Place the next original and press the Start key. Scan the remaining original pages in the same 

manner. 

When done, press [Scanning finished]. Copying begins. 

1-32



Adjust the sharpness of image outlines. When copying penciled originals with rough or broken lines, 

clear copies can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward [Sharpen]. When copying images made 

up of patterned dots such as magazine phots, in which moire † patterns appear, edge softening and 

weakening of the moire effect can be obtained by setting the sharpness toward [Unsharpen]. 

Refer to the sample image in Sharpness Adjust on page iii for examples of the effect of sharpness 

adjustment. 

Follow the steps below to adjust sharpness. 



3 Press [Sharpness]. 

4 Press [Unsharpen] or [Sharpen] to 

adjust sharpness. 


Paper Size 


100% 

Sharpness 

Shortcut 

Back 

Unsharpen 

Sharpen 

Light:Shade on image edge. 

Dark:Accent edges of text and fine 

This function is available in B&W a 

color copying. 


† Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots. 

1-33


Background Exposure Adjust 

Lightens the background of color originals with dark 

backgrounds. 

NOTE: This feature is used with full color and auto 

color copying. Background Exposure Adjust is 

disabled during auto color copying when the a black & 

white original has been detected. 

Original 

Copy 

Follow the steps below to use background exposure adjust. 


2 Press [Color func.] ([Colour func.]). 

3 Press [Background exp.adj.]. 

4 Press [On]. 


( ) 

Paper Size 


100% 

Background exp. adj. 

Shortcut 

Removes the background of originals when copying. 

Available when copying in Color or 2-color mode 

Back 

Off 

On 

Lighter 

Darker 

5 Press [Lighter] or [Darker] to adjust the background darkness. 


1-34


Proof Copy 

Make a test copy of a single set to verify settings before printing the remaining sets. If a problem is 

found, avoid wasting paper canceling the remaining copy job. 

Follow the steps below to do a Proof copy job. 


2 Press [Proof Copy] ([Test Copy]). 

3 Press [On]. 

Ready to Proof Copy. ( ) 

Paper Size 


100% 

Proof Copy 

Shortcut 

Back 

Off 

Proof copy outputs one set for proo 

On 

4 Place the original and press the Start key. The proof copy begins. 

5 After printing a single test copy, a 

confirmation screen will be displayed, 

and the copier will remain in standby 

mode until the job is approved or 

cancelled. Check the proof copy. 

If it is acceptable, press the Start key. 

The remaining sets will be printed. 

To change the copy quantity, press 

[Change Preset] and change the copy 

count. 

Orig. Page 

11×8½" 

1 sided 

Top Edge 

If there is a problem with the copy, press [Cancel] to redo the copy settings. 

Job 

Check proof copy. 

To stop and retry, press "Cancel" key. 

To continue to print, press "Start" key. 

APS 

Count/Set 

11×8½" 

Color, 1 side 

Plain 

Output 

Top tray 

Change 

Preset 

1-35


Repeat Copy 

Set Repeat Copy to enable printing additional sets if required after copy completion. For confidential 

documents, configure a passcode to use with Repeat Copy. If set, enter the correct passcode when 

using Repeat Copy. Printing will not occur if the passcodes do not match. 

NOTE: Repeat Copy jobs are erased when the main power is switched off. 

Repeat Copy is not available when using document management function. 

Repeat Copy is not available if the optional security kit has been installed. 

It is also possible to disable Repeat Copy or configure Repeat Copy in default settings mode. For 

further details, refer to Enabling Repeat Copy on page 7-11. 

Preparing a Job for Repeat Copy 

Configure Repeat Copy as shown below. 


2 Press [Repeat Copy]. 

3 Press [On]. 

For confidential jobs, press [# keys] 

([#-Keys]) and input the passcode. 


Repeat Copy 

Password 

( ) 

Paper Size 


100% 

Shortcut 

Back 

Off 

On 

# keys 

Modify copy allows sets to be save 

to the HDD. 

Using Repeat Copy function, 

jobs can be recalled and output. 

Individual passwords can be set. 

NOTE: Input the passcode 1 - 8 digits in length. 

If the passcode is forgotten, Repeat Copy printing is not possible. Keep a record of the passcode as 

needed. 

Repeat Copy Output 

4 Place the original and press the Start key. Copying begins and the job is stored as a Repeat Copy 

job. 

Press the Repeat Copy key to display the Repeat Copy list and review stored jobs. Jobs shown in 

the list can be reprinted, viewed, or deleted. 

Re-Printing Jobs 

Follow the steps as below to reprint a Repeat Copy job. 

1 Press the Repeat Copy key. 

1-36


2 Select the job to reprint and press 

[Reprint]. 

Repeat Copy 

Job User Original Set Registration Type 

Norm. Copy 

Norm. Copy 

Reprint 

Delete 

Check 

Details 

Repeat Copy 

3 If a passcode was specified, a passcode input screen is displayed. Use the numeric keys to enter 

the pass code and press [Enter]. 

4 Press [+] or [–], or use the numeric keys 

to set the number of copies. 

Stop 

Set 

Printing 

5 Press [Printing]. Printing begins. 

Reviewing Jobs 

Follow the steps as below to check the stored Repeat Copy jobs. 


2 Select the job to review and press [Check Details]. 

3 If a passcode was specified, a passcode input screen is displayed. Use the numeric keys to enter 

the passcode and press [Enter]. 

4 Check the job details. Press [Print from 

1st] ([Head Print]) to print the first page 

for reviewing. 

Check Details / Reprint 

Item 

User name 

Job name 

Orig. Page 

Set 

Print size 

Input Source 

Registration Date 

Output 

11×8½" 

Copy 

Top tray 

Details 

Print 

from 1st 

Job 

5 After reviewing the job, press [Close]. To review other jobs, repeat steps 2 to 5. 

6 Press [End]. The touch panel will return to the [Basic] screen. 

1-37


Deleting Repeat Copy Jobs 

Follow the steps as below to delete stored Repeat Copy jobs. 


2 Select the job to delete and press [Delete]. 

3 Press [Yes] to delete the selected job. To delete other jobs, repeat steps 2 and 3. 

4 Press [End]. The touch panel will return to the [Basic] screen. 

1-38


OHP Backing Sheet Mode 

When two or three OHP transparencies are stacked on top of each other, static electricity may make 

them difficult to handle. When using OHP Backing mode, a paper sheet is automatically inserted 

between each transparency, making them easier to handle. Also, the same original page can be 

copied to the backing sheet for multiple page copying. 

NOTE: Never load OHP transparencies into trays or cassettes other than the MP tray. 

When OHP Backing mode is set, the MP tray paper type is automatically set to Transparency. 

If the optional document finisher or 3000 sheet document finisher is installed, you may need to 

specify the output destination for finished copies. For further details, refer to Selecting Output 

Destination on page 7-22. 

Backing Copy 

After copying to a transparency, copies the same original image to the backing sheet paper. 

(* denotes OHP film.) 

1 

2 

3 

1 

* 

1 

2 

* 

2 

3 

* 

3 

Original 

Copy 

Blank 

Outputs a blank backing sheet after copying to a transparency. (* denotes OHP film.) 

1 

* 

1 

2 

3 

2 

* 

3 

* 

Original 

Copy 

Follow the steps below for OHP Backing Sheet mode. 


2 Load the transparencies into the MP tray. 

IMPORTANT: Fan through the transparencies before 

loading. 

Up to 10 transparencies can be loaded at one time. 

Be sure that paper of the same size and orientation 

as the transparencies is loaded. 


4 Press [OHP Backing] ([OHP Back]). 

1-39


5 Press [Copy] or [Blank]. 


( ) 

Paper Size 


100% 

OHP Backing 

Shortcut 

Back 

Off 

Copy 

Blank 

Insert a blank paper between piec 

OHP film, or copy to a OHP back p 

Place the OHP film 

in the Multipurpose tray. 


1-40


Auto Rotation 

Copies the original image rotated clockwise 90 digress if set original and the paper loaded into the 

cassette are the same size but different orientations. 

NOTE: Set whether to enable or disable Auto Rotate mode in default settings mode. For further 

details, refer to Selecting Auto Rotation on page 7-9. 

Auto Rotate mode supports 11 × 8 1/2", 8 1/2 ×11", 51/2 ×81/2", A4, A4R, A5R, B5, B5R, B6R, 16K 

paper sizes only. 

Follow the steps as below to use Auto Rotate. 


2 Press [Auto Rotation]. 

3 Press [Rotate]. 

Auto rotation is enabled. 


Paper Size 

11×8 

100% 

Auto Rotation 

Shortcut 

Back 

No Rotate 

Rotate 

When original and paper have diff 

direction, image will be rotated. 

1-41


Selecting Output Destination 

The optional job separator, document finisher, 3000 sheet document finisher or mailbox can be 

specified as copy output destinations. 

Paper Output 

Top tray 

Job separator 

Finisher tray 

Tray A 

Tray B 

Tray C 

Tray 1 - 7 

Description 

Outputs to the built-in output tray. 

Outputs to the optional job separator. 

Outputs to the optional document finisher tray. 

Outputs to Tray A of the optional 3000 sheet document finisher. 

Outputs to Tray B of the optional 3000 sheet document finisher. 

Outputs to Tray C of the optional 3000 sheet document finisher. 

Outputs to Trays 1 - 7 (1 is the uppermost tray) of the optional mailbox. 

NOTE: Requires the optional job separator, document finisher, 3000 sheet document finisher or 

mailbox. 

Change the default destination for copies in default settings mode. For further details, refer to 

Selecting Output Destination on page 7-22. 

Follow the steps as below to select the output destination. 


2 Press [Select of Output]. 

3 Select the output destination. 


Paper Size 

11×8 

100% 

Select of Output 

Shortcut 

Back 

Job 

separator 

Top tray 

Tray A 

Tray B 

Tray C 

Tray 1 

Tray 2 

Tray 3 

Tray 4 

Tray 5 

Tray 6 

Tray 7 

4 Place the original and press the Start key. Copying begins. 

1-42


EcoPrint 

Set EcoPrint mode to recude the energy consumed. Use this mode when high-quality copying is not 

required (e.g., when making test copies). 

NOTE: The image may appear lighter. 

Follow the below steps to configure EcoPrint. 


2 Press [EcoPrint]. 

3 Press [On]. EcoPrint is enabled. 



11×8½" 

100% 

EcoPrint mode saves toner. 

Output will be lighter. 

Shortcut 

Back 

EcoPrint 

Conserve toner 

consumption. 

Image is light. 

Close 

Off 

On 

1-43


Inverted Copying 

Copies the black and white inverted (reversed) images of black and white originals. 

NOTE: This function is only available for Black/White copy mode. 

Follow the steps as below for Inverted copying. 


2 Press [Invert]. 

3 Press [On]. Inverted copying is enabled. 


Paper Size 

B&W 11×8 

100% 

Invert 

Shortcut 

Back 

Off 

On 

Copy the scanned image with reve 

black and white parts. 

1-44


Mirror Copying 

Copies mirrored images of the original. 

Follow the steps as below for Mirror Copying. 


2 Press [Mirror Image]. 

3 Press [On]. Mirror copying is enabled. 


Paper Size 


100% 

Mirror Image 

Shortcut 

Back 

Off 

Creates Mirror Image of document 

On 

1-45


Auto Selection Mode 

Use the optional document processor to place originals of different widths in one operation. The size 

of each original page is automatically detected and each original is automatically printed to the 

matching paper size or all originals printed are on the same size output paper. 

NOTE: This operation requires the optional document processor. 

Up to 30 sheets can be loaded in to the document processor at once for Auto Selection mode. 

The following paper sizes can be used. 

Inch models: 11 × 8 1/2" and 11 × 17", 8 1/2" × 14" and 8 1/2" ×11" 

Metric models: A3 and A4, B4 and B5 

Mixed Finish size 

Each copy is the same size as the original. 

Original 

Copy 

Same Finish Size 

All originals are output on a single size copy. 

Original 

Copy 

Follow the steps as below for Auto Selection mode. 

1 Place originals in document processor. 

2 Press the Auto Selection key. 

1-46


3 Press [Auto selection] or [Unify Size 

Filing] ([Electronic Filing]). 


Paper Size 

11×8 

100% 

For [Unify Size Filing] ([Electronic 

Filing]), select the size of the first original 

page and press [Close]. Select the paper 

tray from the [Basic] screen. 

Auto Selection 

Off 

Auto 

selection 

1st pg. Orig 

8½×11"/ 

11×8½" 

8½×14"/ 

11×17" 

Shortcut 

Back 

Able to scan mix size originals at 

one time using Document processo 

and copy them in unified paper siz 

Unify Size 

Filing 

NOTE: In order to correctly set the finished bind direction, set the size of the first page of the 

original. 


1-47


Image Repeat Copy 

Tiles the 1 copied sheet with an original image. You 

can also specify the area of the original to repeat. 

NOTE: This function is only available when 

Auto-Rotate (see page 1-41) is set to [Off]. 

Follow the steps as below to use Image Repeat Copy. 

Original 

Copy 



3 Press [Image Repeat]. 

4 Press [Auto zoom priority]. 


( ) 

Paper Size 


100% 

Image Repeat 

( 25~400) 

Shortcut 

Back 

SetOrig.Area 

Off 

Auto zoom 

priority 

# keys 

Off 

On 

5 Press [+] or [–] to set the zoom size. 

Press [# keys] to enter with numeric keys. 

6 To set the area of the original to be repeated, press [On] for Set Orig. Area and then press [Change 

#]. 

7 Press [+] or [–] to input the area of the 

original to be repeated. 


( ) 

Paper Size 


100% 

With metric models, you can enter the 

border width directly using the numeric 

keys afer pressing [#-Keys]. 

Set orig. dimensions 

Shortcut 

Back 

( 0~119/16 ) ( 0~1615/16) (1/16~115/8) 

.1/16 " .1/16 " 

.1/16 " 

Y1: Length from top left of platen to top edge of repeat 

area 

X1: Length from Height from top left of platen to left 

edge of repeat area 

Y2: Height of repeat area 

X2: Width of repeat area 



1-48



Adjust the strength of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black to make fine hue adjustments. 

NOTE: This feature is used with full color and auto color copying. 

This feature can not be used together with Auto Exposure mode (see Operation Guide). 

This feature can not be used together with One-Touch Image Adjust mode (see page 1-52). 

Refer to the sample image in Color Balance Adjust on page ii for examples of the effect of color 

balance adjustment. 

Follow the steps below to adjust color balance. 



3 Press [Color balance] ([Colour balance]). 

4 Press [On]. 


( ) 

Paper Size 


100% 

Color balance 

Shortcut 

Back 

Cyan 

Off 

On 

Magenta 

Yellow 

Black 

5 Press [] or [] to the right of each color to be adjusted (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black) to adjust 

each color. 


1-49


Hue Adjust 

Adjust the color (hue) of images. Make adjustments such as adjusting red to a strong yellow-red or 

yellow to a strong green-yellow to make more creative copies. 

The items that may be configured are as follows. 

• All: Adjust hue for all colors. 

• Yellow-Green&Blue-Magenta: Adjust color 

balance for yellow and green, and blue and 

magenta. 

• Green-Cyan&Magenta-Red: Adjust color balance 

for green and cyan, and magenta and red. 

• Cyan-Blue&Red-Yellow: Adjust color balance for 

cyan and blue, and red and yellow. 

Red 

Magenta 

Yellow 

Blue 

Green 

Cyan 



This feature can not be used together with One-Touch Image Adjust mode (see page 1-52). 

These adjustments are especially useful on rich color images. 

Follow the steps below to use image hue adjust. 



3 Press [Adjust Hue]. 

4 Press [All] or [Each]. 

When [All] is pressed, adjust hue of all 

colors at once. Press [ ] or [ ] to 

adjust hue. 


Adjust Hue 

( ) 

Paper Size 


100% 

Shortcut 

Back 

Yellow 

Red 

Green 

Off 

All 

Magenta 

Cyan 

Each 

Blue 

When [Each] key is pressed, select the 

color combination to adjust and press 

[ ] or [ ] to adjust hue. 


Adjust Hue 

( ) 

Paper Size 


100% 

Shortcut 

Back 

Yellow 

Red 

Green 

Off 

All 

Each 

Yellow-Green& 

Blue-Magenta 

Green-Cyan& 

Magenta-Red 

Cyan-Blue 

Red-Yellow 

Magenta 

Blue 

Cyan 

1-50


Example 1 

Select [Yellow-Green&Blue-Magenta], and press [ ] 

to adjust yellow closer to green, and blue closer to 

magenta. (See page iii – Sample (1)) 

Red 

Yellow 

Green 

Magenta 

Cyan 

Blue 

Example 2 

Select [Cyan-Blue Red-Yellow], and press [ ] to 

adjust yellow closer to red , and blue closer to cyan. 

(See page iii – Sample (2)) 

Red 

Yellow 

Green 

Magenta 

Cyan 

Blue 


1-51



Adjust images as desired to more vivid or more dull images. 

The items that may be configured are as follows: Vivid, Dull, Sharp, Smooth, Light, Dark 

Refer to the sample image in One touch Image Adjust on page i for examples of the effect of each 

setting. 



This feature can not be used together with Color Balance Adjust (see page 1-49). 

Select from one of the 6 available One Touch Image Adjust types. Multiple selections are not 

possible. 

Follow the steps below to use One Touch Image Adjust. 



3 Press [One touch image] ([Quick image]). 

4 Select the image. 



Paper Size 


100% 

One touch image 

Shortcut 

Back 

Off 

Vivid 

Dull 

Sharp 

Smooth 

Light 

Dark 

Choose your favorite quality. 

Vivid, Dull, Sharper 

Softer,Lighter,Darker 


1-52


Color/B&W Selection 

Use to output a combination of color copies and black 

& white copies only a few color copies are needed and 

the rest can be black & white. 

NOTE: Color/B&W Selection is only available during 

full color copying. 

Original 

Copy 

Follow the steps as below to use Color/B&W selection. 



3 Press [Color/B&W selction] ([Color/B&W selction]). 

4 Press [On]. 


( ) 

Paper Size 


100% 

Color/B&W selection 

Shortcut 

( 1~499) 

( 1~499) 

Color Set B&W Set 

Back 

Off 

On 

# keys 

# keys 

5 Press [+] or [–] to set the number of Color (Colour) and B&W sets. 

Press [# keys] to enter with numeric keys. 


1-53


MonoColor Copy 

Specify one of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Red, Green, or Blue, and produce copies with that color 

regardless of original type. 

Follow the steps as below for MonoColor Copy. 



3 Press [Mono color] ([Mono colour]). 

4 Select color for copying from [Cyan], 

[Magenta], [Yellow], [Red], [Green] or 

[Blue]. 


MonoColor 

( ) 

Paper Size 

Cyan 11×8 

100% 

Shortcut 

Back 

Off 

Cyan 

Magenta 

Yellow 

Red 

Green 

Blue 

Only on color selection. 


1-54


Programmed Copying 

Press the program number (1 to 8) to recall the program. After registering sets of frequently used 

functions as a single program, you can simply press the program number as needed to recall those 

functions. You can also name the programs to identify them. 

Registering Programs 

Follow the steps as below to register a program. 

1 Access the copy mode you would like to register and press [Program]. 

2 Press [Register]. 

3 Press the number (1 to 8) of the program 

to register. 

Register present setting 

Select program number. 

No registration 








4 Enter the program name and press [End]. 

NOTE: Refer to Character Input Method on page 7-47 for how to enter text characters. 

5 Press [Yes]. The program is registered. 

Using Programs to Copy 

Press the number (1 to 8) of the program to use for copying. 

1 Press [Program]. 

2 Press the button for the desired program 

number (1 to 8). 



Paper Size 

11×8 

100% 

Recall 

Reg./Delete 

abc 

list d 

Register 

list a 

list b 

file 1 

Delete 

list c 

file 2 

Change 

Name 

Basic 

User choice 

Function 

Color func. 

Program 

3 Place the original and press the Start key. Copying begins using the configured program. 

Editing Program Names 

Follow the steps as below to edit the names assigned to registered programs. 


2 Press [Change Name]. 

1-55



to rename. 

Registration name change 

Select the number for changing name. 

abc 

list a 

list b 

list c 

list d 


file 1 

file 2 

4 Re-enter the program name and press [End]. The modified program name is saved. 


Deleting programs 

Follow the steps below to delete saved programs. 


2 Press [Delete]. 


to delete. 

Delete registration 

Select the number of program to delete. 

abc 

list a 

list b 

list c 

list d 


file 1 

file 2 

4 Press [Yes]. The program is deleted. 

1-56


Assigning Register Keys 

Assigns three frequently used functions listed on the [Function] screen and [Color func.] ([Colour 

func.]) screen to assign keys. Functions may also be assigned from the [Basic] screen or [User 

choice] screen. 

Assigning Register Keys 

Follow the steps as below to assign register keys. 

NOTE: To assign a register key, first set Showing the Register Key on page 7-11 to [On]. 

1 Open the function you would like to assign. 

2 Press [Shortcut] ([Register]). 

NOTE: Functions in which [Shortcut] 

([Register]) is displayed may be 

assigned register keys. 


Combine 

Layout 

Paper Size 


50% 

Shortcut 

Back 

Border line 


None 

Direction. 

Off 

2 in 1 

4 in 1 

Solid 

Dotted 

Borders 

Top Edge 


4 Press the number (1 to 3) to be 

assigned. 


Select the number of program to registered. 

No 

Registrat. 

No 

Registrat. 

No 

Registrat. 

5 Press [Yes]. The registered register keys will be displayed at the right of the [Basic] screen. 

Deleting Register Keys 

Follow the steps as below to delete Register keys. 

1 Press the Register key display the assigned function. 

2 Press [Shortcut] ([Register]) to display Create Shortcut (Register). 


4 Press the number (1 to 3) you would like 

to delete. 



Combine 

Margin/ 

Centering 

Sheet 

Erase 

5 Press [Yes]. The register key is deleted. 

1-57


Job Build 

Job Build Procedure 

Job Build allows you to scan originals in several separate steps and copy at once. In each step of 

the scanning process you can specify different settings (such as zooming and border erase) and 

you can specify different types of originals. Other examples include inserting a blank sheet between 

sets of copies from each step and specifying a front cover page during a duplexing step. 

This procedure describes how to use a job build for the following example. 

Example 

 

Pages marked with * are blank, pages shown in gray 

are colored paper. 

 

NOTE: In this example, color paper to be used for the cover page is set in the MP tray and regular 

paper is loaded in Cassette 1. 

Open the Job Build Screen. Step 1: 

1 Press the Job Build key. 

Settings Common to All Steps 

Sets Duplexing and Repeat Copy. 

NOTE: Set Repeat Copy to increase number of sets later as needed. 

Other settings not used in this example may also be configured here. For further details, refer to 

Setting Functions on page 1-62. 

1-58


2 Press [1 sided/2 sided] 

([1-sided/2-sided]) . 

Ready to Job build. 



Job Build 

- 

Step 

11×8½" 

1 sided 

1 sided Copy 

Select 

Paper 

Offset 

Finished 

Original 

Type 

Auto % 

Reduce 

/Enlarge 

1 sided/ 

2 sided 

Top Edge 

Orig. Set 

Direction 

1 sided copy-Left 

Finished page #: 

Basic 

Quality 

Edit 

3 Press [2 sided Copy] ([2-sided Copy]), 

and from Finished select [Open from left] 

([Left binding]) and press [Close]. 



1 sided/2 sided Copy 

Finished 


Back 


Direction. 

1 sided 

Copy 

2 sided 

Copy 

Open from 

left 

Open from 

right 

Open from 

top 

Top Edge 

4 Press [Edit] and on the next screen 

press [Repeat Copy]. 




Job Build 

- 

Step 

Off 

Auto 

Off 

Border 

Erase 

Off 

Margin/ 

Centering 

Select 

Orig.Size 

Off 

Page # 

Repeat 

Copy 

Top tray 

Select of 

Output 



Basic 

Quality 

Edit 

5 Press [On] and press [Close]. 




Repeat Copy 

Password 

Back 

Off 

On 

# keys 

Modify copy allows sets to be save 

to the HDD. 

Using Repeat Copy function, 

jobs can be recalled and output. 

Individual passwords can be set. 

Original A Settings 

For paper selection, set MP tray (color 

paper). 

6 Press [Basic]. On the next screen, press 

[Select Paper]. 




Job Build 

- 

Step 

11×8½" 

Select 

1 sided 

Original 

2 sided Copy 

1 sided/ 

Paper Type 2 sided 

Offset 

Auto % Top Edge 

Finished 

Reduce 

/Enlarge 

Orig. Set 

Direction 



Basic 

Quality 

Edit 

1-59


7 Select the MP tray and press the 

[Close]. 

Ready to Job build. ( Full-Color ) 


Select Paper 

Back 

11×8½" 

Plain 

11×17" 

Color 

11×8½" 

Plain 

11×8½" 

Plain 

11×8½" 

Color 

8 Place the Original A and press the Start key. Scanning of the original begins. 

Step 2: Set Original A Back Side to Blank 

9 Press [Print from Front page]. 

The back side of the page will be left 

blank and copying will continue from the 

next page. 

riginal(s). 

riginals and press start key. 

nning finished" key when starting copy. 

- Step 

1 sided 

Original 

2 sided Copy 

1 sided/ 

Type 

2 sided 

Auto % 

Reduce 

Top Edge 

Orig. Set 

/Enlarge Direction 

Quality 

Edit 



Next copy page: Rear 

Set 

Cancel 

Insert 

page 

Print from 

Front page 

Scanning 

finished 

Step 3: Complete the Settings for Original B. 

Select Cassette 1 (standard paper) for 

paper setting. 

10 Press [Select Paper]. 

11 Select Cassette 1 and press [Close]. 

12 Place Original B and press the Start key. Scanning of the original begins. 

Step 4: Complete the Settings for Original C 


paper). 


14 Select the MP tray and press [Close]. 

15 Place Original C and press the Start key. Scanning of the original begins. 

1-60


Step 5: Leave Back Side of Original C Blank 

16 Press [Print from Front page]. 

The back side of the page will be left 

blank and copying will continue from the 

next page. 

riginal(s). 



- Step 

1 sided 

Original 

2 sided Copy 

1 sided/ 

Type 

2 sided 

Auto % 

Reduce 

Top Edge 

Orig. Set 

/Enlarge Direction 

Quality 

Edit 



Next copy page: Rear 

Set 

Cancel 

Insert 

page 

Print from 

Front page 

Scanning 

finished 

Step 6: Complete the Settings for Original D 

Select Cassette 1 (standard paper) for 

paper setting. 


18 Select Cassette 1 and press [Close]. 

19 Place the Original D and press the Start key. Scanning of the original begins. 

Step 7: Specify Blank Colored Paper for the Back Cover 


paper). 


21 Select the MP tray and press [Close]. 

22 Press [Insert page] ([Insert blank page]). 

riginal(s). 



Set 

- 

Step 

Cancel 

1 sided 

Original 

Type 

Auto % 

Reduce 

/Enlarge 

Quality 

2 sided Copy 

1 sided/ 

2 sided 

Top Edge 

Orig. Set 

Direction 

Edit 



Next copy page: Front 

Insert 

page 

Print from 

Rear page 

Scanning 

finished 

23 All originals have been scanned. Press [Scanning finished]. Printing begins. 

24 If there are no problems with the output, use Repeat Copy to produce additional copies as 

necessary. For further details, refer to Repeat Copy on page 1-36. 

This completes the steps for the above operation. 

1-61


Setting Functions 

This section explains the copying functions available when using Job Build. 

Select Paper 

Select the paper size. 

1 Press [Basic]. On the next screen, press 

[Select Paper]. 




Job Build 

- 

Step 

11×8½" 

1 sided 

1 sided Copy 

Select 

Paper 

Offset 

Finished 

Original 

Type 

Auto % 

Reduce 

/Enlarge 

1 sided/ 

2 sided 

Top Edge 

Orig. Set 

Direction 



Basic 

Quality 

Edit 

2 Select the MP tray or a cassette and press [Close]. 

Original Type 

Select the original type according to type of original being scanned. The following original types are 

available. 

Original Type 

Description 

1 sided (1-sided) Single sided sheet original. 

2 sided (2-sided) 2-sided sheet original. 

Book 

Magazine or book originals with facing pages. 

1 Press [Basic]. On the next screen, press [Original Type]. 

2 Select [1 sided] ([1-sided]), [2 sided] ([2-sided]) or [Book]. 

When selecting [2 sided], check the binding direction and be sure that the originals are placed in the 

correct orientation. 

When selecting [Book], be sure that the binding direction is correct. 

NOTE: [2 sided] ([2-sided]) is displayed when the optional document processor is installed. 


1 sided/2 sided Copying 

Select either [1 sided Copy] ([1-sided Copy]) or [2 sided Copy] ([2-sided Copy]) for the finish type. 

1 Press [Basic]. On the next screen, press [1 sided/2 sided] ([1-sided/2-sided]). 

NOTE: 1 sided/2 sided copy selection is common to all steps. It may only be configured as the first 

step. 

2 Press [1 sided Copy] ([1-sided Copy]) or [2 sided Copy] ([2-sided Copy]) and from Finished select 

the binding direction. 

1-62


3 Check the orientation of the original. 

NOTE: Incorrect copying may occur if the original is not placed correctly. 


Finish 

Set the Finish options. The following settings are available. 

• Offset (Group) – Each completed set is rotated 90 degrees to the next before stacking. 

• Stapling – Use the optional document finisher or 3000 sheet document finisher to staple the 

completed copies. 

• Bind and Staple – Use the optional 3000 sheet document finisher and folding unit to bind&fold 

(fold the finished copy in half and staple). 

• Punching – Use the 3000 sheet document finisher and punching unit to hole punch the 

completed copies. 

1 Press [Basic]. On the next screen, press [Finished]. 

NOTE: Finish settings are common for all steps. It may only be configured as the first step. 

2 For finishing, press [On] ([1 set]). For further details, refer to Offset Mode on page 1-9. 

For stapling, press [Staple Mode] and complete the settings. For further details, refer to Stapling on 

page 1-10. 

For punching, press [Punch Mode] and complete the settings. For further details, refer to Punching 

on page 1-12. 

For center margin stapling, press [Saddle Stitch] ([Centre Staple]). Press [Bind & Fold]. 

3 Check the orientation of the original. 



Reducing/Enlarging 

Select the desired magnification. 

1 Press [Basic]. On the next screen, press [Reduce/Enlarge]. 

2 Select the desired magnification. 

For instructions on reducing/enlarging, refer to Reducing/Enlarging in Chapter 3 of Operation 

Guide. 


Original Orientation 

Check the orientation of the original. 

1 Press [Basic]. On the next screen, press [Orig. Set Direction]. 

2 Select [Top Edge] ([Back Edge]) or [Left Top Edge] ([Left top corner]). 

1-63




Exposure Level 

Set the copy exposure. The setting items are as follows. 

Item 

Auto 

Manual 

Description 

Automatically adjusts copy contrast. 

Manually adjust the copy contrast. 

1 Press [Quality] and on the next screen 

press [Exposure Mode]. 




Job Build 

- 

Step 

Density 4 

Text + Photo 

Off 

Exposure 

Mode 

Off 

Color 

balance 

Orig.Image 

Quality 

Off 

Adjust Hue 

EcoPrint 

Sharp 

-ness 

Off 



Basic 

Quality 

Edit 

2 Select [Auto] or [Manual]. 

If [Manual] is selected, press [Lighter] or [Darker] to adjust the contrast. 


Original Image Quality 

Specify the Image Quality based on the original type. 

1 Press [Quality] and on the next screen, press [Orig. Image Quality] ([Image Quality]). 

2 Select the image quality. For further details on image quality, refer to Setting Image Quality in 

Chapter 3 of Operation Guide. 


EcoPrint 

Set EcoPrint to save toner consumption. 

1 Press [Quality] and on the next screen press [EcoPrint]. 

NOTE: EcoPrint is a common setting to all steps. It may only be configured as the first step. 

2 Press [On]. EcoPrint is enabled. 



Adjust the strength of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black to make fine hue adjustments. 

1 Press [Quality] and on the next screen press [Color balance] ([Colour balance]). 

1-64


2 Press [On] to adjust each color. For further details, refer to Color Balance Adjust on page 1-49. 


Hue Adjust 

Adjust the color (hue) of images. 

1 Press [Quality] and on the next screen press [Adjust Hue]. 

2 Press [All] or [Each] to adjust the hue. For further details, refer to Hue Adjust on page 1-50. 



Adjust the sharpness of image outlines. 

1 Press [Quality] and on the next screen press [Sharpness]. 

2 Press [Unsharpen] or [Sharpen] to adjust the setting. For further details, refer to Sharpness Adjust 

on page 1-33. 


Border Erase 

Prevents the appearance of shadows from around the edges of originals. The setting items are as 

follows. 

Item 

Description 

Sheet Erase (Border Erase) Erase black borders around the single sheet original. 

Individual BordrErase Specify border widths individually on all sides to erase. 

(Individual Erase Mode) 

1 Press [Edit] and on the next screen 

press [Border Erase] ([Erase Mode]). 




Job Build 

- 

Step 

Off 

Auto 

Off 

Border 

Erase 

Off 

Margin/ 

Centering 

Select 

Orig.Size 

Off 

Page # 

Repeat 

Copy 

Top tray 

Select of 

Output 



Basic 

Quality 

Edit 

2 Press [Sheet Erase] ([Border Erase]) or [Individual BordrErase] ([Individual Erase Mode]) and 

specify the border width to erase. For further details, refer to Border Erase on page 1-19. 



Specify the size of the original. 

1 Press [Edit] and on the next screen press [Select Orig.Size] ([Select Size Orig.]). 

2 Set the original size. For further details, refer to Selecting original size on page 1-3. 


1-65


Repeat Copy 

Specify Repeat Copy as follows. Simply complete this setting once as an initial step. 

1 Press [Edit] and on the next screen press [Repeat Copy]. 

NOTE: Repeat Copy setting is common to all steps. It may only be configured as the first step. 

2 Press [On] to activate Repeat Copy. For further details, refer to Repeat Copy on page 1-36. 



Set margin (blank borders) and centering options. 

1 Press [Edit] and on the next screen press [Margin/Centering] ([Margin/Imag.Shift]). 

NOTE: Margin/Centering setting is common to all steps. It may only be configured as the first step. 

2 Press [Margin] or [Auto Center] ([Image shift]). For further details, refer to Margin Mode on 

page 1-17 and Centering Originals on page 1-18. 



Specify page numbering in the sequence of originals as follows. 

1 Press [Edit] and on the next screen press [Page #] ([Page numbering]). 

NOTE: Page numbering configuration is common to all steps. It may only be configured as the first 

step. 

2 For further details about page numbering, refer to Page Numbering on page 1-23. 



The optional job separator, document finisher, 3000 sheet document finisher or mailbox can be 

specified as copy output destinations. 

1 Press [Edit] and on the next screen press [Select of Output]. 

NOTE: Output destination is displayed with the optional job separator, document finisher or 3000 

sheet document finisher is installed. 

The output destination setting applies to all other steps. It may only be configured as the first step. 

2 Specify the output destination. For further details, refer to Selecting Output Destination on 

page 1-42. 


1-66

2 Document and Output Management Functions 

This chapter explains the functions used for managing original documents as well as jobs during 

copying. 

• Document Management Functions...2-2 

• Output Management Functions...2-11 

2-1

Document and Output Management Functions 

Document Management Functions 

Overview of Document Management Functions 

Document management functions enable you to store documents (such as scanned images of 

originals) on the machine hard disk for printing later. 

Documents are assigned to different ‘boxes’, the document storage areas, depending on the 

functions to be used. Stored documents are accessible from the boxes where they are kept until 

deleted. 

The following boxes are available. 

Box Description Reference 

Page 

Shared Data Box For storage of documents consisting of scanned originals. page 2-2 

Users can print any number of sets whenever needed. 

Synergy Print Box For storage of documents consisting of scanned originals. 

Up to ten of these documents can be combined into a single 

copy job for printing. 

page 2-5 

Shared Data Box 

Save originals as documents in the Shared Data Box to print them later in the desired quantity 

without the actual originals. It is particularly convenient to register frequently used formats. 

Registering Documents 

Register documents in the Shared Data Box as follows. The box can store up to 100 documents. 

1 Place the original to be saved as a document and press the Document Management key. 

2 Press [Document Input] ([Document 

Registr.]). under Shared Data Box. 

Select function. 

Document Management 

08/08 


Synergy Print Box 

Document Document Document Document 

Input Printing Input Printing 

Box 

Editing 

Box 

Editing 

3 Press [Change Name] and input the 

document name. 

Ready to register doc. ( Full-Color ) 


Original 

11×8½" 

08/08 

Refer to Character Input Method on 

page 7-47 for how to enter text. 

If you prefer not to name the document, 

go to the next step. 

Document Input 


Documents 

Doc001 

Change 

Name 

Auto 

Select 

Orig.Size 

Auto size 

Select 

Regi. Size 

Basic 

1 sided 

Original 

Type 

100% 

Reduce 

/Enlarge 

Quality 

2-2


4 Press the Auto Color, Full Color or Black&White key to select a color mode. 

5 Complete the scanning settings required for the original. 

The following functions are available. 

Tab 

Basic 

Function 

Selection of original sizes, selection of original types, selection of document 

sizes, zooming, and original orientation 

Quality Scan exposure level, image quality, color balance † , hue adjustment † , 

sharpness 

Edit 

Border erase and batch scanning 

† This setting is available when the color mode is set to Full Color or Auto Color. 

6 Press the Start key. Scanning of the original begins. Display is returned to Document Management 

when complete. To continue registering other documents, replace the original and repeat steps 2 to 

6. 

Printing Documents 

Print documents stored in the Shared Data Box as follows. 

1 Press the Document Management key. 

2 Press [Document Printing] under Shared Data Box. 

3 Select the job to reprint and press 

[Finish selecting]. 

Document Printing 

Document Data Box 

Doc003 

Doc002 

Doc001 

1 08/08/'05 

1 08/08/'05 

1 08/08/'05 

Up 

Order of 

indication 

Document 

Properties 

Down 


- Shared Data Box 

NOTE: You can change the document sort order. Press [Order of indication] and select from [Sort 

by Date] ([NewOld] and [OldNew]) and [Sort by Name] ([AZ] and [ZA]). 

Press [Document Properties] ([Check/Rev. Details]) to verify details of the selected document. For 

further details, refer to Reviewing and Renaming Documents on page 2-4. 

4 Complete the function settings as required. 


Tab 

Function 

Basic Paper selection, 1-sided/2-sided, sort/offset, stapling † 

Edit Cover page, booklet, margins, page numbering, output selection †† 

† Requires the optional document finisher or 3000 sheet document finisher. 

†† Requires the job separator, document finisher, or 3000 sheet document finisher. 

To change your document selection, press [Select document] and select the document(s) again. 


6 Press the Start key. Printing begins. 

2-3


Reviewing and Renaming Documents 

Check the size, save time and other information on documents stored in the Shared Data Box. Also, 

rename documents. You can also print the first page of documents for review. 


2 Press [Document Printing] or [Box Editing] under Shared Data Box. 

3 Select the document to verify and press 

[Document Properties] ([Check/Rev. 

Details]). 

NOTE: You can change the document 

sort order. Press [Order of indication] 

and select from [Sort by Date] 

([NewOld] and [OldNew]) and [Sort 

by Name] ([AZ] and [ZA]). 

Box Editing 


Doc003 

1 08/08/'05 

Doc002 

1 08/08/'05 

Doc001 

1 08/08/'05 

Document Management - Shared Data Box 

Up 

Down 

Order of 

indication 

Document 

Properties 

Delete 

4 Check the displayed selection. 

Press [Print from 1st] ([Head Print]) to 

print the first page for reviewing. 

To rename the document, press 

[Change doc. name] and enter the new 




Check/Correct Details 

Item 

User name 

Document Name 

Registration Size 

Orig. Set Direction 

page # 

Input Source 

Resolution 



Details 

- - - - - - - - 

Doc003 

11×8½" 

Top Edge 

1. 

Copy 

08/08/’05 05:41 

- Shared Data Box - Box Editing 

Change 

doc. name 

Print 

from 1st 

5 Press [Close] after all settings are complete. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 3. To 

verify another document, repeat steps 3 - 5. 

6 Press [Cancel] ([Job cancel]) or [Close]. Display is returned to Document Management. 

Deleting Documents 

Delete unnecessary documents in the Shared Data Box. 


2 Press [Box Editing] under Shared Data Box. 

3 Select the job to delete and press 

[Delete]. 






Box Editing 


Doc003 

Doc002 

Doc001 

1 08/08/'05 

1 08/08/'05 

1 08/08/'05 

Up 

Down 

Order of 

indication 

Document 

Properties 

Delete 

Document Management - 


4 Press [Yes]. To delete other documents, repeat steps 3 and 4. 

5 Press [Close]. Display is returned to Document Management. 

2-4



Register originals as documents in the Synergy Print Box to print later in the desired quantity as 

needed without the originals themselves. Up to ten of these documents can be combined into a 

single copy job for printing. You can also print out all documents in the Synergy Print Box as a single 

job. 

The Synergy Print Box holds 100 individual boxes (numbered 001 to 100). The boxes can be 

assigned to each department. 

Registering Documents 

Register documents in the Synergy Print Box as follows. 

1 Place the original to be saved as a document and press the Document Management key. 

2 Press [Document Input] ([Document 

Registr.]) under Synergy Print Box. 

Select function. 


08/08 



Document Document Document Document 

Input Printing Input Printing 

Box 

Editing 

Box 

Editing 

3 Select the destination box. Directly press 

the box key or use the numeric keys to 

input the box number and press [Enter]. 



- Synergy Print Box 

4 Press [Change Name] and input the 


Ready to register doc. ( Full-Color ) 


Original 

11×8½" 

08/08 



If you prefer not to name the document, 

go to the next step. 


001 

Documents 

Doc001 

Change 

Name 

Auto 

Select 

Orig.Size 

Auto size 

Select 

Regi. Size 

Basic 

1 sided 

Original 

Type 

100% 

Reduce 

/Enlarge 

Quality 

5 Press the Auto Color, Full Color or Black&White key to select a color mode. 

2-5


6 Complete the scanning settings required for the original. 


Tab 

Basic 

Function 

Selection of original sizes, selection of original types, selection of document 

sizes, zooming, and original orientation 

Quality Scan exposure level, image quality, color balance † , hue adjustment † , 

sharpness 

Edit 

Border erase and batch scanning 

† This setting is available when the color mode is set to Full Color or Auto Color. 

7 Press the Start key. Scanning of the original begins. Display is returned to Document Management 

when complete. To register other documents, repeat steps 2 to 7. 

Combining and Printing Documents 

Combine and print documents stored in the Synergy Print Box as follows. You can combine up to 10 

documents for printing as a single copy job. 


2 Press [Document Printing] under Synergy Print Box. 

3 Select the box where the documents for printing are stored. Directly press the box key or use the 

numeric keys to input the box number and press [Enter]. 

If a password has been set up for the box, a screen for password entry will be displayed. Use the 

numeric keys to enter the password and press [Enter]. 

NOTE: See Setting Box Passwords on page 2-9 for how to set a password. 

4 Select the job to print and press [Finish 

selecting]. You can choose up to 10 

documents. 

ting 

Select: 

1 SUN 05:46 

1 SUN 05:46 

1 SUN 05:46 

Up 

Order of 

indication 

Document 

Properties 

Cancel 

Print once 

all data 

1 SUN 05:46 

1 SUN 05:45 

Down 

Select/ 

Cancel 

Finish 

selecting 

gement - Synergy Print Box 

NOTE: You can change the document sort order. Press [Order of indication] and select from [Sort 

by Date] ([NewOld] and [OldNew]) and [Sort by Name] ([AZ] and [ZA]). 

Press [Document Properties] ([Check/Rev. Details]) to verify details of the selected document. For 

further details, refer to Reviewing and Renaming Documents on page 2-7. 

When selecting multiple documents, choose documents that are all the same size. An error will 

occur if you select documents of different sizes. 

2-6


5 Complete the function settings as required. 


Tab 

Function 

Basic Paper selection, 1-sided/2-sided, sort/offset, stapling † 

Edit Cover page, booklet, margins, page numbering, output selection †† 

† Requires the optional document finisher or 3000 sheet document finisher. 

†† Requires the job separator, document finisher, or 3000 sheet document finisher. 

To change your document selection, press [Select document] and select the document(s) again. 


7 Press the Start key. Printing begins. 

Batch Printing of Documents 

Combine and print documents stored in the Synergy Print Box as follows. 


2 Press [Document Printing] under Synergy Print Box. 

3 Select the source box. Directly press the box key or use the numeric keys to input the box number 

and press [Enter]. 




4 Press [Print once all data]. Printing 

begins. 

ting 

Select: 

1 SUN 05:46 

1 SUN 05:46 

1 SUN 05:46 

Up 

Order of 

indication 

Document 

Properties 

Cancel 

Print once 

all data 

1 SUN 05:46 

1 SUN 05:45 

Down 

Select/ 

Cancel 

Finish 

selecting 


Reviewing and Renaming Documents 

Check the size, save time and other information on documents stored in the Synergy Print Box. 

Also, rename documents. You can also print the first page of documents for review. 


2 Press [Document Printing] or [Box Editing] under Synegy Print Box. 

3 Select the box to be checked. Directly press the box key or use the numeric keys to input the box 

number and press [Enter]. 




2-7


4 Select the document to verify and press 

[Document Properties] ([Check/Rev. 

Details]). 






1 SUN 05:46 

1 SUN 05:46 

1 SUN 05:46 

1 SUN 05:46 

1 SUN 05:45 


Up 

Down 

Order of 

indication 

Document 

Properties 

Delete 

End 

Delete all 

Data/Box 

Box 

Password 

5 Check the displayed selection. 

Press [Print from 1st] ([Head Print]) to 

print the first page for reviewing. 

To rename the document, press 

[Change doc. name] and enter the new 




Check/Correct Details 

Item 

User name 

Document Name 

Registration Size 

Orig. Set Direction 

page # 

Input Source 

Resolution 


- - - - - - - - 

Doc001 

11×8½" 

Top Edge 

1. 

Copy 

08/08/’05 05:45 

Details 

Document Management - Synergy Print Box - Box Editing 

Change 

doc. name 

Print 

from 1st 

6 Press [Close] after all settings are complete. The touch panel will return to the screen in step 4. To 

verify another document, repeat steps 4 - 6. 

7 Press [Cancel] ([Job cancel]) or [End]. Display is returned to Document Management. 

Deleting Documents 

Delete unnecessary documents from the Synergy Print Box. 


2 Press [Box Editing] under Synergy Print Box. 

3 Select the box where the documents to be deleted are stored. Directly press the box key or use the 





4 Select the job to delete and press 

[Delete]. 






Box Editing 

Doc005 

1 SUN 05:46 

Doc004 

1 SUN 05:46 

Doc003 

1 SUN 05:46 

Doc002 1 SUN 05:46 

Doc001 1 SUN 05:45 

Up 

Down 

Order of 

indication 

Document 

Properties 

Delete 

Document Management - Synergy Print Box 

5 Press [Yes]. To delete other documents, repeat steps 4 and 5. 

6 Press [End]. Display is returned to Document Management. 

2-8


Deleting All Documents 

Delete all documents in selected Synergy Print boxes in one operation. 



3 Select the box where all documents to be deleted are stored. Directly press the box key or use the 





4 Press [Delete all Data/Box] ([Delete all 

box data]). 

1 SUN 05:46 

1 SUN 05:46 

1 SUN 05:46 

Up 

Order of 

indication 

Document 

Properties 

End 

Delete all 

Data/Box 

Box 

Password 

1 SUN 05:46 

1 SUN 05:45 

Down 

Delete 


5 Press [Yes]. 


Setting Box Passwords 

Specify passwords to maintain the confidentiality of documents stored in the Synergy Print Box. A 

Synergy Print Box password must be entered to review, print, or delete the documents. 



3 Select the box to be assigned a password. Directly press the box key or use the numeric keys to 

input the box number and press [Enter]. 



4 Press [Box Password]. 

End 

1 SUN 05:46 

1 SUN 05:46 

1 SUN 05:46 

Up 

Order of 

indication 

Document 

Properties 

Delete all 

Data/Box 

Box 

Password 

1 SUN 05:46 

1 SUN 05:45 

Down 

Delete 


5 Use the numeric keys to enter the password and press [Enter]. 

NOTE: Enter a password from 1 - 8 digits long. 

To skip setting a password, press [Clear] and press [Enter] leaving the fields blank. 

2-9



2-10


Output Management Functions 

Overview of Output Management Functions 

Output management functions enable you to manage multiple copy jobs in job queue. You can 

manage both queued and finished jobs. Also, printing from a computer or data received when using 

the optional fax function can be managed as a single print job or fax job, just like a copy job. 

Output management functions are convenient in the following situations. 

Purpose 

Method 

You want to know the order in which a job You can check the status of currently queued jobs on 

will be completed when the job is queued. the [Prt Status] ([Prnt Status]) screen. The jobs will be 

completed in the order listed, from the top down, 

enabling you to check the order of your job. 

You want to know whether a job has been 

completed when the job is queued. 

You want to verify the print status of a job 

being printed from a computer or for data 

received from a fax. 

You want to check the content of queued 

copy or print jobs. 

You want to quickly print a queued job. 

You want to cancel printing of a queued 

copy job. 

Press [Prt Status] ([Prnt Status]). If the document is 

visible in the [Prt Status] ([Prnt Status]) screen, it has not 

yet been printed. 

Like a copy job, verify using the [Prt Status] ([Prnt 

Status]) screen. In the list, indicates copy jobs, 

indicates print jobs, and indicates fax jobs. 

Use the [Prt Status] ([Prnt Status]) screen to verify the 

job type, number of original pages, sets to be printed, 

save time, and printing status. If you need more detailed 

information, select a job and press [Document 

Properties] ([Check/Rev. Details]) to display the job 

name, output paper size and output destination (if a 

destination was specified). 

Select the job from the [Prt Status] ([Prnt Status]) screen 

and press [Move Ahead] ([Move up]). This will move the 

job to a higher position in the output queue. Or, press 

[Interrupt Print] to cancel the currently printing job and 

immediately begin printing the selected job. 

Select the job from the [Prt Status] ([Prnt Status]) screen 

and press [Cancel/Delete]. The job is canceled. 

2-11


Using the Output Management Functions 

Manage jobs using the [Prt Status] ([Prnt Status]) screen for output management function. 

Press the Output Management key. [Prt Status] ([Prnt Status]) screen is displayed. 

[Prt Status] Screen 

Displays information about current printing status and queued jobs. 

Print Management 

End 

8 

1 

Job Input Source Original Set Registration State 

Copy 

Printing 

Copy 

Waiting 

7 

2 

Move 

Ahead 

Move 

Behind 

Interrupt 

Print 

Cancel/ 

Delete 

Document 

Properties 

Prt Status 

3 4 5 6 

1 Job List – Shows job information. The job currently in progress is listed on top, with 

subsequent jobs listed below in the order they will be finished. Job items are indicated by , 

print jobs by , and fax jobs by . 

2 [Move Ahead] ([Move up]) – Increases the print priority of the selected job. (Copy jobs may 

not be moved to a higher priority than print jobs or fax jobs.) 

3 [Move Behind] ([Move down]) – Decreases the print priority of the selected job. 

4 [Interrupt Print] – Cancels the current print operation and begins printing the selected job. The 

job is moved to the top of the list. 

5 [Cancel/Delete] – Deletes the selected copy job. 

6 [Document Properties] ([Check/Rev. Details]) – Displays the Check/Correct Details 

(Check/Revise Details) screen. From this screen, you can check the content of the selected 

job, change the print quantity, and other details. 

7 []/[] – Use to select the desired job. 

8 [End] – Close the Output Management Function. Pressing this key displays the [Basic] screen 

or shows the current progress. 

2-12

3 Printer Settings 

This chapter explains how to configure the printer function. Operation panel settings are used as 

default settings according to the usage environment. Normally, the printer driver settings made by 

the application software take precedence. 

The main configurable settings are as follows. 

• Print Status Page...3-2 

• Interface Configuration...3-5 

• Emulation...3-10 

• Font Setting...3-13 

• Page Set Configuration...3-17 

• Print Quality...3-21 

• Setting Color Mode...3-22 

• Paper Handling...3-23 

• Handling Memory Devices...3-27 

• e-MPS Functions...3-34 

• Other Settings...3-41 

3-1

Printer Settings 

Print Status Page 

Print a status page to check details such as current settings, available memory, and installed 

optional equipment. 

1 Press the Printer key. 

2 Press [Printer Menu]. 

3 Press [Print Status Page]. 

Select item. 

Printer menu 

Print Status 

Page 

Font 

Paper 

Handling 

Others 

Interface 

Page Set 

Color Mode 

Emulation 

Print 

Quality 

RAM DISK 

Mode 

4 Press [Printing]. 

Processing is displayed and the status page is printed. 

5 When printing is complete, the screen returns to printer mode. 

3-2


Status Page Details 

A sample status page output is displayed. 

NOTE: Items or values contained in the status page may vary depending on the firmware version. 

Hardware Information 

STATUS PAGE 

Memory 

Firmware Version: 

Released: 

Page Information 

Installed Options 

Network Status 

Emulation 

Consumable Status 

Interfaces 

3-3


Item 

Firmware version 

Hardware Information 

Memory 

Page Information 

Installed Options 

Network Status 

Emulation 

Consumables Status 

Interfaces 

Description 

The version and publication date of the loaded firmware. 

Shows major function setting information such as the paper size 

and paper type for each cassette. 

Shows overall installed memory, currently available memory, and 

current RAM disk status. 

Shows the current resolution, set page count, and overall page 

count. 

Shows the status of installed optional equipment. 

Shows the setting status of the network. The TCP/IP area shows 

the IP address, subnet address, and gateway address. 

Shows all available emulation modes. 

Shows the approximate remaining toner for the toner containers. 

The remaining toner decreases from 100 to 0. 

Shows all installed interfaces and the fonts and emulation 

configured for each interface. 

3-4


Interface Configuration 

This device includes as standard equipment a parallel interface, a USB interface, and a network 

interface. An optional serial interface or network interface can be installed as needed. 

Emulation and font environments may 

be set individually for each of these 

interfaces. 

Interface 

Setting Item 

Send & receive mode 

Auto 

Value 

Change # 

Parallel 

Network 

USB 

Serial 

Option 

Printer menu 

NOTE: Selection of the interface tab does not specify which interface is used for receiving data. The 

interface is automatically selected when receiving data. 

Parallel Interface Mode Configuration 

The parallel port interface supports bidirectional communication and high-speed mode. For normal 

usage, leave the default setting as [Auto]. 

Mode 

Auto 

Normal 

High Speed 

Nibble (High) 

Description 

Automatically switches the mode to match the connected 

computer. For normal usage, there is no need to change this 

setting. 

Perform standard communication over the Centronics interface. 

Data can be transferred between this device and the computer in 

high speed mode. (Select this mode if data is not correctly printed 

when the copier is connected to a workstation) 

Sends and receives data in a high speed mode compliant with 

IEEE1284 specification. 

NOTE: Use a parallel interface cable compliant with the IEEE1284 specification. 



3 Press [Interface]. 

Select item. 

Printer menu 

Print Status 

Page 

Font 

Paper 

Handling 

Others 

Interface 

Page Set 

Color Mode 

Emulation 

Print 

Quality 

RAM DISK 

Mode 

4 Press [Parallel] and press [Change #]. 

5 Select the desired mode. 

6 Press [Close]. The display is returned to the Printer menu screen. 

3-5


Serial Interface Mode Configuration 

An optional serial interface can be installed. Configure the baud rate (communication speed), data 

big, stop bit, parity, and protocol to be used by the serial interface. These protocol settings must 

match the settings of the computer serial interface. 

Setting Item 

Selection Item 

Baud rate 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 

Data bit 7, 8 

Stop bit 1, 2 

Parity 

None, Odd, Even, Ignore 

Protocol 

DTR (positive) &XOn/XOff, DTR (positive), DTR (negative), 

XOn/XOff, ETX/ACK 




Select item. 

Printer menu 

Print Status 

Page 

Font 

Paper 

Handling 

Others 

Interface 

Page Set 

Color Mode 

Emulation 

Print 

Quality 

RAM DISK 

Mode 

4 Press [Serial]. 

5 Press [] or [] to select Baud Rate and press [Change #]. 

6 Select the desired mode. 

Network Interface Setting 

7 Press [Close]. The display returns to the Serial screen. 

8 Refer to steps 5 - 7 to configure data bit, stop bit, parity and protocol. 


This device includes a network interface as standard equipment which supports TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, 

NetBEUI and AppleTalk protocols to enable network printing for Windows, Macintosh, UNIX, 

Netware and other environments. 

NOTE: Follow the same steps to set the optional network interface as well as the standard network 

interface. 

TCP/IP Settings 

To connect to a Windows network via TCP/IP, set to [On]. Continue to set DHCP, BOOTP, IP 

address, subnet mask address, and gateway address. 

NOTE: Before setting the IP address, check with your network administrator for an IP address in 

advance. For environments that use DHCP or BOOTP to automatically assign the IP address, this 

setting is not required because the DHCP and BOOTP are set to [On] by default. 

3-6





Select item. 

Printer menu 

Print Status 

Page 

Font 

Paper 

Handling 

Others 

Interface 

Page Set 

Color Mode 

Emulation 

Print 

Quality 

RAM DISK 

Mode 

4 Press [Network]. 

NOTE: To set the optional network interface, press [Option]. 

5 Press [] or [] to select TCP/IP and 

press [Change #]. 

Interface 

Setting Item 

Value 

NetWare 

TCP/IP 

Ethertalk 

Network Status Page 

On 

On 

On 

Off 

Change # 

Parallel 

Printer menu 

Network 

USB 

6 Press [On]. 

7 Press [] or [] to select DHCP and press [Change #]. 

8 Press [On] or [Off] and press [Close]. 

9 Press [] or [] to select BOOTP and press [Change #]. 

10 Press [On] or [Off] and press [Close]. 

11 Press [] or [] to select IP Address and press [Change #]. 

12 Enter the IP address using the numeric 

keys. Input the address for the 3 digits 

displayed in reverse black and white and 

press the # key. 

IP Address 

Confirm per 3 lines pressing # key. 

.10 .0 .0 .0 (with #key) 

Back 

Printer menu- Interface - Network - TCP/IP 

13 Input the address for the next 3 digits displayed in reverse black and white and press the # key. 

To correct an address entry, press the # key to select the 3 digit address you would like to correct 

and reenter the address using the numeric keys. 

14 After inputting the rest of the address in the same manner, press [Close]. The display returns to the 

TCP/IP Settings screen. 

Press [Back] to reset the entered address and set the previous address. 

3-7


15 Press [] or [] to select Subnet Mask and press [Change #]. 

16 Set the address in the same manner as Steps 12 - 14 to set the IP address. 

17 Press [] or [] to select Gateway and press [Change #]. 

18 Set the address in the same manner as Steps 12 - 14 to set the IP address. 

19 Press [Close]. The display returns to the Interface Configuration screen. 


NetWare Setting 

To connect via the Netware protocol, set to [On] and set frame mode to [Auto], [802.3], [Ethernet II], 

[802.2] or [802.3SNAP]. 

1 Refer to steps 1 - 4 of TCP/IP Settings on page 3-6 to display the Interface screen. 

2 Press [] or [] to select NetWare and 


Interface 

Setting Item 

NetWare 

TCP/IP 

Ethertalk 


On 

On 

On 

Off 

Value 

Change # 

Parallel 

Printer menu 

Network 

USB 

3 Press [On] or [Off]. 

4 Press [Close]. The display returns to the Interface screen. 


EtherTalk Setting 

Set EtherTalk to [On] to connect this device to an Apple Macintosh computer. 


2 Press [] or [] to select Ethertalk and 


Interface 

Setting Item 

NetWare 

TCP/IP 

Ethertalk 


On 

On 

On 

Off 

Value 

Change # 

Parallel 

Printer menu 

Network 

USB 




3-8



The network status page can be printed when printing the status page. Use the network status page 

to verify the network interface firmware version, network address and network protocol information. 

The default setting is [Off] (Do not print). 


2 Press [] or [] to select Network 

Status Page and press [Change #]. 

Interface 

Setting Item 

NetWare 

TCP/IP 

Ethertalk 


Value 

On 

On (Not specified) 

On 

Off 

Change # 

Parallel Network USB 

Printer menu 




3-9


Emulation 

NOTE: Emulation can be separately specified for each interface. 

Emulation Mode Selection 

[PCL6], [KPDL], [KPDL (Auto)] and [KC-GL] emulation modes are available. 



3 Press [Emulation]. 

Select item. 

Printer menu 

Print Status 

Page 

Font 

Paper 

Handling 

Others 

Interface 

Page Set 

Color Mode 

Emulation 

Print 

Quality 

RAM DISK 

Mode 

4 Press the interface to be configured. 

5 Select the desired emulation. 

NOTE: For [KPDL (Auto)], select KPDL (Auto) alternate emulation. 

For [KPDL] or [KPDL (Auto)], configure the KPDL error printing setting. (See page 3-11) 

For [KC-GL], configure the pen and printing environment settings. (See page 3-11) 

6 Press [Close] after all settings are complete. The display is returned to the Printer menu screen. 

Selecting Alternate Emulation 

When [KPDL (Auto)] emulation is selected, KPDL or alternate emulation is set automatically 

depending on the print data. [PCL6] and [KC-GL] emulation modes are available. 

1 Refer to steps 1 to 4 of Emulation Mode Selection on page 3-10 on page to display the Emulation 

screen. 

2 Press [KPDL (Auto)]. 

3 Press [Alt. Emulation]. 

Close 

On 

Alt. 

Emulation 

Print KPDL 

errors 

Network 

USB 

4 Press [PCL6] or [KC-GL]. 

5 Press [Close]. The display is returned to the Emulation screen. 

3-10


Print KPDL errors 

When printing in KPDL emulation mode, prints details of any errors that occur. The default setting is 

[Off] (Do not print). 


screen. 

2 Press [KPDL] or [KPDL (Auto)]. 

3 Press [Print KPDL errors]. 

Close 

On 

Alt. 

Emulation 

Print KPDL 

errors 

Network 

USB 



Pen and Print Environment Setting 

Specify 8 different pen thicknesses, pen color and page sizes when KC-GL emulation is selected. 

Setting Item Selection Item 

Pen Adjust Pen (1) - Pen (8) 1 - 99 dots 

Black, Blue, Red, Magenta, Green, Cyan, Yellow, 

White 

Page Set 

A2, A1, A0, B3, B2, B1, B0, SPSZ 


screen. 

2 Press [KC-GL]. 

3 Press [Pen Adjust]. 

Close 

On 

Page Set 

Pen Adjust 

Network 

USB 

4 Press [] or [] to select the pen to 

configure and press [Change #]. 

Pen Adjust 

Pen(1) 

Pen(2) 

Pen(3) 

Pen(4) 

Pen(5) 

Pen(6) 

Pen(7) 

Printer menu 

Setting Item 

- Emulation 

Value 

1. dots,Black 

2. dots,Black 

3. dots,Black 

4. dots,Black 

5. dots,Black 

6. dots,Black 

7. dots,Black 

Change # 

5 Press [+] or [–] to set the pen thickness (in dots). 

3-11


6 Press desired pen color. 

7 Press [Close]. The display is returned to the Pen Adjust screen. 

8 Press [Close]. The display is returned to the Emulation Setting screen. 

9 Press [Page Set]. 

Close 

On 

Page Set 

Pen Adjust 

Network 

USB 

10 Press the button corresponding to the desired size. 

NOTE: [SPSZ] is the size specified by the prescribed SPSZ command. For further details on 

prescribed command, refer to the PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference. 


3-12


Font Setting 

Select the default font for the currently selected interface. In addition to device internal fonts, fonts 

downloaded to the device memory, or fonts stored on a memory card or hard disk can be specified 

as the default font. You can also specify the font width, size and pitch. 

Follow the steps as follows to set fonts. 

• Font Selection 

• Font Size Setting 

• Courier/Letter Gothic Font Character Pitch Setting 

• Courier/Letter Gothic Font Width Setting 

• Code Set Selection 

• Print List of Fonts 

NOTE: A different font can be specified for each interface. 

Font Selection 

Select the default font as follows. 



3 Press [Font]. 

Select item. 

Printer menu 

Print Status 

Page 

Font 

Paper 

Handling 

Others 

Interface 

Page Set 

Color Mode 

Emulation 

Print 

Quality 

RAM DISK 

Mode 

4 Press [Font selection]. 

Font 

Back 

Code Set 

Font 

selection 

Standard 

sizes 

A4 

Code Set 

Printer menu 


Select the font. 

Back 

Courier 

L 

UserA 

Font ID 

I000. 

Internal 

Dark 

Detail 

Parallel 

Printer menu 

- Font 

Network 

USB 

3-13


6 Press [] or [] to select the Font ID. 

For internal font numbers, refer to Print List of Fonts on page 3-16. The alphabet characters 

preceding the font number are shown as below according to the font type. 

Display 

I 

SO 

MO 

HO 

Description 

Internal Font 

Soft font (downloaded) 

Font stored on memory card 

Font stored or RAM disk or hard disk 

Font Size Setting 

7 Press [Close]. The display returns to the Select the font screen. 

Set the default font size. When the default font is set to Courier or Letter Gothic, the text pitch 

setting is shown instead of this menu. 

1 Refer to steps 1 - 5 of Font Selection on page 3-13 to display the Select the font screen. 

2 Press [Detail]. 


Back 

Courier 

L 

UserA 

Font ID 

I000. 

Internal 

Dark 

Detail 

Parallel 

Printer menu 

- Font 

Network 

USB 

3 Press [+] or [–] to set the font size. 

Set between 4.00 - 999.75 points in 0.25 point increments. 


5 Press [Close]. The display returns to the Font screen. 

Courier/Letter Gothic Font Character Pitch Setting 

Set the character pitch for Courier or Letter Gothic fonts. 


2 Press [Detail]. 


Back 

Courier 

L 

UserA 

Font ID 

I000. 

Internal 

Dark 

Detail 

Parallel 

Printer menu 

- Font 

Network 

USB 

3 Press [+] or [–] to set the pitch size. 

Set between 0.44 - 99.99 pitch in 0.01 pitch increments. 



3-14


Courier/Letter Gothic Font Thickness Setting 

Select the Courier/Letter Gothic font Thickness. 


2 Press [Internal] or [Dark] in the Courier 

area. 

Back 

Courier 

Close 

Letter Gothic 

Font ID 

I000. 

Internal 

Internal 

Detail 

Dark 

Dark 

Network 

USB 

- Font 

Code Set Selection 

3 Press [Internal] or [Dark] in the Letter Gothic area. 


When emulation is set to PCL6 and the internal font is selected as the default font, select the 

character code set. The available code sets depend on which font is currently selected. 




Select item. 

Printer menu 

Print Status 

Page 

Font 

Paper 

Handling 

Others 

Interface 

Page Set 

Color Mode 

Emulation 

Print 

Quality 

RAM DISK 

Mode 

4 Press [Code Set]. 

Back 

Code Set 

Close 

Printing list 

A4 

Code Set 

Internal 

Option 


Code Set 

Back 

IBM PC-8. 

PC-855 Serbia 

ISO Cyrillic 

PC-863 Canada 

PC-861 Iceland 

PC-860 Portugal 

Code Set 

Up 

Down 

Parallel Network USB 

Printer menu 

- Font 

6 Press [] or [] to select the Code Set. 

3-15


Print List of Fonts 


Print a list of fonts for use as a quick guide during font selection. A list of optional fonts may be 

printed in the same manner. 




Select item. 

Printer menu 

Print Status 

Page 

Font 

Paper 

Handling 

Others 

Interface 

Page Set 

Color Mode 

Emulation 

Print 

Quality 

RAM DISK 

Mode 

4 Press [Internal]. 

Back 

Close 

NOTE: If optional fonts other than 

internal fonts are installed to the 

device, Option may also be selected. 

A4 

Code Set 

Code Set 

Printing list 

Internal 

Option 

5 Press [Printing]. Processing is displayed and the status page is printed. 


3-16


Page Set Configuration 

The following items can be configured for Page Set. 

• Copy Quantity 

• Print Orientation Setting 

• Setting Page Protect Mode 

• LF (Line Feed) Action 

• CR (Carriage Return) Action 

Copy Quantity 

Set number of pages to print from 1 - 999. 




Select item. 

Printer menu 

Print Status 

Page 

Font 

Paper 

Handling 

Others 

Interface 

Page Set 

Color Mode 

Emulation 

Print 

Quality 

RAM DISK 

Mode 

4 Press [] or [] to select Copies and 


Page Set 

Setting Item 

Copies 

Orientation 

Page Protect 

LF Action 

CR Action 

001. 

Auto 

Value 

Change # 

Printer menu 

5 Press [+] or [–] to set the number of copies. 

6 Press [Close]. The display returns to the Page Set screen. 


3-17


Print Orientation Setting 

Set printing direction to [Portrait] or [Landscape]. Orientation can be separately configured for each 

interface. 

Portrait 

Printer 

Landscape 

Printer 




Select item. 

Printer menu 

Print Status 

Page 

Font 

Paper 

Handling 

Others 

Interface 

Page Set 

Color Mode 

Emulation 

Print 

Quality 

RAM DISK 

Mode 

4 Press [] or [] to select Orientation 

and press [Change #]. 

Page Set 

Setting Item 

Copies 001. 

Orientation 

Page Protect 

Auto 

LF Action 

CR Action 

Value 

Change # 

Printer menu 


6 Press [Portrait] or [Landscape]. 



Setting Page Protect Mode 

When a Print Overrun Press GO error occurs, Page Protect Mode is forced to [On]. When this error 

occurs, follow the steps below to reset to [Auto]. 



3-18



Select item. 

Printer menu 

Print Status 

Page 

Font 

Paper 

Handling 

Others 

Interface 

Page Set 

Color Mode 

Emulation 

Print 

Quality 

RAM DISK 

Mode 

4 Press [] or [] to select Page Protect 


Page Set 

Setting Item 

Copies 001. 

Orientation 

Page Protect 

Auto 

LF Action 

CR Action 

Value 

Change # 

Printer menu 

5 Press [Auto]. 



LF (Line Feed) Action 

Set the action to be performed by the device when a line feed code (text code 0AH) is received. 

Item 

LF only 

CR and LF 

Ignore LF 

Description 

Line feed only 

Line feed and carriage return 

Do not perform line feed 




Select item. 

Printer menu 

Print Status 

Page 

Font 

Paper 

Handling 

Others 

Interface 

Page Set 

Color Mode 

Emulation 

Print 

Quality 

RAM DISK 

Mode 

4 Press [] or [] to select LF Action and 


Page Set 

Setting Item 

Copies 001. 

Orientation 

Page Protect 

Auto 

LF Action 

CR Action 

Value 

Change # 

Printer menu 

3-19



6 Press the desired LF action key. 



CR (Carriage Return) Action 

Set the action to be performed by the device when a carriage return code (text code 0DH) is 

received. 

Item 

CR only 

CR and LF 

Ignore CR 

Description 

Carriage return only 

Carriage return and line feed 

Do not perform carriage return 




Select item. 

Printer menu 

Print Status 

Page 

Font 

Paper 

Handling 

Others 

Interface 

Page Set 

Color Mode 

Emulation 

Print 

Quality 

RAM DISK 

Mode 

4 Press [] or [] to select CR Action and 


Page Set 

Setting Item 

Copies 001. 

Orientation 

Page Protect 

Auto 

LF Action 

CR Action 

Value 

Change # 

Printer menu 


6 Press the desired CR action key. 



3-20


Print Quality 

Tone Mode Setting 

Set the tone mode at the print quality setting. 

Select from normal mode and fine mode. 

Item 

Normal 

Fine 

Description 

Appropriate for text and relatively simple graphical objects. 

Enables photographs or gradated illustrations to be finely reproduced with 

smooth scaling. 

NOTE: The data size is increased when fine mode is enabled. Compared to normal mode, printing 

may take longer to complete and there is a higher possibility of memory overruns. 



3 Press [Print Quality]. 

Select item. 

Printer menu 

Print Status 

Page 

Font 

Paper 

Handling 

Others 

Interface 

Page Set 

Color Mode 

Emulation 

Print 

Quality 

RAM DISK 

Mode 

4 Press [Change #]. 

Print Quality 

Setting Item 

Value 

Tone 

Normal 

Change # 

Printer menu 

5 Press [Normal] or [Fine]. 

6 Press [Close]. The display returns to the Print Quality screen. 


3-21


Setting Color Mode 

Set whether to print status reports in color or in black and white. 



3 Press [Color Mode] ([Colour Mode]). 

Select item. 

Printer menu 

Print Status 

Page 

Font 

Paper 

Handling 

Others 

Interface 

Page Set 

Color Mode 

Emulation 

Print 

Quality 

RAM DISK 

Mode 

4 Press [Color] ([Colour]) or [Black&White] ([Black White]). 


3-22


Paper Handling 

Set the following items for setting paper handling. 

• MP Tray mode specification 

• Feed Select 

• Duplex Print Mode Setting 

• Paper Output Select 

• Shared A4/Letter Size Feed Select 

MP Tray mode specification 

Set the paper handling method for the MP Tray. 

Item 

First 

Cassette 

Description 

If there is paper in the MP tray, paper is fed from the MP tray for printer output 

even if another paper source has been selected. If there is no paper in the MP 

tray, paper is fed from the cassette if printable paper is loaded in the cassette. 

Set the MP Tray to be used like the other cassettes. 



3 Press [Paper Handling]. 

Select item. 

Printer menu 

Print Status 

Page 

Font 

Paper 

Handling 

Others 

Interface 

Page Set 

Color Mode 

Emulation 

Print 

Quality 

RAM DISK 

Mode 

4 Press [] or [] to select Multipurpose 

tray mode, and press [Change #]. 


Setting Item 

Multipurpose tray mode 

Feed Select 

Duplex Mode 

Paper Output 

Override A4/LT 

Cassette 

1st paper 

Off 

Tray A 

Off 

Value 

Change # 

Printer menu 

5 Press [Cassette] or [First]. 

6 Press [Close]. The display returns to the Paper Handling screen. 


Feed Select 

Sets Feed Select. If a paper feed source is not specified at the application (print driver), paper is fed 

from the paper source configured here. In addition to the paper cassettes and MP tray, you can set 

the optional paper feeder or 3000 sheet paper feeder as the paper source. 


3-23




Select item. 

Printer menu 

Print Status 

Page 

Font 

Paper 

Handling 

Others 

Interface 

Page Set 

Color Mode 

Emulation 

Print 

Quality 

RAM DISK 

Mode 

4 Press [] or [] to select Feed Select 



Setting Item 


Feed Select 

Duplex Mode 

Paper Output 


(Not Cassette specified) 

1st paper 

Off 

Tray A 

Off 

Value 

Change # 

Printer menu 

5 Press the desired Feed Select key. 



Duplex Print Mode Configuration 

Set the bind direction for the finished output for duplex mode. 

Item Description Preview 

Short edge Binds at the short edge 

bind 

Long edge 

bind 

Binds at the long edge 

Off 

Duplex printing disabled 




Select item. 

Printer menu 

Print Status 

Page 

Font 

Paper 

Handling 

Others 

Interface 

Page Set 

Color Mode 

Emulation 

Print 

Quality 

RAM DISK 

Mode 

3-24


4 Press [] or [] to select Duplex Mode 



Setting Item 


Feed Select 

Duplex Mode 

Paper Output 



1st paper 

Off 

Tray A 

Off 

Value 

Change # 

Printer menu 

Paper Output Select 

5 Press [Off], [Short edge bind] or [Long edge bind]. 



Set the output destination for printed paper. If the optional document finisher or 3000 sheet 

document finisher, or mailbox is installed, you can specify each tray. 

Paper Output 

Top tray 

Job separator 

Finisher tray 

Tray A 

Tray B 

Tray C 

Tray 1 - 7 

Description 











Select item. 

Printer menu 

Print Status 

Page 

Font 

Paper 

Handling 

Others 

Interface 

Page Set 

Color Mode 

Emulation 

Print 

Quality 

RAM DISK 

Mode 

4 Press [] or [] to select Paper Output 



Setting Item 


Feed Select 

Duplex Mode 

Paper Output 



1st paper 

Off 

Tray A 

Off 

Value 

Change # 

Printer menu 

5 Press the desired output destination key. 


3-25



Shared A4/Letter Size Feed Select 

Sets whether to detect A4 and Letter size paper. 

Item 

On 

Off 

Description 

Handle A4 and Letter size in the same manner and print on either 

available paper size. 

Do not handle A4 and Letter size paper as the same. 




Select item. 

Printer menu 

Print Status 

Page 

Font 

Paper 

Handling 

Others 

Interface 

Page Set 

Color Mode 

Emulation 

Print 

Quality 

RAM DISK 

Mode 

4 Press [] or [] to select Override 

A4/LT and press [Change #]. 


Setting Item 


Feed Select 

Duplex Mode 

Paper Output 


Value 


1st paper 

Off 

Tray A 

Off 

Change # 

Printer menu 




3-26


Handling Memory Devices 

Memory Card Operation 

You can use three types of memory devices with this device: memory card, optional hard disk, or 

RAM disk. Use memory card and hard disk by installing into the printer's provided slots. Use RAM 

disk by assigning a portion of the printers memory to RAM disk mode. The basic usage of each type 

of memory is the same. Here, memory device usage is explained using a memory card. 

This device has a memory card slot. Save fonts to a memory card to print using other than the 

internal fonts or to save or read print data. 

Use a memory card with this device to enable the following operations. 

• Memory Card Format (Initialization) 

• Write Data 

• Read Data (data, fonts, programs, or macros) 

• Delete Data 

• Print List of Partitions 

Inserting the Memory Card 

NOTE: Always switch off (◦ posion) the main power switch when removing or inserting a memory 

card. 

Memory Card Format (Initialization) 

Before using a new memory card, the card must first be formatted. Formatting prepares the card for 

data to be written to it. 

NOTE: Format the memory card at the device. 



3-27


3 Press [Memory Card]. 

Select item. 

Printer menu 

Print Status 

Page 

Font 

Paper 

Handling 

Others 

Interface 

Page Set 

Color Mode 

Memory 

Card 

Emulation 

Print 

Quality 

RAM DISK 

Mode 

4 Press [Format]. 

The message All data in the memory 

card will be deleted. Are you sure is 

displayed. 

Memory Card 

Write Data 

Read 

Delete 

Language 

List of 

On Partitions Data Program Data 

Format 

Font Macro Font 

Printer menu 

5 Press [Yes]. Memory card formatting begins. 

6 The screen returns to printer mode when formatting is complete. 

Writing data 

Print data received from a computer onto the memory card. Written data is automatically assigned a 

name (partition name). Verify the written data name according to Print List of Partitions on 

page 3-30. 




Select item. 

Printer menu 

Print Status 

Page 

Font 

Paper 

Handling 

Others 

Interface 

Page Set 

Color Mode 

Memory 

Card 

Emulation 

Print 

Quality 

RAM DISK 

Mode 

4 Press [Write Data]. 

The screen returns to printer mode and 

prepares to write data. 

Memory Card 

Read 

Delete 

Write Data 

Language 

List of 


Format 


Printer menu 

5 Send data from a computer. 

When data begins to be received from the computer, Processing data is displayed, followed by 

Please wait. When done receiving data from the computer, Page remaining is displayed. 

6 Press [GO]. 

3-28


Reading Data 

Read data, program data, fonts, or macro data saved to a memory card. 




Select item. 

Printer menu 

Print Status 

Page 

Font 

Paper 

Handling 

Others 

Interface 

Page Set 

Color Mode 

Memory 

Card 

Emulation 

Print 

Quality 

RAM DISK 

Mode 

4 In the Read area, press [Data], 

[Program], [Font] or [Macro]. 

Memory Card 

Read 

Delete 

Write Data 

Language 

List of 


Format 


Printer menu 

5 Press [] or [], select the item to be 

read, and press [Enter]. 

Cancel 

Processing message is displayed and 

data is read from the memory card. 

Data 

Up 

Down 

Enter 

- 

Memory Card 

6 When finished reading data, the screen returns to printer mode. 

Deleting Data 

Delete data, program data, fonts, macro data or option languages saved to a memory card. 




Select item. 

Printer menu 

Print Status 

Page 

Font 

Paper 

Handling 

Others 

Interface 

Page Set 

Color Mode 

Memory 

Card 

Emulation 

Print 

Quality 

RAM DISK 

Mode 

3-29


4 In the Delete area, press [Data], 

[Program], [Font], [Macro] or 

[Language]. 

Read 

Delete 

Close 

Write Data 

List of 

Partitions 

Format 

Language 

Data Program Data Program 

Off 

Font Macro Font Macro 

5 Press [] or [] to select the item to 

delete and press [Delete]. 

Cancel 


data is deleted from the memory card. 

Data 

Up 

Down 

Delete 

- 

Memory Card 

6 The screen returns to printer mode when done deleting. 

Print List of Partitions 

Print the memory card contents (data names, data size, etc.) as a partition list. 




Select item. 

Printer menu 

Print Status 

Page 

Font 

Paper 

Handling 

Others 

Interface 

Page Set 

Color Mode 

Memory 

Card 

Emulation 

Print 

Quality 

RAM DISK 

Mode 

4 Press [List of Partitions]. 

Memory Card 

Read 

Delete 

Write Data 

Language 

List of 


Format 


Printer menu 

3-30


5 Press [Printing]. Processing data is displayed and the partition list is printed. 

PARTITION LIST 

Device Information 

Partition Information 

RAM Disk Operation 


This device includes a RAM disk function. A RAM disk is a virtual disk device that uses a portion of 

physical memory. By configuring a portion of total printer memory as a RAM disk, you can perform 

electronic sorting (to decrease total required printing time) or save or read data. 

Before using the RAM disk function, set RAM disk to [On] from the RAM disk configuration item and 

set the RAM disk size. After RAM disk configuration is complete, perform the following operations. 



• Read Data (data, programs) 

• Deleting Data (data, fonts, programs, or macros) 

IMPORTANT: The RAM disk function is not available when a hard disk is installed. 

The RAM disk temporarily stores data. All of its contents are erased when this device is reset or 

switched off. 

The RAM disk is created from a portion of this device’s memory available for use by users. 

Therefore, depending on RAM disk configuration, print speed may be reduced or printing problems 

may arise due to insufficient memory. 

NOTE: RAM disk usage steps are the same as the memory card usage steps. Refer to Memory 

Card Operation on page 3-27. 

Some e-MPS functions are available. For more on e-MPS functions, refer to e-MPS Functions on 

page 3-34. 

RAM Disk Setting 

The RAM disk function is set to [Off] (disabled) by default. To use the RAM disk function, set it to 

[On] (enabled). 



3-31


3 Press [RAM DISK Mode]. 

Select item. 

Printer menu 

Print Status 

Page 

Font 

Paper 

Handling 

Others 

Interface 

Page Set 

Color Mode 

Emulation 

Print 

Quality 

RAM DISK 

Mode 

4 Press [On]. 


Restart now message is displayed. 

6 Press [Yes]. This device restarts. RAM Disk mode is set to [On] (enabled). 

RAM Disk Size Setting 

Specify the amount of memory from this device total memory to allocate to the RAM disk. Enabling 

this function allows the use of electronic sorting and decreasing total printing time. 

The maximum size that can be allocated is the amount of total memory minus 36 MB. For instance, 

if 512 MB of extended memory as been installed, the total memory is 768 MB (including 256 MB 

installed at the factory), so the maximum RAM disk size is 768 MB minus 36 MB, or 732 MB. 

NOTE: Set the RAM Disk data size after setting RAM Disk mode to [On]. 



3 Press [RAM DISK Mode]. 

Select item. 

Printer menu 

Print Status 

Page 

Font 

Paper 

Handling 

Others 

Interface 

Page Set 

Color Mode 

Emulation 

Print 

Quality 

RAM DISK 

Mode 

4 Press [RAM Disk Size]. 

RAM DISK Mode 

Back 

Read 

Delete 

Off 

On 

Write Data 

List of 

Partitions 

RAM Disk 

Size 

Printer menu 

5 Press [+] or [–] to set the RAM Disk size. 

6 Press [Close]. If the memory size has been changed, Do you want to restart immediately message 

is displayed. 

3-32


Hard Disk Operation 


The RAM Disk size will be changed after restart is complete. 

All e-MPS functions are available after installing the optional hard disk. For more on e-MPS 

functions, refer to e-MPS Functions on page 3-34. The following hard disk operations also become 

available. 



• Read Data (data, programs) 

• Delete Data (data, fonts, programs, or macros) 

• Hard Disk Format (Initialization) 

NOTE: RAM disk usage steps are the same as the memory card usage steps. Refer to Memory 

Card Operation on page 3-27. 

Hard Disk Format (Initialization) 

Hard disk formatting (initialization) must be performed when the hard disk is first installed to the 

printer. 



3 Press [Hard Disk]. 

Select item. 

Printer menu 

Print Status 

Page 

Font 

Paper 

Handling 

Hard Disk 

Others 

Interface 

Page Set 

Color Mode 

Emulation 

Print 

Quality 

4 Press [Format]. 

Hard Disk 

The message All data in the HDD will be 

deleted. Are you sure is displayed. 

Read 

Delete 

Write Data 

On 

List of 

Partitions 

Format 

Printer menu 


Hard disk formatting begins. 

The screen returns to printer mode when formatting is complete. 

3-33


e-MPS Functions 

e-MPS (enhanced-Multiple Printing System) enables advanced printing functions such as saving 

print data to this device’s hard disk and for later printing when needed, virtual mailbox and electronic 

sorting functions. Configure e-MPS functions from the printer driver. 

The following operations can be used with e-MPS. 

• Quick Copy...3-34 

• Proof and Hold...3-35 

• Private Print /Job Storage...3-35 

• Printing Data Stored in a Virtual Mailbox (VMB)...3-37 

• Printing Virtual Mailbox (VMB) Stored Data List...3-37 

• Printing the Code Job List...3-38 

• e-MPS Detailed Settings...3-39 

NOTE: The optional hard disk is required to use the e-MPS function. For further details about 

e-MPS, refer to the Extended Driver User Guide. 

When RAM Disk is set to [On], the e-MPS function displays Quick Copy, Private/Stored, List of code 

JOB and Advanced Settings. Additional memory may be required when using RAM Disk. 

Quick Copy 

Use this mode to make print additional sets of previously printed documents. When printing 

documents with Quick Copy enabled from the print driver, a copy of the data is simultaneously 

written to the hard disk. Additional copies can be printed from the operation panel when needed. 

According to the default setting, up to 32 items can be stored on the hard disk (may be increased to 

up to 50 items in e-MPS advanced settings). 

NOTE: When saving a new document above the set maximum document limit, the oldest job is 

overwritten. 

When the power is switched off, jobs saved in this mode are erased. 


2 Press [e-MPS]. 

3 Press [Quick Copy]. 

Select item. 

e-MPS 

Quick Copy 

Private/ 

Stored 

Print VMB 

Data Tray 

List of 

VMB 

List of 

Code JOB 

Configuration 

3-34


4 Press [] or [] to select the user and 

press [Next]. 

name. 

Cancel 

User 

Up 

Down 

Next 

5 Press [] or [] to select the job and 

press [Next]. 

Cancel 

NOTE: Select the job and press 

[Delete] to delete the selected job. 

Job 

Up 

Delete 

Down 

Next 

Proof and Hold 

6 Press [+], [–] or numeric keys to set the desired number of copies and press [Printing]. 

Processing message is displayed and printing begins. 


By setting Proof and Hold in the printer driver and specifying the required number of copies, this 

device prints a single copy and saves the document data to the hard disk or RAM disk. Use the 

operation panel to print the remaining copies. The number of copies can be changed at this time. 

When the power is switched off, jobs saved in this mode are erased. 

Private Print /Job Storage 

Printing remaining Job Hold copies 

The printing operation is the same as Quick Copy. For Quick Copy printing procedures, refer to 

Quick Copy on page 3-34. 

Private Print is feature to print from the operation panel by entering the same 4 digit code as entered 

in the print driver when starting printing. Data is erased after printing is complete. 

Job Storage saves the print data to the hard disk. The data remains on the hard disk to be printed 

any number of times, even after printing is complete or the power is switched off. The feature can be 

used with or without an access code. For either driver setting method, refer to the 

Extended Driver User Guide. 



3 Press [Private/Stored]. 

Select item. 

e-MPS 

Quick Copy 

Private/ 

Stored 

Print VMB 

Data Tray 

List of 

VMB 

List of 

Code JOB 

Configuration 

3-35


4 Press [] or [] to select the user and 

press [Next]. 

name. 

Cancel 

User 

Up 

Down 

Next 


press [Next]. 

Cancel 

NOTE: Select the job and press 

[Delete] to delete the selected job. 

Job 

Up 

Delete 

Down 

Next 

6 Press [+] , [–] or numeric keys to set number of copies. 


If access code has been enabled, Enter 

ID-code is displayed. 

Enter ID-code 

Use the numeric keys to input the 4 digit 

access code configured at the printer 

driver and press [Enter]. 

(with #key) 


printing begins. 

Clear 

Job name:List 1 


3-36


Printing Data Stored in a Virtual Mailbox (VMB) 

The virtual mailbox function is used to save jobs into a virtual mail box. When using the virtual 

mailbox to print a document, the job is saved and printing does not begin until it is started from the 

operation panel. To configure the print driver, refer to the Extended Driver User Guide. 



3 Press [Print VMB Data Tray]. 

Select item. 

e-MPS 

Quick Copy 

Private/ 

Stored 

Print VMB 

Data Tray 

List of 

VMB 

List of 

Code JOB 


press [Printing]. 

Print VMB Data Tray 


printing begins. 

List 1 

List 2 

Job 

Up 

NOTE: Printed document data is 

deleted. 

Down 

e-MPS 


Printing Virtual Mailbox (VMB) Stored Data List 

Print a list of the currently configured virtual mailbox tray number (mailbox number), any stored 

data, and the data size. 



3 Press [List of VMB]. 

Select item. 

e-MPS 

Quick Copy 

Private/ 

Stored 

Print VMB 

Data Tray 

List of 

VMB 

List of 

Code JOB 

Configuration 

Configuration 


3-37


Processing message is displayed and printing of list begins. 

VIRTUAL MAIL BOX LIST 


Printing the Code Job List 

Print a list of (permanent) saved code jobs stored in the hard disk. 



3 Press [List of Code JOB]. 

Select item. 

e-MPS 

Quick Copy 

Private/ 

Stored 

Print VMB 

Data Tray 

List of 

VMB 

List of 

Code JOB 

Configuration 


Processing message is displayed and printing of list begins. 

PERMANENT CODE JOB LIST 


3-38


e-MPS Detailed Settings 

The following settings can be modified, such as the maximum number of items that can be stored in 

the hard disk. 

• Maximum Quick Copy Jobs 

• Temporary Code JOB Size 

• Permanent Code JOB Size 

• Virtual Mailbox (VMB) Size 

Maximum Quick Copy Jobs 



3 Press [Configuration]. 

Select item. 

e-MPS 

Quick Copy 

Private/ 

Stored 

Print VMB 

Data Tray 

List of 

VMB 

List of 

Code JOB 

Configuration 

4 Press [] or [] to select Quick Copy 


Configuration 

Setting Item 

Quick Copy 

Temporary Code JOB Size 

Permanent Code JOB Size 

VMB Size 

32. 

Value 

e-MPS 

Auto Cassette 

Auto 

Change # 

5 Press [+] or [–] to set the number of items. 

6 Press [Close]. The display returns to the Configuration screen. 

7 Press [Close]. The display returns to the e-MPS screen. 


Set the (maximum) total space for temporarily saved jobs to be stored on the hard disk. The actual 

maximum amount that can be configured is the remaining space on the hard disk. 



3-39



Select item. 

e-MPS 

Quick Copy 

Private/ 

Stored 

Print VMB 

Data Tray 

List of 

VMB 

List of 

Code JOB 

Configuration 

4 Press the [] or [] to select Temporary 

Code JOB Size and press [Change #]. 

Configuration 

Setting Item 

Quick Copy 



VMB Size 

32. 

Value 

e-MPS 

Auto Cassette 

Auto 

Change # 

5 Press [+] or [–] to set the maximum size. 

6 Press [Close]. The display returns to the Configuration screen. 

7 Press [Close]. The display returns to the e-MPS screen. 


Set the (maximum) total space for jobs to be permanently saved on the hard disk. The actual 

maximum amount that can be configured is the remaining space on the hard disk. The setting 

procedure is the same as for Temporary Code JOB Size. 

Virtual Mailbox (VMB) Size 

Set the (maximum) total hard disk space for Virtual Mailbox. The maximum value can for this item 

can be set up to the hard disk remaining space. The setting procedure is the same as for Temporary 

Code JOB Size. 

3-40


Other Settings 

Form Feed Timeout 

The following items can be set for other settings. 

• Form Feed Timeout 

• Setting Resource Protect Mode 

• Auto continue 

• Setting Stapling Error Detection 

• Setting Duplex Mode Printing Error Detection 

• Service Settings 

• Printer Reset (Reboot) 

• Dump Received Data 

After receiving the last data from the computer, and if no response is received from the computer 

indicating the data transmission has ended, this device will wait a predetermined time before 

printing the last page. After this predetermined time, the page will be fed automatically. Set the form 

feed timeout to ‘0’ to prevent form feed until [GO] is pressed manually. 



3 Press [Others]. 

item. 

Close 

Font 

Page Set 

Print 

Quality 

Paper 

Handling 

Color Mode 

RAM DISK 

Mode 

Others 

4 Press [] or [] to select Form Feed 

Time Out and press [Change #]. 

Others 

Setting Item 

Value 

Form Feed Time Out 

Resource Protect 

Auto Continue 

Finishing Error 

30. Sec. 

Permanent 

Off 

Change # 

Service 

Printer menu 

5 Press [+] or [–] to set the form feed wait time. 

6 Press [Close]. The display returns to the Others screen. 


3-41


Setting Resource Protect Mode 

When this devicer's emulation switches from PCL 6 to another emulation type, all downloaded files 

and macros are lost. Set the Resource Protect Mode to Protect or Permanent to protect the PCL 

environment and preserve those resources for use when again returning to PCL 6 emulation. 

Item 

Auto 

Protect 

Off 

Description 

Saves permanent PCL resources such as fonts, macros, and symbol sets in this 

device's memory when switching emulation types. Temporary resources, 

however, are released. 

Saves permanent and temporary PCL resources in this device's memory when 

switching emulation types. 

No resources are protected. 




item. 

Close 

Font 

Page Set 

Print 

Quality 

Paper 

Handling 

Color Mode 

RAM DISK 

Mode 

Others 

4 Press [] or [] to select Resource 

Protect and press [Change #]. 

Others 

Setting Item 

Value 



Auto Continue 


30. Sec. 

Permanent 

Off 

Change # 

Service 

Printer menu 

5 Press [Off], [Permanent] or [Permanent/Temporary]. 


Auto continue 


When an error occurs, automatically continues printing from the next received data after the 

specified period of time. The default setting is [Off] (No auto continue). Auto continue can continue 

printing after the following errors. 

• Print Overrun Press GO. 

• Memory overflow Press GO. 

You can also specify the time delay before Auto continue. 



3-42



item. 

Close 

Font 

Page Set 

Print 

Quality 

Paper 

Handling 

Color Mode 

RAM DISK 

Mode 

Others 

4 Press [] or [] to select Auto Continue 


Others 

Setting Item 

Value 



Auto Continue 


30. Sec. 

Permanent 

Off 

Change # 

Service 

Printer menu 


6 If [On] is pressed, press [+] or [–] to set 

the Auto Continue delay time. 

Auto continue 

When error occurs, auto timing for processing can be set. 

Back 

Seconds 

Off 

On 

(5) 

(5) 

Printer menu 

- Others 



Setting Stapling Error Detection 

Set whether to show an error message during stapling when the staple supply is exhausted. 

Mode 

On 

Off 

Description 

Displays an error message. 

Press [GO] to clear the error message and continue printing without stapling. 

Press [Cancel] to cancel printing. 

No error message is shown and printing continues without stapling. 




item. 

Close 

Font 

Page Set 

Print 

Quality 

Paper 

Handling 

Color Mode 

RAM DISK 

Mode 

Others 

3-43


4 Press [] or [] to select Finishing Error 


Others 

Setting Item 

Value 



Auto Continue 


30. Sec. 

Permanent 

Off 

Change # 

Service 

Printer menu 

5 Press [] or [] to select Staple Mode 



Setting Item 

Proces. Duplex print 

Staple Mode 

On 

On 

Value 

LF Action 

Change # 

Printer menu 

- Others 


7 Press [Close]. The display returns to the Finishing Error screen. 



Setting Duplex Mode Printing Error Detection 

For duplex mode printing, set whether to detect the paper size and type and show an error message 

for paper that does not support duplex printing. 

Mode 

On 

Off 

Description 

Displays an error message. 

Press [GO] to continue single side printing. Press [Cancel] to cancel printing. 

Continues 1-sided printing without showing an error message. 




item. 

Close 

Font 

Page Set 

Print 

Quality 

Paper 

Handling 

Color Mode 

RAM DISK 

Mode 

Others 

3-44


4 Press [] or [] to select Finishing Error 


Others 

Setting Item 

Value 



Auto Continue 


30. Sec. 

Permanent 

Off 

Change # 

Service 

Printer menu 

5 Press [] or [] to select Proces. 

Duplex Print and press [Change #]. 


Setting Item 

Proces. Duplex print 

Staple Mode 

On 

On 

Value 

LF Action 

Change # 

Printer menu 

- Others 

Service Settings 


7 Press [Close]. The display returns to the Finishing Error screen. 



Used mainly for maintenance purposes by the service representative. Use to print a service status 

page for reference during maintenance or service. 




item. 

Close 

Font 

Page Set 

Print 

Quality 

Paper 

Handling 

Color Mode 

RAM DISK 

Mode 

Others 

4 Press [Service]. 

Others 

Setting Item 

Value 



Auto Continue 


30. Sec. 

Permanent 

Off 

Change # 

Service 

Printer menu 

3-45


5 Press [Print Status Page]. 

Service 

Print Status 

Page 

A4 

Paper Standard Feed 

Operation sizes 

Printer menu 

- Others 


Processing message is displayed and printing of the service status page begins. 


Printer Reset (Reboot) 

Reset the printer function only without switching off (◦ position) the main power switch. 




item. 

Close 

Font 

Paper 

Handling 

Others 

Page Set 

Color Mode 

Print 

Quality 

RAM DISK 

Mode 

4 Press [Printer Reset]. 

Close 

Only printer board is working without 

turning off the main SW. Are you sure 

is displayed 

Item 

Value 

ime Out 

otect 

e 

or 

30. Sec. 

Permanent 

Off 

Change # 

Service 

Printer 

Reset 

Print 

HEX-DUMP 

5 Press [Yes]. The printer board reboots. 

Dump Received Data 

Print a hexadecimal output of received data for program or file debugging. 



3-46



item. 

Close 

Font 

Paper 

Handling 

Others 

Page Set 

Color Mode 

Print 

Quality 

RAM DISK 

Mode 

4 Press [Print HEX-DUMP]. 

Close 

Printing mode with dump Rx data. Are 

you sure is displayed. 

Item 

Value 

ime Out 

otect 

e 

or 

30. Sec. 

Permanent 

Off 

Change # 

Service 

Printer 

Reset 

Print 

HEX-DUMP 


Processing is displayed, followed by Page remaining. 

6 Send data to this device while it is in this state. The dump page is printed. Processing message is 

displayed and printing begins. 

NOTE: Press [GO] to take this device offline after the needed dump page has been printed, then 

press [Cancel] to cancel printing of any more dump pages. 

7 When printing is complete, press [GO] again. HEX Dump mode is canceled. 

3-47


3-48

4 Scanner Settings 

This chapter explains the scanner functions and settings that can be configured from the machine 

touch panel. For basic scanner operation, refer to the Operation Guide. 

• Setting Scanner Functions...4-2 

• Scanner Default Settings...4-12 

• Programmed Scanning...4-20 

• Confirming Sending History...4-23 

4-1

Scanner Settings 

Setting Scanner Functions 

This section explains how to configure the scanner functions from the machine. 

NOTE: Refer to each scanner function operation procedure as explained in Operation Guide for 

information how to display the scanner function settings screen. 

The available settings may vary depending on the sending method. 

The following settings are available from the scanner function screen’s [Basic] tab. 

Ready to scan. ( Full-Color ) 

Place the original and select destination. 

Original Send 

11×8½" 8½×11" 

08/08/’05 14:00 

Scan to PC-Sending 

Register Prgrm 

Cont. TX to 

Cancel 

Destination 

Auto 

Top Edge 

Auto 

Select 

Orig.Size 

Orig. Set 

Direction 

File Name 

Input 

Save at 

User PC 

Address 

Book 

Delete 

Auto size 

200dpi 

JPEG 

Select 

Scanning 

File Type 

Send Size Resolution 

Basic Quality Edit 

• Selecting Original Size...4-3 

• Select Sending Size...4-3 

• Selecting Original Orientation...4-4 

• Scan Resolution...4-4 

• File Name Input...4-5 

• File Type...4-5 

4-2


Selecting Original Size 

Select the original size (scanning area). 

Item 

Select size 

Input size 

Original Size 

Inch models 

Auto, 11 × 17", 8 1/2 ×14", 11×81/2", 8 1/2 ×11", 81/2 ×51/2", 51/2 ×81/2", 

11 × 15", 8 1/2 ×131/2", 8 1/2 × 13", A4, A4R 

Metric models 

Auto, A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, B6, B6R, 11 × 15", 11 × 8 1/2", 

8 1/2 ×11", Folio 

Inch models 

Vertical (Y): 2 - 11 5/8" 

Horizontal (X): 2 - 17" 

Metric models 

Vertical (Y): 50 - 297 mm 

Horizontal (X): 50 - 432 mm 

Other stand. Size Inch models 

(Others stand. Size) A3, B4, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, B6, B6R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16KR, and custom sizes 

Metric models 

11 × 17", 8 1/2 × 14", 5 1/2 ×81/2", 8 1/2 ×51/2", 8 1/2 ×131/2", 8 1/2 ×13", 8K, 

16K, 16KR, and custom sizes 

NOTE: For manual size input, place the original flush against the top left of the platen and set the 

area to be scanned. 

For scanning resolution, refer to Scan Resolution on page 4-4. 

Select Sending Size 

Select the sending size (size of image to send). 

The following send sizes are available. 

Auto size, 11 × 17", 11 × 15", 8 1/2 ×14", 81/2 ×131/2", 8 1/2 ×13", 81/2 ×11", 51/2 ×81/2", A3, B4, 

A4, B5, A5, B6, Folio, 8K, 16K 

NOTE: Not available when an custom original size has been specified. 

For scanning resolution, refer to Scan Resolution on page 4-4. 

4-3


Selecting Original Orientation 

Specify the top edge of the placed original. 

Item 

Top Edge 

(Back Edge) 

Left Top Edge 


Description 

Sets the top edge as the original's upper edge. 

Sets the left edge as the original's upper edge. 

Placing originals on the platen 

Original 

[Top Edge] 

([Back Edge]) 



Placing originals in the optional document processor 

Original 

[Top Edge] 

([Back Edge]) 



NOTE: The original may not be scanned correctly if original set direction is not specified. 

Scan Resolution 

Specify the degree of scanning detail. The larger the dpi value, the more details are captured, but 

file sizes and scanning time are also increased. Specify scan resolutions of 200 dpi, 300 dpi, 

400 dpi or 600 dpi. 

NOTE: Scan resolution cannot be specified when [HiComp. PDF Color] is selected as the file type. 

Typical computers display images on the screen at 96 dpi (for Windows), and printers typically print 

at between 150 - 600 dpi. Scan images at higher resolutions if they will be later enlarged or printed. 

4-4


File Name Input 

Specify a filename to assign to a scanned image. 

Item 

Auto 

Manual 

Description 

Automatically assign a filename. 

The file name can be changed. Press [Change Name] and input the filename. 

NOTE: This selection is not available for TWAIN and Database Connection. 

Enter the filename using less than 20 characters. 

To change the filename specified under default settings mode, refer to File Name on page 4-16. 

When File Name Input on page 4-18 is set to [Manual], The filename input screen is shown without 

first showing the auto/manual selection screen. 

File Type 

Specify the image file format. 

Item Image Adjust Available color modes 

JPEG Color&Gray 1 - 5 Full color, Auto color † , Grayscale 

(JPEG Col. Grey) 

TIFF B&W – Black&White 

PDF 1 - 5 Full color, Auto color, Grayscale, Black&White 

HiComp. PDF Color 1 - 3 Full color 

† Auto Color is available only when [Gray scale] is selected for B&W Setting. 

NOTE: When file type is set to [JPEG Color&Gray] ([JPEG Col. Grey]), originals read in one 

operation are sent as one file per page. 

[HiComp. PDF Color] is displayed only when the optional PDF upgrade kit is installed. 

The PDF encryption function is available when the optional PDF upgrade kit is installed. For further 

details, refer to PDF Encryption Function on page 4-9. 

4-5


Setting Image Quality 

The following settings are available from the scanner function screen’s [Quality] tab. 



Original Send 

11×8½" 8½×11" 

08/08/’05 14:00 



Cont. TX to 

Cancel 

Destination 

Density 4 

Text + Photo 

Scanning 

Density 

Orig.Image 

Quality 

B&W 

setting 

Save at 

User PC 

Address 

Book 

Delete 

Off 

Background 

Off 

Sharp 

File Type 

exp. adj. -ness 


• Exposure Level...4-6 

• Background Exposure Adjust...4-6 

• Original Image Quality...4-7 

• Sharpness Adjust...4-7 

• B&W Setting...4-7 

Exposure Level 

Adjust the scanned image density. 

Item 

Manual (1 - 7) 

Auto 

Description 

Manually adjust the scanned image density. 

Density can be adjusted in either 7 or 13 steps. 

The appropriate density is set by detecting the density of the original. 

NOTE: [Auto] is available only when selecting [Black&white] under B&W Setting and color mode is 

set to either Black&White or Auto Color. Additionally, when performing a full color scan with Auto 

Color, even if [Auto] is selected, scan density is corrected according to the default [Manual] value. 


Lightens the background of color originals with dark backgrounds. 

Item 

Description 

On (1 - 5) Adjust the background with presets (1 - 5). 

Off 

Do not adjust the background exposure. 

NOTE: Background exposure adjust is not available when B&W setting is set to [Black&white]. 

Additionally, background exposure adjust does not function when scanning in [Black&white] under 

Auto Color mode. 

4-6



Choose the image quality suited to the type of original. 

Item 

Text+Photo 

Photo 

Text 

OCR 

Description 

When scanning originals with mixed text and photos. 

To reproduce depth of photo originals. 

To clearly reproduce penciled or fine lines. 

For use with OCR applications (software to convert optical characters to text 

data). 

NOTE: For Send E-mail, [Photo] is not available. 


Adjust the sharpness of image outlines. 

Item 

Sharpen 

Unsharpen 

Description 

Sharpens image outlines. Sharpens text or lines. 

Softens image outlines. Reduces moire affect. 

B&W Setting 

When scanning in B&W, select between B&W and grayscale. 

Item 

Black&white 

Gray scale 

Description 

Each pixel is represented by either a white or black dot. File sizes are smaller 

than color or B&W grayscale images. 

Each pixel is represented by gradations of black and white, but without color 

information. Reproduces images smoothly and sharply. 

Setting Edit Functions 

The following settings are available from the scanner function screen’s [Edit] tab. 



Original Send 

11×8½" 8½×11" 

08/08/’05 14:00 



Cont. TX to 

Cancel 

Destination 

Off 

Off 

Off 

Border 

Erase 

Auto 

Selection 

Auto 

Center 

Save at 

User PC 

Address 

Book 

Delete 

Off 

Batch 

Off 

One Page 

1 sided 

Original 

Scanning Per File Type 


• Border Erase...4-8 

• Batch Scanning...4-8 

• Auto Selection...4-8 

• One Page Per File...4-9 

• Auto Center...4-9 

• Original Type...4-9 

4-7


Border Erase 

Removes black borders from around the edges of originals. 

Function Value Description 

Sheet Erase 

(Border Erase) 

Book Erase 

Individual 

BorderErase 

(Individual Erase 

Mode) 

Off 

Inch models 

Border: 0 - 2" (1/8" increments) 

Metric models 

Border: 0 - 50 mm 

Inch models 

Border: 0 - 2" (1/8" increments) 

Center: 0 - 2" (1/8" increments) 

Metric models 

Border: 0 - 50 mm 

Center: 0 - 50 mm 

Inch models 

Top: 0 - 2" (1/8" increments) 

Bottom: 0 - 2" (1/8" increments) 

Left: 0 - 2" (1/8" increments) 

Right: 0 - 2" (1/8" increments) 

Metric models 

Top: 0 - 50 mm 

Bottom: 0 - 50 mm 

Left: 0 - 50 mm 

Right: 0 - 50 mm 

Use this mode to erase black borders 

around single sheet originals. 

Use this mode to erase black borders that 

develop around the edges and in the 

middle when scanning originals such as 

thick books. You can specify the widths 

individually to erase the borders around 

the edges and in the center of the book. 

Use this mode to individually specify 

border widths to erase on all sides. 

Do not erase borders. 

NOTE: See Border Erase on page 1-19 for how to configure Border Erase. 


After scanning an original, you can continue scanning a new original. When this feature is enabled, 

after an original is scanned, a selection screen prompts whether to continue scanning originals. 

Item 

On 

Off 

Description 

Enables batch scanning. 

Disables batch scanning. 

NOTE: For TWAIN image scanning, batch scanning is available when Wait for Scan is enabled. 


Scan differently sized originals in one operation when placed in the optional document processor. 

Item 

On 

Off 

Description 

Enables Auto Selection. 

Disables Auto Selection. 

NOTE: For Auto Selection operation, see Auto Selection Mode on page 1-46. 

4-8


One Page Per File 

Creates and sends a separate file for each page of a scanned original. 

Item 

On 

Off 

Description 

Enables One Page Per File. 

Disables One Page Per File. 

NOTE: When file type is set to [JPEG] One Page Per File is automatically set to [On]. 

Auto Center 

When scanning with zoom, by specifying the Original size and the Send size, blank borders around 

the bottom or left and right will be shown, depending on the sizes. When setting Auto Center, the 

image is moved to the center so that blank borders around the top and bottom or left and right 

become even. 

Item 

On 

Off 

Description 

Enables Auto Center. 

Disables Auto Center. 

Original Type 

Select the original type according to type of original being scanned. 

Item Bind Direction Description 

1 sided (1-sided) – Single sided sheet original. 

2 sided (2-sided) Open from Left/Right, 

Open from top (Left/Right 

binding, Top binding) 

2-sided sheet original. 

Book 

Open from left, 

Open from right (Left 

binding, Right binding) 

Magazine or book originals with facing pages. 

NOTE: [2 sided] ([2-sided]) is displayed when the optional document processor is installed. 

PDF Encryption Function 

Enables setting high compression PDF function when the file type is set to PDF or High Comp. PDF. 

Use this setting to restrict the usages of encrypted PDF files. 

NOTE: The optional PDF upgrade kit must be installed to use the PDF encryption function. 

Item Value Supplementary Explanation 

Document Open Off, Password entry Enter a password less than 255 characters long. 

Password 

Doc. Restriction Off, Password entry Enter a password less than 255 characters long. 

Password 

Encryption Level High Level 128bit, Low 

Level 40bit 

[High level 40 bit] is compatible with Acrobat 3 

and Acrobat 4. 

[High level 128 bit] is compatible with Acrobat 5 

and later versions. 

4-9


Item Value Supplementary Explanation 

Copy image and 

other cont 

Changes Allowed 

Printing Allowed 

Allow, Refuse 

Comment, Any except 

extract pg, Change pg 

layout, Insert/del/rotate pg, 

Refuse 

Allow, Allow (Low Res.), 

Refuse 

[Change pg layout] is displayed when encryption 

level is set to [Low Level 40bit]. 

[Insert/del/rotate pg] is displayed when encryption 

level is set to [High Level 128bit]. 

[Allow (Low Res.)] is displayed when encryption 

level is set to [High Level 128bit]. 

NOTE: Encryption Level is displayed when a password has been specified for Document Open 

Password or Doc. Restriction Password. 

Copy image and other cont, Changes Allowed, and Printing Allowed are displayed when a 

password has been specified for Doc. Restriction Password. 

The same password can not be used for registering Document Open Password and Doc. 

Restriction Password. 

1 On the scanner function screen, press [File Type] to show the Sending file type screen. 

NOTE: Refer to each scanner function operation procedure as explained in Operation Guide for 

information how to display the scanner function settings screen. 

2 Press [PDF Encryption]. 

to scan. ( Full-Color ) 

riginal and select destination. 

Original Send 

11×8½" 8½×11" 

08/08/’05 14:00 

pe 

HiComp.PDF 

Color 

Quality 

Low 

Low Quality 

(High) 

Back 

High Quality 

(Low) 

High 

Close 

Off 

PDF 

Encryption 

3 Press [] or [] to select Document 

Open Password or Doc. Restriction 

Password and press [Change #]. 



PDF Encryption 

Original 

11×8½" 

08/0 

Back 

Default menu 

Document Open Password 

Doc. Restriction Password 

Off 

Off 

Setting mode 

Change # 

4 Press [Change #] for Password. 


Back 

Password 

Change # 

On 

Password confirm. 

Change # 

5 Enter the password and press [End]. 

4-10


6 Press [Change #] for Password confirm. 

7 Enter the password again for verification and press [End]. 

8 Press [Close]. Display is returned to PDF Encryption. 

9 Press [] or [] to select Encryption 

Level and press [Change #]. 



PDF Encryption 

Original 

11×8½" 

08/0 

Back 

Default menu 

Setting mode 

Document Open Password 


Encryption Level 

Copy image and other cont 

Changes Allowed 

Off 

*****. 

Low Level (40bit) 

Refuse 

Refuse 

Change # 

10 Select [High Level 128bit] or [Low Level 40bit] and press [Close]. Display is returned to PDF 

Encryption. 

Proceed to Step 11 if a password was entered in Step 3 for Doc. Restriction Password. 

Proceed to Step 17 if a password was entered in Step 3 for Document Open Password. 

11 Press [] or [] to select Copy image and other cont and press [Change #]. 

12 Select [Allow] or [Refuse] and press [Close]. 

13 Press [] or [] to select and Changes Allowed and press [Change #]. 

14 Press [Comment], [Any except extract pg], [Change pg layout], [Insert/del/rotate pg], or [Refuse] 

and press [Close]. 

NOTE: [Change pg layout] will be displayed when [Low Level 40bit] is selected for [Encryption 

Level] and [Insert/del/rotate pg] will be displayed when [High Level 128bit] is selected. 

15 Press [] or [] to select and Printing Allowed and press [Change #]. 

16 Select [Allow], [Refuse] or [Allow (Low Res.)] and press [Close]. 

NOTE: [Allow (Low Res.)] is displayed when encryption level is set to [High Level 128bit] under 

Encryption Level. 

17 Press [Close]. Display is returned to Sending file type. 

4-11


Scanner Default Settings 

Default Settings 

Change the default settings for the scanner function. 

This section explains how to change default settings which are applied when the machine is 

powered up or the Reset key is pressed. Automatically configured details set in default setting 

mode are called default settings. You can change the default settings as desired to meet your usage 

patterns. 

Accessing the Setting default function Screen 

Follow the steps below to display the Setting default function screen. 

1 Press the System Menu/Counter key. 

2 Press [Scanner Default]. 

System Menu / Counter 

System Menu 

Copy 

Default 

Language 

Job 

Accounting 

Scanner 

Default 

Printer 

Default 

MP tray 

Setting 

BOX 

Management 

Machine 

Default 

Document 

Management 

Register 

Orig. Size 

Print 

Report 

3 Use numeric keys to enter the 4 digit management code. The default setting is 2500 for the 25/20 

ppm model and 3200 for the 32/25 and 32/32 ppm models. 

If the correct management code has been entered, the Scanner setting menu screen is displayed. 

NOTE: For security, it is recommended to change the management code. For further details, refer 

to Changing Management Code on page 7-25. 

If the optional security kit has been installed, the management code is 8 digits long. The default 

setting is 25002500 for the 25/20 ppm model and 32003200 for the 32/25 and 32/32 ppm models. 

4 Press [Func. Def. setting]. 


Scanner setting menu 

System 

Basic 

Func. Def. 

setting. 

User 

registr. 

System Menu 

5 Refer to the following configuration items to configure the default settings. 

4-12


Original Density 

Set the image quality for default settings mode. The setting items are as follows. 

Item 

Text+Photo 

Photo 

Text 

OCR 

Description 

When scanning originals with mixed text and photos. 

To reproduce depth of photo originals. 

To clearly reproduce penciled or fine lines. 

For use with OCR applications (software to convert optical characters to text 

data). 

For further details on original image quality, see page 4-7. 

1 Referring to Accessing the Setting default function Screen on page 4-12, access the Setting default 

function screen. 

2 Press [] or [] to select Original density and press [Change #]. 

3 Select [Text+Photo], [Photo], [Text] or [OCR]. 

4 Press [Close]. The display returns to the Setting default function screen. 

Density Adjustment (Auto) 

Adjusts the overall dark/light balance when density adjustment is set to [Auto]. The setting items are 

as follows. 

Item 

Lighter 

Darker 

Description 

Lightens the overall density adjustment. 

Darkens the overall density adjustment. 

For further details about density adjust, see page 4-6. 



2 Press [] or [] to select Density Adjustment (Auto) and press [Change #]. 

3 Press [Lighter] or [Darker] to adjust the density. 


Density Adjustment. (Manual) 

Adjusts the overall dark/light balance when density adjustment is set to [Manual]. The setting items 

are as follows. 

Item 

Lighter 

Darker 

Description 

Lightens the overall density adjustment. 

Darkens the overall density adjustment. 

For further details about density adjust, see page 4-6. 



2 Press [] or [] to select Density Adjust. (Manual) and press [Change #]. 

4-13


File Type 



Configure the file type for default settings mode. The setting items are as follows. 

Item 

Description 

Full-Color B&W&Gray PDF 

Configures PDF. 

(Full-Colour B&W&Grey) 

JPEG Color&Gray 

Configures JPEG Color/Grayscale. 

(JPEG Col. Gray) 

HiComp. PDF Color 

Configures High compression color PDF. 

Black&White PDF Configures PDF. 

TIFF B&W 

Configures TIFF B&W. 

NOTE: High Comp. PDF is displayed only when the optional PDF upgrade kit is installed. 

PDF/JPEG Quality 

For further details about file type, see page 4-5. 



2 Press [] or [] to select File Type and press [Change #]. 

3 Select the file type. 


Configure the image quality for [PDF] or [JPEG] file types for default settings mode. The setting 

items are as follows. 

Item 

Low 

High 

Description 

Sets low quality (high compression). 

Sets high quality (low compression). 




2 Press [] or [] to select PDF/JPEG Quality and press [Change #]. 

3 Press [Low] or [High] to adjust image quality. 


4-14


High Compression PDF Quality 

Configure the image quality for [HiComp. PDF Color] file type for default settings mode. The setting 


Item 

Description 

1 Comp. Priority Set high compression to take precedence over image quality. 

2 Sets standard image quality. 

3 Quality Priority Set image quality to take precedence over high compression. 

Color Output Type 





2 Press [] or [] to select High Comp. PDF Quality and press [Change #]. 

3 Press [] or [] to adjust image quality. 


Configure the color output type. 

Item 

Description 

RGB – 

sRGB 

Match the color reproduction space between sRGB compatible systems. 



2 Press[] or [] to select Color Output Type (Colour Output Type) and press [Change #]. 

3 Select [RGB] or [sRGB]. 


Set the scan resolution for default settings mode. Specify scan resolutions of 200 dpi, 300 dpi, 

400 dpi or 600 dpi. 

For further details on scanning resolution, refer to page 4-4. 



2 Press [] or [] to select Scan Resolution (Scanning Resolution) and press [Change #]. 

3 Select [200dpi], [300dpi], [400dpi] or [600dpi]. 


4-15



Configure batch scanning for default settings mode. The setting items are as follows. 

Item 

On 

Off 

Description 

Enables batch scanning. 

Disables batch scanning. 


For further details on batch scanning, refer to page 4-8. 



2 Press [] or [] to select Batch Scanning and press [Change #]. 

3 Select [On] or [Off]. 


Configure One Page Per File for default settings mode. The setting items are as follows. 

Item 

On 

Off 

Description 

Enables One Page Per File. 

Disables One Page Per File. 

For further details about One Page Per File, see page 4-9. 



2 Press [] or [] to select One Page Per File (Output Each Page) and press [Change #]. 



File Name 

Set the scanner image filename for default settings mode. 

NOTE: Enter the filename using less than 16 characters. 

For further details on scanner image file name, refer to page 4-5. 



2 Press [] or [] to select File Name and press [Change #]. 

3 Press [Change]. 

4 Enter the filename and press [End]. 


4-16


Auto Center 

Configure Auto Center for default settings mode. The setting items are as follows. 

Item 

On 

Off 

Description 

Enables Auto Center. 

Disables Auto Center. 

Continuous Scanning 

For further details about Auto Center, see page 4-9. 



2 Press [] or [] to select Auto Center (Image shift) and press [Change #]. 



Use the same settings from a previously completed transmission for the next transmission. The 

scan function screen is returned with the sender (user), destination and other settings remaining 

from the previous operation. 

Item 

On 

Off 

Description 

Enables Continuous Scan. 

Disables Continuous Scan. 

NOTE: To switch to continuous scan 

from the scanner function screen, press 

[Cont. TX to]. When continuous scan is 

enabled, [Cont. TX to] changes to 

[Single Scan]. To enable Single Scan, 

press [Single Scan]. 

If Permit File Overwrite is checked in 

Scanner File Utility (see page 6-7), files Save at 

User PC 

with already existing names will be 

overwritten. Exercise caution when 

inputting file names during Continuous Scan mode. 




Destination 

Address 

Book 

Auto 

Select 

Orig.Size 

Auto size 

Select 

Send Size 

Basic 

Original 

11×8½" 

08/0 

Top Edge 

Orig. Set 

Direction 

200dpi 

Scanning 

Resolution 

Quality 

When finished using Continuous Scan, always [Cancel] on the scanner function screen. If not 

pressed, the scanner function screen may remain active, rendering the copy, print or fax functions 

unusable. Also, exercise caution as unauthorized users may obtain access to the device while this 

screen is displayed. 

Delete 


Cont. TX to 



2 Press [] or [] to select Continuous Sending and press [Change #]. 



4-17



File Name Input on page 4-5 configure the machine to display the filename input box without 

displaying the auto/manual selection screen. Doing so allows this operation to be skipped each time 

when entering filenames. 

Item 

Manual 

Auto/Manual 

Description 

Displays the filename input box without displaying the auto/manual selection 

screen. 

Displays the auto/manual selection screen. 

Skip Sender (User) Select 



2 Press [] or [] to select File Name Input and press [Change #]. 

3 Select [Manual] or [Auto/Manual]. 


When using this scanner, a sender (user) must be first selected. Set Selec. of senders (users) to set 

the sender (user) to User No. 001 and skip the sender (user) selection step. Use this setting to limit 

scanner usage to certain users or to skip this operation step. 

Item 

On 

Off 

Description 

Skips sender user selection and transmits as the user registered to User No. 

001. 

Displays the sender (user) selection screen. 

NOTE: When enabling Selec. of senders (users), be sure to register a user to User No. 001. 

Enter E-Mail Address 



2 Press [] or [] to select Selec. of senders (users) and press [Change #]. 



When sending E-mail, specify whether to directly enter the mail address when selecting recipients. 

If set to [Do not use], recipients must be pre-registered in an address book. 

Item 

On 

Off 

Description 

Shows [Enter dest.] during recipient selection. Press this key to manually enter 

a mail address. 

Does not show [Enter dest.] during recipient selection. 



2 Press [] or [] to select Input E-mail Address and press [Change #]. 


4-18


Color Mode Setting 


Set the color mode for default settings mode. The setting items are as follows. 

Item 

Auto color key (Auto col. key) 

Full-Color key (Full col. key) 

B&W key 

Description 

Sets to auto color mode. 

Sets to full color mode. 

Sets to Black and White mode. 



2 Press [] or [] to Color setting (Colour setting) and press [Change #]. 

3 Press [Auto color key] ([Auto col. key]), [Full-Color key] ([Full col. key]) or [B&W key]. 


B&W setting 

Set the B&W mode for default settings mode. The setting items are as follows. 

Item 

Black&white 

Gray scale 

Description 

Sets to B&W. 

Sets to grayscale. 

For further details on B&W setting, refer to B&W Setting on page 4-7. 



2 Press [] or [] to select B&W setting and press [Change #]. 

3 Select [Black&white] or [Gray scale]. 


4-19


Programmed Scanning 

Up to 5 different combinations of destination, sending mode and functions can be registered for 

programmed scanning. After registering sets of frequently used destinations and modes as a single 

program, simply press the program number to recall those settings. You can also name the 

programs to identify them. 

NOTE: When registering programmed scanning, up to 20 destinations can be specified for 

simultaneous transmission. 

Registering Programs 

Follow the steps as below to register a program. 

1 Set the desired destination and sending 

mode (example: Group A, Scan to PC, 

PDF file, etc. and press [Register 

Prgrm]. 




Destination 

Group A 


Auto 

Select 

Orig.Size 

Original 

11×8½" 

08/0 

Cont. TX to 

Top Edge 

Orig. Set 

Direction 

Save at 

User PC 

Address 

Book 

Delete 

Auto size 

Select 

Send Size 

Basic 

200dpi 

Scanning 

Resolution 

Quality 


Select item. 

08/0 

Registering Programs Menu 

Register 

Delete 

Change 

Name 


to register. 


Select program number. 






4 Enter the program name and press 

[End]. 

play 

Stop 

Char.Limit:16 letters including # 

End 

NOTE: Refer to Character Input 

Method on page 7-47 for how to enter 

text characters. 

AllDel. 

Del. prev 

Letter 

Num./Sym. 

Space 

5 Press [Yes]. The program is registered. 

4-20


Using Programs to Scan 

Follow the steps below to use programs for scanning. 

1 Press the Scanner key. 

2 Press the button for the desired program 

number (1 - 5). 

Select scanner function. 

08/08/ 

If a password was entered when the 

user was registered, the password input 

screen is displayed. Input the password 

and press [Enter]. 

Send 

E-mail 

Scan to PC 

TWAIN 

Recall Program 

List A. 

List B. 

List C. 

List D. 

Database 

Connection 

Scan to 

FTP 

List E. 

Editing Program Names 

3 Place the original and press the Start key. Scanning begins using settings from the registered 

program. 

Follow the steps as below to edit the names assigned to registered programs. 

1 Press [Register Prgrm]. 

2 Press [Change Name]. 

Select item. 


08/0 

Register 

Delete 

Change 

Name 


to rename. 

Rename Program 

Select the number for changing name. 

List A. 

List B. 

List C. 

List D. 

List E. 

4 Re-enter the program name and press [End]. 


5 Press [Yes]. The modified program name is saved. 

4-21


Deleting programs 

Follow the steps below to delete saved programs. 

1 Press [Register Prgrm]. 


Select item. 


08/0 

Register 

Delete 

Change 

Name 


to delete. 



List A. 

List B. 

List C. 

List D. 

List E. 

4 Press [Yes]. The program is deleted. 

4-22


Confirming Sending History 

Confirm the sending history from the operation panel. 


2 Press [History of Sending] ([Report of 

sent data]). 

scanner function. 

08/08/’05 14:00 

Recall Program 

Edit 

Addr. Book 

Scan to PC 

TWAIN 

Change 

User Info. 

Scan to 

FTP 

History 

of Sending 

3 The transmission history is displayed. 

Press [] or [] to scroll the screen to 

show the next page. 

Sending history 

No. Sender Destination File Name Send d 

User A 

User A 

User A 

User A 

User A 

User A 

User A 

User A 

Group A 

User A 

User A 

User B 

User B 

User B 

User B 

User A 

SCAN0004_jpg 

DBLScan0017_000.tif 

DBLScan0016_000.tif 

SCAN0015_nnn.jpg 





08/16 1 

02/11 1 

02/11 1 

02/11 1 

02/11 1 

02/11 1 

02/11 1 

02/11 1 

1/ 2 

4 Press [Close] when done. 

4-23


4-24

5 Setting Scanner from a Web Browser 

This chapter explains the scanner settings that can be configured from a web browser. 


• Web Page Feature...5-2 

• System Setting...5-6 

• Scan to PC Setting...5-16 

• Send E-mail Setting...5-20 

• Scan to FTP Setting...5-25 

5-1

Setting Scanner from a Web Browser 

Web Page Feature 

Task Based Index 

Use the web page feature to manage the scanner functions from a web browser. Modifications to 

network settings, scanner default settings, Scan to PC, Send E-mail, and Scan to FTP can be easily 

made over the network. 

Confirm the following before using the web page feature. 

• This feature requires a web browser software to be installed. Netscape Navigator 4.0 or newer, 

or Internet Explorer 4.0 or newer is recommended. 

• Before using the web page feature, an IP address must be configured in the machine's scanner 

setting. (For further details, refer to Operation Guide.) 

• Scanning operations may not work properly if text entered from a computer is not correctly 

entered. The maximum allowable text input size and other text limitations are noted in this guide 

and on the web page. Refer to them when entering text. 

The following table is a task-based summary of the main items that can be configured from the web 

page feature. Use this table as an index guide when configuring settings. 

Purpose Description Reference 

Page 

Configuring the Network. This section explains network-related scanner page 5-6 

settings. 

Set the administrator's password. This section explains the administrative password page 5-7 

when using the web page feature. 

Change default scanner image 

scan settings. 

Register sender address. 

Register a destination PC. 

Register destination address. 

Register an FTP server. 

This section explains image scan settings such 

as original type and scan resolution. 

This section explains how to register the sender 

address used when sending mail from the 

scanner to a computer. 

This section explains how to register a 

destination computer when sending images from 

the scanner. 

page 5-10 

page 5-13 

page 5-16 

This section explains how to register the page 5-21 

destination address used when sending mail from 

the scanner to a computer. 

This section explains how to register an FTP 

server. 

page 5-25 

Precautions 

Unstable web browser operation 

When using a web browser to configure the scanner or utility settings and if settings made in the 

browser are not correctly reflected to the scanner, even though the scanner network settings have 

been correctly configured, switch the scanner off and back on again. The scanner will be rebooted. 

Please wait as the reboot may take a few minutes. 

Cannot find Internet site XXXXXXX or other connection errors 

• The machine startup screen is not showing Ready to copy. 

If not at startup screen, go back to the startup screen (Ready to copy). 

5-2


Page not found. error is displayed 

• The machine has not finished booting or rebooting. 

Please try again later. 

Access forbidden XXX error is displayed 

• The machine is in use. 

Using the Web Page Feature 

Try again after verifying that the scanner operation is complete and the display has returned to 

the startup screen. 

1 Launch the Web browser software. 

2 Enter the scanner IP address or hostname into the address bar and press the Enter key on the 

keyboard. 

3 The Web page feature top page is displayed. 

4 If a password has been set, a dialog box appears when 

clicking on System Basic Settings on the left side of 

the page. Enter the password and press the OK button. 

5-3


Screen Layout 

The top page consists of 3 frames. 

1 Top Frame 

2 Menu Frame 

3 Main Frame 

1 Top Frame: Displays the scanner IP address and scanner status. (See page 5-4) 

2 Menu Frame: Select the desired configuration items for the scanner. (See page 5-5) 

3 Main Frame: Displays the scanner system information. (See page 5-5) 

Top Frame 

Scanner information is displayed in the top frame. 

Display 

Host Name 

IP Address 

Scanner Status 

Description 

Displays the hostname registered to the scanner. 

Displays the IP address being used by the scanner. 

If the scanner is in ready status, • OK is shown in scanner status. If not 

ready, • OTHER is shown. 

NOTE: When • OTHER is displayed for scanner status, verify the status in Scanner status 

information. The scanner status refreshes automatically once every minute. 

5-4


Menu Frame 

From the menu frame, select the desired configuration items for the scanner. 

NOTE: Each item in the menu frame can be configured in succession. However, if the same item is 

selected during configuration, settings made until then are lost. 

Display 

Home 

System Setting 

“Send E-mail” 

Setting 

“Scan to PC” 

Setting 

“Scan to FTP” 

Setting 

Description 

Select Home to return the browser to the top page for accessing the scanner. 

System Setting is used to configure scanner related settings, and contains 

the following items. 

• System Basic Setting: Configure settings related to the scanner's 

network interface. 

• Scanner Default Setting: Configure default values for main scanner 

functions. 

• Sender List: Configure the Sender (User) List for use with scanner 

functions (Send E-mail, Scan to PC, Database Connection, Scan to FTP). 

• Reset: Reset the scanner or restore settings to their factory default 

settings. 

“Send E-mail” Setting is used to configure basic settings required for Send 

E-mail. 

• E-mail Basic Setting: Configure basic items related to Send E-mail. 

• Destination List: Register addresses for e-mail destinations. 

Use “Scan to PC” Setting to configure various settings for sending files to a 

computer (PC) for saving. 

• Destination List: Register addresses for destination computers (PCs). 

“Scan to FTP” Setting is used to configure various settings for transferring 

files to FTP servers. 

• Destination List: Register FTP servers or other settings. 

Main Frame 

Displays the scanner system information. You can also change the display language. 

NOTE: When launched, the default values are shown. 

Display 

Scanner Status 

Information 

Ethernet Address 

Scanner Firmware 

Network Firmware 

Color Profile 

Language 

Description 

When the top page scanner status changes to • OTHER, click the 

Refresh button to verify the status of the system. When the scanner 

status is • OK, Ready to Scan is displayed. 

The following 6 status results can be obtained from the scanner device. 

Ready to Scan/Using Scanner/DP (Document Processor) Paper 

Jam/System Error/Processing/Energy Save Mode 

The scanner’s MAC address will be displayed. 

The scanner’s firmware version will be displayed. 

The scanner’s network firmware version will be displayed. 

The color profile filename compatible with this device will be displayed. 

You can switch the language shown in the Web Page. 

5-5



Setting Method 

Configure the scanner settings under System Setting. Each item may only be configured when the 

scanner is in Ready to Scan status, or the machine is in Low Power Mode or in Sleep Mode. 

The administrator password is required to configure the 

scanner network interface and scanner related 

settings. 

NOTE: Change the password under System Basic 

Setting using the Administrator item. No password 

is set by default. 

System Basic Setting 

From here, set Administrator and scanner network interface basic setting Network under Setup. 

NOTE: To configure Mail Server Authentication, click Mail Server Authentication. (See 

page 5-8) 

To configure IP-Filters, click IP-Filters. (See page 5-9) 

IMPORTANT: Always click the Registration button after making changes. 

Setup - Network 

The setting items are as follows. 

Display 

Host Name 

IP Address 

Subnet Mask 

Description 

Input a scanner host name no longer than 32 characters. 

Enter the scanner interface IP address in ‘XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX’ notation. 

Enter the scanner subnet mask in ‘XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX’ notation. 

5-6


Display 

Default Gateway 

DHCP/BOOTP 

RARP 

ARP/PING 

DNS Server (Pri.) 

Description 

Enter the scanner default gateway in ‘XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX’ notation. 

Set DHCP and BOOTP to either Enabled or Disabled. The default setting is 

Enabled. 

Set RARP to either Enabled or Disabled. The default setting is Enabled. 

Set ARP/PING to either Enabled or Disabled. The default setting is Enabled. 

For sending data using host names in environments that have DNS servers 

available, enter the primary DNS server IP address in this field in 

‘XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX’ notation. 

DNS Server (Sec.) Enter the secondary DNS server IP address in ‘XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX’ notation. 

DNS Domain Name Enter the domain name in less than 254 characters. 

WINS Server (Pri.) To use WINS (Windows Internet Name Service) to resolve computer names 

from IP addresses, enter the primary WINS server IP address in 


WINS Server (Sec.) Enter the secondary WINS server IP address in this field in 


Scope ID 

Enter the Scope ID in this field. 

SMTP Server Name Enter into this field the SMTP server hostname or IP address in 


SMTP Port Number Enter the SMTP port number in this field. The default port is 25. 

POP3 Server Name Enter into this field the POP3 server hostname or IP address in 

‘XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX’ notation. Set this field if using POP before SMTP type 

authentication. 

POP3 Port Number Enter the POP3 port number in this field. The default port is 110. 

DB Assistant Enter the IP address or hostname (under 32 characters) of the computer with 

DB Assistant installed. 

Registration Button Click the Registration button to save the changes to the scanner device. 

Reset Button Click the Reset button to reset any changes to the setting options. 

IMPORTANT: If Registration button is not pressed when browsing to another window, configured 

settings will be lost without being saved to the scanner device. 

Setup - Administrator 


Display 

E-Mail Address 

Change Password 

Old Password 

Description 

Enter the administrator e-mail address. Scanner status log files and error 

reports will be sent via e-mail to this address. 

Set to Yes to change the password or No to leave unchanged. 

If a password is currently set, enter that old password here. This password is 

not linked to the 4 digit administrator password used to access the physical 

scanner's network screen. 

New Password To change the password, enter the new password here using less than 15 

characters. This password is not linked to the 4 digit administrator password 

used to access the physical scanner's network screen. 

Confirm New 

Password 

Enter again the text typed in the New Password field above. This ensures 

that no mistakes were made when entering the new password text when 

changing the password. 

5-7


Display 

Description 

Firmware update There is a great security risk if anyone could be allowed to update the 

firmware without administrator permission. Network instability may occur if 

someone other than the network were to intentionally or accidentally replace 

the firmware with an inappropriate firmware version. To address this concern, 

a security feature is provided to prevent unauthorized firmware upgrades. To 

allow firmware upgrades, set to Enable; to deny, set to Disable. 

Registration Button After entering New Password and Confirm New Password, click the 

Registration button to save the new password to the scanner. After clicking 

the Registration button, an error is displayed if the entry under Confirm New 

Password does not match the entry under New Password, or if the entry is 

blank. 


IMPORTANT: Always press the Registration button after making changes. 

Mail Server Authentication 

Some SMTP servers require sender authentication to prevent unauthorized use by third parties. 

The following authentication methods are supported. 

IMPORTANT: Check with your system administrator for the appropriate the e-mail server 

authentication method. 

• SMTP Authentication 

When sending e-mail, sends an account name and password to the SMTP server for 

authentication. 

• POP before SMTP 

Before sending e-mail, uses POP3 authentication, used in checking e-mail. 

The SMTP server accepts the mail send operation if authenticated by the POP3 server. 

• POP before SMTP (APOP) 

Same method as POP before SMTP but uses APOP in which the password is encrypted. 

• No Authentication 

Server authentication is not performed. 

NOTE: For POP before SMTP or POP before SMTP (APOP), register the POP3 in System Basic 

Setting on page 5-6. POP3 servers are supported for authentication, but this device cannot be used 

to receive e-mail. 

The Mail Server Authentication settings process is as follows. 

NOTE: Once mail server authentication (for administrators) has been configured, each user (up to 

40) can be added to mail server authentication. (See page 5-13) 

1 Enter the scanner's IP address into the Web browser to show the scanner home page. 

2 Click System Basic Setting at the left side of the screen. 

5-8


3 Select Mail Server Authentication. 

4 Choose SMTP Authentication, POP 

before SMTP or POP before SMTP 

(APOP) for Authentication Type. 

5 Enter the Login Account Name to use in mail server authentication. 

6 To enter a new password or change a password, set Change Password to Yes. 

NOTE: To skip changing the password, set to No and proceed to Step 9. 

7 Enter the new password in the New Password field. 

8 Verify the new password. Re-enter the password from Step 7 into the Confirm New Password 

field. 

9 Click the Registration button. 

IP-Filters 

This scanner includes a filtering feature to limit the IP addresses that can connect to each protocol, 

restricting access to specific profiles to only specified IP addresses. For example, by setting HTTP 

in IP-Filters, it is possible to only allow a specific IP address to connect to the scanner home page or 

Address Editor. 

Up to 4 IP address ranges can be filtered for each of the following protocols. 

HTTP/Address Editor, TELNET, AdminManager, TWAIN 

NOTE: IP-Filters can be configured for Address Editor as well. 

1 Enter the scanner's IP address into the Web browser to show the scanner home page. 

2 Click System Basic Setting at the left side of the screen. 

3 Click IP-Filters. 

5-9


4 Check the box to the left of the protocol 

name to enable filtering for that protocol. 

5 Up to 4 IP address ranges can be enabled for filtering. To filter a single IP address, only enter the 

Starting Address. 

6 Click the Registration button. 

NOTE: The setting shown in the screen 

only allows access from the IP address 

range 10.10.10.1 - 50 and from IP 

address 10.10.10.125 to the scanner's 

home page (HTTP) and Address Editor. 

Scanner Default Setting 

Configure image scanning related default settings for the scanner. The settings items are Basic 

Setting and Extension Setting. Click Extension button to show Scanner Default Setting 

(Extension). 

5-10


Basic - Black and White Mode 


Setting Item Value Description 

Orig. image 

quality 

Photo, Text, Text+Photo, OCR 

Select from the following four modes 

depending on the type of original being 

scanned. 

File Type TIFF, PDF Specify the file type when saving a 

scanned image. 

Basic - Color/Monochrome (Gray) Mode 



Density 

Adjustment (Auto) 

-3 – +3 When density adjustment is set to 

Auto, adjusts the overall dark/light 

balance. 

Density 

Adjustment 

(Manual) 

File Type 

-3 – +3 When density adjustment is set to 

Manual, adjusts the overall dark/light 

balance. 

JPEG, PDF, High Compression PDF Specify the file type when saving a 


PDF/JPEG Quality 1 (Low), 2, 3 (Standard), 4, 5 (High) 

High Compression 

PDF Quality 

Output Color Type RGB, sRGB 

1 (Compression Ratio Priority), 2, 

3 (Quality Priority) 

Specify PDF and JPEG quality. 

Sets high compression PDF quality. 


Basic - Universal mode 



Resolution 600dpi, 400dpi, 300dpi, 200dpi Select from the following four 

resolutions to scan an original. 

Multiple scanning On, Off 

Select whether to scan originals in a 

continuous operation. 

File Name Enter the filename using less than 16 

characters. 

Specify the name used when saving 

scanned images. 

5-11


Extension 



Centering On, Off When scanning with zoom, by 

specifying the Original size and the 

Send size, blank borders around the 

bottom or left and right will be shown 

depending on the sizes. When setting 

Auto Center, the image is moved to the 

center so that blank borders around 

the top and bottom or left and right 

become even. 

Continuous 

sending 

On, Off 

Use the same settings from a 

previously completed transmission for 

the next transmission. The scan 

function screen is returned with the 

sender (user), destination and other 

settings remaining from the previous 

operation. 

File name Input Manual, Auto/Manual Displays the filename input box 

without displaying the auto/manual 

selection screen. 

Skip sender (user) 

select 

On, Off 

When using this scanner, a sender 

(user) must be first selected. Set to On 

to force the sender (user) to User No. 

001 and skip sender (user) selection. 

Color setting Auto color, Full-color, Black/White Set the color mode for default settings 

mode. 

B&W setting Black&White, Grayscale When scanning in B&W, select 

between B&W and grayscale. 

Enter E-mail 

address 

On, Off 

When Send E-mail, specify whether to 

directly enter the mail address when 

selecting recipients. 

One page per file On, Offf Creates and sends a separate file for 

each page of a scanned original. 

5-12


Sender List 

Configure the Sender (User) List for use with network scanner functions (Send E-mail, Scan to PC, 

Database Connection, Scan to FTP). 

Sender (User) List 

Click Sender List to display the Sender (User) List. Up to 40 entries (No.001 - 020, No.021 - 040) 

senders (users) can be added, verified, or edited. 

NOTE: For each number (No.) that has a Registration Name input, the name is shown in the text 

box. 

Click the Sender (User) number you would like to configure to open the Sender (User) Setting 

screen and add or edit Sender (User) settings. 

IMPORTANT: When adding or editing a sender (user), always press the Registration button when 

complete. 

5-13


Sender (User) Setting 

Click the user number from the Sender (User) List to show the Sender (User) Setting screen. 

Setting Item 

Registration 

Number 

Description 

The number selected from the Sender List is shown here. This is shown for 

to verify which number from the Sender Setting table is being added or 

modified, and cannot be modified itself. 

Registration Name Field to enter the Registration Name. When a name is entered here, it is 

shown in the Sender Registration table and on the scanner device operation 

panel. Enter a registration name less than 16 characters long. 

E-mail Address Enter a Sender (User) e-mail address using less than 64 characters. 

Address of 

Address Book 

installed PC 

Save Number 

Enter the address of the computer on which the Private Address Book 

(included utility: Address Book for Scanner) has been installed. Enter the 

hostname or IP address in ‘XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX’ notation. 

Specify the PC save number for the destination PC for Scan to PC mode. 

Specify a save number from 001 - 100. 

Signature Line Enter signature data to be attached during e-mail transmission. Enter text less 

than 256 characters long. 

Change Password Set to Yes to change the password or No to leave unchanged. 

New Password To change the password, enter the new password here using less than 8 

characters. 

Confirm New 

Password 

Login Account 

Name 


New Password 

Confirm New 

Password 

For verification, re-enter the same password as in the New Password field 

above. 

Enter the Login Account Name to use in mail server authentication by the 

user. When specifying mail server authentication for each user, first configure 

Mail Server Authentication in System Basic Setting. (See page 5-8) 

Set to Yes to change the user's mail server authentication password or No to 

leave as-is. 

To change the user's mail server authentication password, enter the new 

password here using less than 31 characters. 

For verification, re-enter the same password as in the New Password field 

above. 

5-14


Setting Item 

Description 

Registration Button Click the Registration button to save the settings to the scanner. Entered 

information is lost if you browse to another page before clicking this button. 


Delete Button Click the Delete button to delete the displayed Sender (User). 

Reset 

Click each Reset button to show a verification dialog box. Click the OK button to reset or return 

settings to their factory defaults. 

Setting Item 

Restart Networking Only 

Set All Network Settings 

to Factory default 

Description 

Restarts the scanner. 

Clears all previous settings and restores them to their factory defaults. 

5-15


Scan to PC Setting 

When using the scanner, you can send scanned image data to a specified folder on a pre-registered 

computer. This section explains how to register a destination PC for use with this feature. 

NOTE: For further details on the Scanner File Utility, see Scanner File Utility on page 6-3. 

Sender List 

Sender List (PC) 

Click this item to show the Destination PC registration screen. Up to 100 Destination PCs (No.001 - 

100) can be added, verified, or edited. 

NOTE: For each number that has a Registration Name specified, the name is shown in the text 

box. 

Click the Destination PC number you would like to configure to open the Destination Registration 

(PC) screen. 

Setting Item 

No. 

Type 

Registration Name 

Description 

The registration number is displayed. Click the number you would like 

to add or edit to show the Destination Registration (PC) screen. 

Shows whether the registration method is for single or group 

registration. 

: shown when group registered. 

: shown when single registered. 

Shows the saved registration name. 

IMPORTANT: When adding or editing a destination PC, always press the Registration button when 

complete. 

5-16


Add Destination (PC) 

Select whether to add as Single Regist or Group Regist. 

Click the Single Regist button or Group Regist button to show the registration/edit screen. 

Add Destination (PC) Single Registration 

Add or edit registration name/destination PC/save number. 

Setting Item 

Registration Number 


Destination PC 

Description 

The number selected from the Destination List is shown here. This is 

shown to verify which number from the Registration of Destination PC 

Table is being added or modified, and cannot be modified itself. 

Field to enter the Registration Name. When a name is entered here, it 

is shown in the Destination PC Registration table and on the scanner 

device operation panel. Enter a registration name less than 16 

characters long. 

Field to enter the IP address or hostname of the destination PC. IP 

address takes precedence if values are provided for both fields. Enter 

the hostname using less than 32 characters. 

5-17


Setting Item 

Save Number 

Registration Button 

Reset Button 

Delete Button 

Description 

To select multiple save destinations on a single computer, enter the 

save number. Up to 100 save destinations (folders) can be specified 

for a single computer. (Use save numbers between 1 - 100) 

Click the Registration button to save the settings to the scanner. 

Entered data is lost if this button is not clicked. 

Click the Reset button to reset any changes to the setting options. 

Click the Delete button to delete the displayed destination. 

Add Destination (PC) Group Registration 

Add or edit the destination (PC) group. 

IMPORTANT: Destination Registration (PC) Group Registration cannot be performed until after 

Destination (PC) Single Registration has been performed. 

Select the destination to add to the group and click the checkbox next to the No. Enter the group 

registration name and password details and click the Registration button to add the destination 

group. 

Setting Item 


Description 





Registration Number The number selected from the Destination List is shown here. This is 

shown for to verify which number from the Destination Registration 


Change Group Password Field to enter the group password. Set to Yes to change the password 

or No to leave unchanged. 

New Password 

Confirm New Password 

To change the password, enter the new password here using less than 

8 digits (numbers). 

For verification, re-enter the same password as in the New Password 

field above. 

5-18


Setting Item 


Cancel the selection 

Button 

Reset Button 

Delete Button 

Description 


Entered information is lost if you browse to another page before 

clicking this button. 

Click the Cancel the selection button to cancel the selection for the 

destination. 



5-19


Send E-mail Setting 

This section explains the settings for sending scanned images to computers via e-mail. 

E-mail Basic Setting 

Set the basic components here for sending e-mail. 

IMPORTANT: Press the Registration button after making changes. 

Setting Item 

Item 

Data Size 

Subject 

Description 

 

Select destination domain from Non-restricted sending/Permitted 

destination domain names/Restricted destination domain names. 

Select Non-restricted sending to allow e-mail to be sent to any 

domain and ignore domain registration settings. 

Select Permitted destination domain names to only allow e-mail to 

be sent to addresses belonging to domains that match the contents of 

the registered domain list. 

Select Restricted destination domain names to only deny e-mail 

transmission to addresses belonging to domains that match the 

contents of the registered domain list. 

 

Enter the domain data. Enter each domain separated by a line feed 

using less than 500 characters. Up to 10 domains may be registered. 

Any character, such as the asterisk (*), cannot be used as a wildcard. 

Enter as ‘com’ to search all. 

Sets the upper limit for the image data size that can be sent per e-mail. 

Non-restricted/High (2048 KB)/Mid (1024 KB)/Low (512 KB) 

Input an e-mail subject using less than 32 characters. 

Text Enter the e-mail message body into this field. Text less than 500 

characters long can be registered as e-mail message bodies. 

5-20


Setting Item 

Character Code 


Reset Button 

Description 

Here, specify the character code set to describe e-mail. Select code 

set from among US-ASCII (English)/SHIFT-JIS (Japanese)/ 

ISO-8859-1 (West Europe)/Windows-1252 (West Europe)/ 

Windows-1250 (Central Europe). 

The default setting is US-ASCII (English). Set the code set matching 

the computer environment of the e-mail recipient. 





Sender List 

Destination List 

Click this item to show the destination registration screen and add, verify or edit up to 100 

destination addresses (No.001 - 100). 


box. 

Click the Destination address number you would like to configure to open the Destination 

Registration (E-mail) screen. 

Setting Item 

No. 

Class 


Description 


to add or edit to show the Destination Registration (E-mail) screen. 

Shows whether the registration method is for single or group 

registration. 

: shown when group registered. 

: shown when single registered. 


5-21


IMPORTANT: Always press the Registration button after making changes. 

Destination Registration (E-mail) 

Select whether to add as Single Regist or Group Regist. 

Click the Single Regist button or Group Regist button to show the registration/edit screen. 

Destination Registration (E-mail) Single 

Add or edit registration name/destination e-mail address for each individual number. 

Setting Item 



E-mail Address 

Description 



table is being added or modified, and cannot be modified itself. 


is shown in the Destination List (e-mail) and on the scanner device 

operation panel. Enter a registration name less than 16 characters 

long. 

Field to enter the destination e-mail address. 

5-22


Setting Item 


Reset Button 

Delete Button 

Description 





5-23


Destination Registration (E-mail) Group Registration 

Add or edit the destination (E-mail) group. 

IMPORTANT: Destination Registration (E-mail) Group Registration cannot be performed until after 

Destination (E-mail) Single Registration has been performed. 

Select the destination to add to the group and click the checkbox next to the No. Enter the group 

registration name and password details and click the Registration button to add the destination 

group. 

Setting Item 




Cancel the selection 

Button 

Reset Button 

Delete Button 

Description 


is shown in the Destination (E-mail) Registration table and on the 

scanner device operation panel. Enter a registration name less than 

16 characters long. 







Click the Cancel the selection button to cancel the selection for the 

destination. 



5-24


Scan to FTP Setting 

Sender List 

Scanned image data can be uploaded to a pre-registered FTP server. This section explains how to 

register an FTP server for use with this feature. 

Destination List (FTP) 

Click this item to show the FTP server registration screen. Up to 10 FTP servers (No.001 - 010) can 

be added, verified, or edited. 


box. 

Click the FTP server number you would like to configure to open the Destination Registration 

(FTP) screen. 

Setting Item 

No. 


Description 


to add or edit to show the Destination Registration (FTP) screen. 


IMPORTANT: When adding or editing an FTP server, always press the Registration button when 

complete. 

5-25


Destination Registration (FTP) 

Add or edit an FTP server. 

Setting Item 



Description 



(FTP) Table is being added or modified, and cannot be modified itself. 





FTP Server 

Enter the hostname or IP address for the FTP server. Enter the 

hostname using less than 64 characters. 

Port Number Enter the port number for the FTP server. (Usually 21) 

Path 

Skip Authentication 

Login Account Name 


Enter the path to the folder to which you wish to upload. For example, 

to save to a ScanData folder in the home directory, input ScanData. 

Data will be saved to the home directory if nothing is input. 

If set to Yes, users are not prompted for username and password 

when sending. If set to Yes, register the login account name and 

password as below. 

Input the user name to logon to the FTP server. 

Set to Yes to change the password used to logon to the FTP server or 

No to leave as-is. 

New Password To change the password, enter the new password using less than 32 

characters. 

Confirm New Password 


Reset Button 

Delete Button 

For verification, re-enter the same password as in the New Password 

field above. 





5-26

6 Included Scanner Utilities 

This chapter introduces the scanner utilities. 

• Introducing the Scanner Utilities...6-2 

• Scanner File Utility...6-3 

• Address Editor...6-13 

• Address Book for Scanner...6-32 

• TWAIN Source...6-42 

• DB Assistant...6-49 

6-1

Included Scanner Utilities 

Introducing the Scanner Utilities 

• Scanner File Utility (See page 6-3) 

Scanner File Utility is a utility that enables a computer to receive images from the scanner and 

save in specified folders. Scanner File Utility saves the received images as files. 

• Address Editor (See page 6-13) 

Address Editor is a tool used for the registration or modification of addresses in the scanner 

Address Book (Common Address Book). This tool is used by the administrator to perform 

address book maintenance. If there are multiple Address Editor-compatible scanners present, 

they can be easily managed by specifying all of the scanners in the same destination list. 

• Address Book for Scanner (See page 6-32) 

Address Book for Scanner is an address book installed on a computer. Use this address book 

to enable users to create and use their own destination lists. Select Private Address Book 

from the scanner operation panel to browse the Address Book for Scanner available for use by 

that user and to select a destination. 

• TWAIN Source (See page 6-42) 

TWAIN Source is a utility used from a TWAIN-compliant application to scanned images from the 

scanner into the TWAIN-compliant application. Use the TWAIN-compliant application to save or 

modify the imported images. 

• DB Assistant (See page 6-49) 

Use DB Assistant to add text information to image data for easy searching or categorization 

from a computer. This function includes the PDF Keyword Assist option to add keyword text 

information to scanned images, and the Database Assist option to create CSV files. The PDF 

Keyword Assist option is especially useful to display index items on the scanner operation 

panel for image save folders on a computer. 

6-2


Scanner File Utility 

About the Scanner File Utility 

Scanner File Utility is a utility that enables a computer to receive images from the scanner and save 

in specified folders. Scanner File Utility saves the images received from the scanner onto a 

computer. After installation, Scanner File Utility starts automatically when the computer is turned on. 

An icon is displayed on the task bar to indicate the running status and wait for incoming scanner 

data. 

Operation from the computer is simple - just configure the desired save folder and folder password 

in advance. Then, image data can be saved to the specified folder from the scanner operation 

panel. 

NOTE: Usage of the Scanner File Utility requires to use Address Editor, Address Book for Scanner 

or the web page feature to register in advance the destination computer and save folder information 

for the scanner. 

To use DB Assistant to add text information to scanned images, it is necessary to launch Scanner 

File Utility on the target save computer and select whether to send with the PDF Keyword Assist 

option (add text data to images) or with the Database Assist option (create a CSV file as text data 

together with image). 

Preparing for Use 

Configure the following before using Scanner File Utility. 

1 Install Scanner File Utility on the computer. (See page 6-4) 

2 Launch Scanner File Utility and register the folders to save image files. (See page 6-7) 

3 Using Address Editor, Address Book for Scanner or the web browser, register the IP address, 

registration name and save number for the destination PC. 

NOTE: In the save number entry field, enter the same number (from 001 - 100) as registered for the 

save folder in Scanner File Utility. 

Operation Flow 

The following is the operational flow for using Scanner File Utility to save images to a computer. 

Scanner 

Administrator 

Save destination computer 

1. Create save folders with Scanner File Utility 

6-3


2. Register save destination computer using Address Editor, Address Book for Scanner, or a web 

browser 

3. Scan the original 

4. Transmit scanned data 

5. Receive image data into the save folder 

Operating Environment 

Hardware 

Interfaces 

Operating System 

IBM PC/AT Compatible 

10BASE-T/100BASE-TX 

Windows NT 4.0 (Service Pack 5 or later), 

Windows 2000 (Service Pack 2 or later), 

Windows 98 (Second Edition), Windows 95 (OSR2), 

Windows Me, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 

Installing and Uninstalling 

Installing Scanner File Utility 

1 Click Scanner Utilities from the Software Library 

CD-ROM main menu. 

2 Click Scanner File Utility. 

3 Follow the wizard to complete the installation. 

6-4


NOTE: For Windows 2000, Windows XP or Windows Server 2003, a Setup Type selection dialog is 

shown. Select the following setup type and proceed to the next step. 

• Installing a service mode 

Select this mode to install Scanner File Utility as a service on a file server or a shared computer. 

(Scanner File Utility will remain running even if no users are logged in to the computer. (See 

page 6-12) 

• Installing a desktop mode 

Select this mode to allow Scanner File Utility to be used by individuals. (Scanner File Utility is 

started after a user logs on to the computer.) 

NOTE: To change the setup type from Desktop mode to Service mode after Scanner File Utility has 

been installed, use the Windows Add or Remove Programs function to select Modify and change 

the setup type. 

During installation, the following component installation screens appear. To use the following 

functions with DB Assistant or Network FAX, select the components and proceed with the 

installation. 

• PDF Keyword Embedder 

PDF Keyword Assist option (Adds keywords to scanned images.) 

• Network FAX Receive Handler 

Add this component to use Network FAX. For further details, refer to the optional fax kit 

Operation Guide. 

• Database Link Handler 

Database Assist option (create CSV text information files together with scanned images.) 

NOTE: After installation is complete, Scanner File Utility starts up together with Windows and 

remains running in the background. An icon is added to the Windows Taskbar to indicate running 

operation. 

Uninstalling Scanner File Utility 

Use the Windows Add or Remove Programs feature to uninstall the application. 

6-5


Start Dialog Box 

Scanner File Utility launches automatically after installation, but to shut down the program, or 

change settings such as registering the save destination for images received from the scanner, or to 

set folder passwords, open the start dialog box. 

Displaying the Start Dialog Box 

• When the program is running 

Double-click the taskbar icon. The Scanner File Utility start dialog box appears. 

• When the program is not running 

Click the start button on the Windows Taskbar and on the menu that appears select All 

ProgramsScanner User SoftwareScanner File Utility. An icon is shown on the Windows 

Taskbar to indicate Scanner File Utility is running. Double-click on the icon that appeared. The 

start dialog box appears. 

About the Start Dialog Box 

Item 

Status Field 

OK Button 

Setup Button 

Close Button 

Details Button 

Received File List 

Open File Button 

Open Folder Button 

Delete Button 

Description 

The scanner’s status is shown. 

Click to close the start dialog box. 

Click to set save folders or to change or set a password. (See 

page 6-7) 

When Scanner File Utility is running in Service Mode, the Setup 

button is only available after the Scanner File Utility service is set 

to Stop state. (See page 6-12) 

Click to shut down Scanner File Utility. When Scanner File Utility is 

installed in Service Mode, this Close button is not shown. 

A list of currently connected scanners is shown. 

Shows a list of received files. 

Opens the selected received file from the list. 

Opens the folder for the selected received file from the list. 

Deletes the selected item from the list. 

6-6


File Save Folder Settings 

About the Setup Dialog Box 

To set save folders or to change or set a password, click the Setup button on the start dialog box. 

The Setup dialog box appears, where you can confirm previously set folders. 

Item 

New Button 

Edit Button 

Delete Button 

No. 

Folder 

Comment 

Hard Disk Warning (%) 

Reception Notice 

Permit File Overwrite 

Maximum of Received 

File List 

OK Button 

Description 

Click to configure a new save folder. 

Click to configure a change the settings of an existing save folder. 

Click to configure delete the settings of a save folder. 

The folder number of the save folder. 

Shows the save folder. 

Shows comments for each folder. 

Shows a warning message in the start dialog box status field when the 

hard disk usage reaches the configured percentage. 

The color of the Scanner File Utility shown on the Windows Taskbar 

changes to yellow when the hard disk usage reaches the specified 

percentage. 

Shows a receive notification on the display when a new file has been 

saved. The receive notification is checked and when a new image has 

been received, a receive notification dialog is shown. Click the Open 

button to show the start dialog box. 

Configures whether to allow overwriting when a file with the same 

name is received in the receive folder. The name will be changed to a 

new file when saving if overwriting is not allowed. 

Set the maximum number of items to show in the Receive File List. 

(10 - 100 items) 

After finishing settings or changes for save folders, click this button. 

The display returns to the start dialog box. 

6-7


Configuring a New Save Folder 

To specify a new save folder, click the New button on the Setup dialog box. The New Folder 

Setting dialog box is shown. 

1 Input a number (from 1 - 100) for the No. column. 

NOTE: The number input here is assigned to the save folder and used as the save number. Use this 

number to specify the save folder from the scanner operation panel which was configured from the 

web browser (save number). 

2 To enter a new folder for saving images, click the ... button (reference) on the right side of the 

Folder field. The Select Folder dialog box is displayed. 

NOTE: The folder name can also be directly entered into the Folder field. When directly inputting 

the name, specify also the path to the target folder. 

A list of folders in the drive is shown in the Select Folder dialog 

box. Choose the folder to set as the save folder and click the OK 

button. 

NOTE: To choose a folder on a network drive, map a network 

drive before opening this screen. (Only available if the Scanner 

File Utility is installed in Desktop Mode) 

Floppy disks, MO disks or other removable drives may not be 

selected. 

3 For added security, a password can be set for the specified folder. To specify a 

password, click the Password Setting button. Enter a numeric password less 

than 8 characters long in the Folder Password field of the displayed Password 

Setting dialog box. 

NOTE: If a password is not needed, it is not necessary to configure this setting. 

4 After entering a password in the Folder Password field, to verify the entry, re-enter the same 

password in the Confirm Password field. Click the OK button when done entering. The display 

returns to the Folder Settings dialog box. 

NOTE: If a folder password has been set, the password must be entered when operating from the 

scanner operation panel. 

5 To add a comment to the save folder, enter it into the Comment field. 

6-8


6 Set programs to connect to the system in the System Connection 

Program field. Always choose if the image to be scanned will be 

integrated as below. 

NOTE: Use of this feature requires configuration of DB Assistant (see 

page 6-49) or Network FAX. (For further Network FAX details, refer to 

the optional fax kit Operation Guide.) 

• None 

Scan data is saved as-is in the specified folder. 



• Network FAX Receive Handler 

Add this component to use Network FAX. For further details, see the optional fax kit Operation 

Guide. 



7 Click the OK button when done entering. The save folder is set with the entered details. 

Changing Settings for Existing Save Folders 

To change the details of a previously set save folder, select the save destination from the list and 

click the Edit button in the Setup dialog box. The Folder Setting dialog box for changes is shown. 

1 For how to change details in the No. field, Folder field and Comment field, refer to Configuring a 

New Save Folder on page 6-8. 

2 To change the security password configured for the folder, click the Password 

Setting button. The Password Setting dialog box is shown. Enter the current 

password in the Old Password field. 

3 Enter a new password less of numeric characters than 8 digits long in the New Password field. 

4 For verification purposes, enter the same password again in the Confirm New Password field. 

Click the OK button when done entering. If the passwords match, the Folder Setting dialog box is 

displayed. 

6-9


5 To change a save folder comment, enter less than 32 characters into the Comment field. 

6 To change the details of the System Connection Program field, do so referring to Configuring a 

New Save Folder on page 6-8, Step 6. 

7 Click the OK button. The settings for the save folder are modified. 

Deleting References to Existing Save Folders 

Follow the procedure below to delete a reference to a previously specified save folder. 

1 From the Setup dialog box, click to choose the folder 

you would like to remove from the list of save folders 

shown in the Folder field. Selection is indicated by 

reversed display. 

2 Click the Delete button. The reference to the selected save folder is deleted. 

File Save Feature 

Operation Overview 

Perform the following to receive image data from the scanner using the Scanner File Utility. 

1 Verify that Scanner File Utility is running on the computer to receive the image data. 

NOTE: If Scanner File Utility is not running, refer to Displaying the Start Dialog Box on page 6-6 to 

launch it. 

2 Place the original on the scanner. 

3 Choose the send destination from the scanner operation panel. 

4 If a password has been set for the destination folder, enter the password. 

NOTE: This operation is not required if a password has not been set. 

If the password is incorrect, an error occurs and you cannot proceed to the next step. 

5 Press the Start key on the scanner’s operation panel. The original is scanned and image data is 

sent from the scanner to the computer. The computer converts the received image data into a 

compressed file and saves it in the specified save folder. 

NOTE: Use a commercial software application to view, edit or mail the file saved in the specified 

folder. 

6-10


File Names 

When saving data files at the computer, the details configured in advance from the web browser are 

added to the filename (character string less than 16 characters + file extension). If not specified, the 

filename will be automatically determined based on predefined rules. The file naming convention for 

automatic naming is as follows. 

Filename: *******nnnn_mmm.extension 

Text String Description 

******* Filename stored in each scanner. 

nnnn 

Indicates the document scan number, represented by a 4 digit number between 

0000 - 9999. 

mmm 

Used for each page when saving an original with multiple pages, represented by 

a 3 digit number between 0 - 999. 

Extension Extension is automatically assigned by Scanner File Utility depending on the file 

type. 

IMPORTANT: When the number for the auto-naming rule conflicts with a same file name range or 

same file name, and the Setup dialog box Permit File Overwrite is checked (see page 6-7), the 

older existing files is overwritten by newly saved files. 

About Image Data 

• File Type 

JPEG, TIFF and PDF † formats are supported. 

NOTE: The JPEG format is available when scanning in Full color or Auto color mode. Auto Color is 

available only when [Gray scale] is selected for B&W Setting. 

• Image data size 

Standard sizes: A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, B6, 11 × 15", Folio, 11 × 17", 8 1/2 ×11", 81/2 × 14", 

5 1/2 ×81/2", 8 1/2 × 13", 8 1/2 ×131/2", 8K, 16K 

Non-standard sizes: 50 - 432 mm (17") width, 50 - 297 mm (A4 Long) height. 

NOTE: When receiving multiple page image data, the import size cannot be modified for each 

individual page. (Except when Batch scanning is set) 

• Resolution (DPI) 

The four resolutions of 200 × 200 dpi, 300 × 300 dpi, 400 × 400 dpi, 600 × 600 dpi are 

supported. 

NOTE: When receiving multiple page image data, the resolution cannot be modified for each 

individual page. (Except when Batch scanning is set) 

† Using PDF conversion library by HyperGEAR, Inc. 

6-11


If a hard disk error occurs 

If the hard disk runs out of available space during receiving image data from the scanner, reception 

of subsequent images will be aborted and image data received up to that point will be lost. 

IMPORTANT: Caution when the icon color changes to yellow! 

If the used space of the hard disk reaches the preconfigured warning percentage, the Windows 

taskbar icon will change to yellow to alert this condition to the user. If this occurs, free up space on 

the hard disk by deleting unnecessary files or moving data to other media. 

Service Mode (Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 only) 

When Scanner File Utility is installed in Service Mode, the following settings are added. 

1 Even if a user is not logged on to the computer, the Scanner File Utility remains available to 

receive scanned data. 

2 To change Scanner File Utility settings, select Stop under Scanner File Utility. To restart and 

wait for scanned data, choose Start under Scanner File Utility. 

• To Stop the Scanner File Utility... 

Right-click on the taskbar icon to show the dropdown list and choose Stop. The icon 

switches a prohibited symbol and the Scanner File Utility no longer accepts received 

scan data. 

Stopping the Scanner File Utility 

• To Start the Scanner File Utility... 

Right-click on the taskbar icon to show the dropdown list and choose Start. The icon 

prohibited symbol is cleared and the Scanner File Utility now accepts received scan data. 

Starting the Scanner File Utility 

6-12


Address Editor 

About the Address Editor 

Use the Address Editor to register or modify addresses in the scanner Address Book (Common 

Address Book). This tool is used by the administrator to perform address book maintenance. If there 

are multiple Address Editor-compatible scanners present, they can be easily managed by specifying 

all of the scanners in the same destination list. 

Recommended Operating Environment 

Hardware 


Interfaces 








Installing Address Editor 



2 Click Address Editor. 


Uninstalling Address Editor 


Launching Address Editor 

1 Launch Address Editor 

NOTE: Click the Windows start button, and on the menu that appears select All Programs 

Scanner User SoftwareAddress Editor to launch Address Editor. 

6-13


2 The Address Editor main menu is displayed. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

No. Item Description 

1 Menu Bar Use toolbar or menu area buttons selecting from the menu bar. 

2 Toolbar A row of buttons is provided for easy access to write edited data to the 

scanner or other operations. 

3 Menu Area Select desired items to configure such as scanner or e-mail settings. 

4 Work Area Display each setting window here for configuration. 

Edit Data Selection Screen 

Select the Address Editor data to edit. The available edit methods are connect to the scanner and 

directly edit scanner settings or create or edit settings data without connecting to the scanner. Data 

created or edited without connecting to the scanner is sent to the scanner after editing is complete. 

NOTE: When Address Editor is launched, Connect (Scanner Address Setting) is selected. 

6-14


Scanner Address Setting 

Item 

Description 

Scanner Address Enter the address (hostname or IP address) of the scanner to connect. The 

dropdown list shows the most recently used 10 scanner addresses. Enter the 

hostname using less than 32 characters. 

Search Button Search for connected scanners. Use this button when configuring scanners 

whose IP address is set by a DHCP server or if you do not know the scanner’s 

IP address. For Scanner Search operation, see Scanner Search on page 6-15. 

new data Create or edit new Address Editor data without connecting to a scanner. 

saved data Open and edit already existing Address Editor data. 

... Button Opens the dialog box for the selected scanner setting data file and loads the 

data. 

Start Editing 

Button 

Start editing the Address Editor data. 

When the scanner address is specified, connects to the scanner and extracts 

the scanner setting data. 

When new data is selected for Offline Edit, editing is started with the default 

values. 

Scanner Search 

Search for scanners connected to the network. 

NOTE: Scanner Search displays a list of only those scanners that respond within a preset time. 

Item 

IP Address 

Host Name 

MAC Address 

Description 

Shows a list of the IP addresses assigned to the scanners. 

Shows a list of the hostnames assigned to the scanners. 

Shows a list of the scanners’ MAC addresses (Ethernet addresses). 

6-15


Item 

Start Searching Begins searching for scanners. 

Button 

Scanner Address Click the search result list to show the scanner address. 

You can skip searching and select a scanner address that was discovered 

previously from the drop down menu. 

You can directly enter the scanner address. 

Start Editing 

Button 

Description 

Connect to the selected scanner and begin editing the specified scanner data. 

Hostname will not be shown for a scanner that was in use when search was 

performed. 

Enter Password (scanner connection) 

The administrator password is required to read scanner settings and information when connecting 

to a scanner. 

NOTE: Set the administrator password according to Setup - Administrator on page 5-7 (Web 

browser) or Set Password on page 6-18 (Address Editor). 

Item 

Scanner Address 

Password 

Description 

Shows the IP address of the connected scanner. 

Enter the administrator password for the connected scanner. 

6-16



Configure the scanner’s basic settings. 

System Basic Setting 

Set the scanner’s network settings such as the IP address. 

Network 1 Tab 

Item 

Description 

Network 1/Network Switch between Network 1, Network 2, and IP-Filters settings. 

2/IP-Filters Tab 

Host Name Input a scanner host name no longer than 32 characters. 

IP Address Enter the scanner interface IP address in ‘XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX’ notation. A 

change verification dialog box is displayed when settings are saved. Verify the 

IP address. 

Subnet Mask Enter the scanner interface subnet mask in ‘XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX’ notation. 

Default Gateway Enter the scanner default gateway in ‘XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX’ notation. The 

default gateway is used to transfer packets to other networks or subnets. 

DHCP/BOOTP Set DHCP and BOOTP to either ON or OFF. The default setting is ON. 

RARP 

Set RARP to either ON or OFF. The default setting is ON. 

ARP/PING Set ARP/PING to either ON or OFF. The default setting is ON. 

DNS Server 

(Pri.) 

For sending data using host names in environments that have DNS servers 

available, enter the primary DNS server IP address in this field in 


DNS Server Enter the secondary DNS server IP address in ‘XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX’ notation. 

(Sec.) 

DNS Domain Name Enter the domain name in less than 32 characters. 

WINS Server 

(Pri.) 

WINS Server 

(Sec.) 

Scope ID 

To use WINS (Windows Internet Name Service) to resolve computer names 

from IP addresses, enter the primary WINS server IP address in 


Enter the secondary WINS server IP address in this field in 


Enter the Scope ID in this field. 

6-17


Network 2 Tab 

Item 

Description 

SMTP Server Name Enter into this field the SMTP server hostname in less than 32 characters or 

IP address in ‘XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX’ notation. 

SMTP Port No. Enter the SMTP port number in this field. The default port is 25. 

DB Assistant Enter the IP address or hostname (under 32 characters) of the computer with 

DB Assistant installed. 

Firmware update To allow firmware upgrades, set to ON; to deny, set to OFF. 

E-mail Address Enter the administrator e-mail address. Enter the e-mail address using less 

than 64 characters. 

Change Password Set the administrator’s password. (See page 6-18) 

Button 

SMTP TX 

Set the administrator mail server authentication. (See page 6-19) 

Authentication 

Button 

Set Password 

Set the administrator’s password. 

1 Enter the new password and press the OK button. 

NOTE: Enter a password less than 15 characters long. 

2 For verification, enter the new password again and press the OK 

button. 

6-18


SMTP TX Authentication (Administrator) 

Set the administrator mail server authentication. 

1 Choose SMTP Authentication, POP before SMTP, POP before SMTP (APOP) or No 

Authentication. 

2 Enter the Login Account Name to use in mail server authentication. 

3 Enter the password into the Password field. 

NOTE: Enter a password less than 31 characters long. 

4 Enter the POP3 server IP address or server name to use for Mail Server Authentication under 

POP3 Server Name. 

NOTE: Set when authenticating via POP before SMTP or POP before SMTP (APOP). 

5 Enter the POP3 server port number under POP3 Port No. 

NOTE: Set when authenticating via POP before SMTP or POP before SMTP (APOP). 

6 Click the OK button. 

6-19


IP-Filter Tab Selection 

NOTE: For further details on IP-Filter and configuration, refer to IP-Filters on page 5-9. 

Item 

Item 

Use the same IP 

Address for all 

items 

Set Allowed IP 

Address Range 

(IP Address) 

Description 

Check the item for which you would like to perform filtering. 

For all Items with a check, enables the same IP address set in Set Allowed 

IP Address Range (IP Address). 

Up to 4 IP address ranges can be enabled for filtering. To filter a single IP 

address, only enter the Starting Address. 

Scanner Default 

Configure image scanning related default settings for the scanner. The settings items are Basic 

Setting and Extension Setting. Click Extension button to show extended settings. 

Basic - Black and White mode 



File Type TIFF/PDF Specify the file type when saving a 


Orig. image 

quality 

Photo/Text/Text+Photo/OCR 

Select from the following four modes 

depending on the type of original being 

scanned. 

6-20


Basic - Color/Monochrome (Gray) mode 



File Type JPEG, TIFF † , PDF, PDF (High 

Complex) †† 

Specify the file type when saving a 


JPEG quality 1 (Low), 2, 3 (Standard), 4, 5 (High) Set the JPEG quality. 

High Compression 

PDF quality 

1 (Low size), 2 (normal), 3 (High 

quality) 

Sets high compression PDF quality. 

Output Color Type RGB, sRGB 


Density 

Adjustment (Auto) 

-3 - +3 When density adjustment is set to 

Auto, adjusts the overall dark/light 

balance. 

Density 

Adjustment 

(Manual) 

-3 - +3 When density adjustment is set to 

Manual, adjusts the overall dark/light 

balance. 

† Because the device dues not provide TIFF file format support for full color or grayscale, 

conversion to the PDF file format is automatically performed. 

†† If the PDF upgrade kit is not installed, even if you set PDF, conversion to the PDF (High 

Complex) file format is automatically performed. 

Basic - Universal mode 



Resolution 600dpi, 400dpi, 300dpi, 200dpi Select from the following four 

resolutions to scan an original. 

Multiple Scanning OFF, ON 

Select whether to scan originals in a 

continuous operation. 

File Name Enter the filename using less than 16 

characters. 

Specify the name used when saving 

scanned images. 

Extension 



Full scan – Does not function on this scanner. 

Centering ON, OFF When scanning with zoom, by 

specifying the Original size and the 

Send size, blank borders around the 

bottom or left and right will be shown 

depending on the sizes. When setting 

Auto Center, the image is moved to the 

center so that blank borders around 

the top and bottom or left and right 

become even. 

Uncompress 

scanning 

– Does not function on this scanner. 

6-21



Continuous 

sending 

ON, OFF 

Use the same settings from a 

previously completed transmission for 

the next transmission. The scan 

function screen is returned with the 

sender (user), destination and other 

settings remaining from the previous 

operation. 

File name Input Manual, Auto/Manual Displays the filename input box 

without displaying the auto/manual 

selection screen. 

Skip sender (user) 

select 

On, Off 

When using this scanner, a sender 

(user) must be first selected. Set to ON 

to force the sender (user) to User No. 

001 and skip sender (user) selection. 

Color setting Full Color, Auto Color, Black/White Set the color mode for default settings 

mode. 

B&W setting Black&White, Grayscale When scanning in B&W, select 

between B&W and grayscale. 

Sender List 

Configure the Sender (User) List for use with network scanner functions ( Send E-mail, Scan to PC). 

Item 

Name 

E 

P 

Registration 

Number 


New address 

Button 

Description 

As the sender, displays the name displayed at the top of the scanner 

operation panel. 

When the address associated with the destination list (E-mail) has been 

registered, a * is shown in this field. When editing, the destination list (E-mail) 

is also modified. 

When the address associated with the destination list (PC) has been 

registered, a * is shown in this field. When editing, the destination list (PC) is 

also modified. 

Displays the sender data registration numbers. The registration numbers are 

shown as a list on the scanner operation panel. Up to 40 items may be 

registered. 

Shows the sender e-mail address. 

Click this button to create a new sender data. The sender editing dialog box is 

shown. (See page 6-23) 

6-22


Item 

Edit Button 

Import Button 

Delete Button 

Description 

Click this button to modify sender data. The sender editing dialog box is 


Click this button to import sender data from an Address Editor file or CSV file. 

The Import dialog box is shown. (See page 6-29) 

Click to delete the selected sender data. You can also select and delete 

multiple senders in a single operation. 

Sender Address Registration (Editing) 

Register a new sender address or edit a sender address. 

Item 

Description 

Name Field to enter the Registration Name. Enter a registration name less than 16 


Registration 

Number 


Signature 

Address of PC with 

“Address Book” 

installed 

Save number 


Button 

SMTP TX 

Authentication 

Button 

Add to Destination 

List (E-mail) 

Add to Destination 

List (PC) 

Enter the sender data registration number. Specify a registration number from 

001 - 040. 

Enter the sender e-mail address. 

Enter signature data to be attached during e-mail transmission. Enter text less 

than 256 characters long. 

Enter the address of the PC on which Address Book is installed. 

Specify the PC save number for the destination PC for Scan to PC mode. 

Specify a save number from 001 - 100. 

Change the password of each user. Enter a numerical password less than 8 

digits long. 

Configure SMTP authentication settings for each user. 

When specifying SMTP authentication for each user, first configure SMTP 

Authentication in System Basic Setting. (See page 6-17) 

When this item is checked, the sender (user) address is added to the E-mail 

Destination List. 

When this item is checked, the sender (user) address is added to the PC 


6-23


E-mail Send Setting 

Set basic settings and register/edit destinations for sending scanned images to computers by 

e-mail. 

Mail Basic Setting 

Set the basic items here for sending e-mail. 

Item 

E-mail 

Transmission 

Restriction 

Domain List 

Data Size 

Subject 

Text 

Character Code 

Description 

Select destination domain from Non-restricted sending/Permitted destination 

domain names/Restricted destination domain names. 

Select Non-restricted sending to allow e-mail to be sent to any domain and 

ignore domain registration settings. 

Select Permitted destination domain names to only allow e-mail to be sent 

to addresses belonging to domains that match the contents of the registered 

domain list. 

Select Restricted destination domain names to only deny e-mail 

transmission to addresses belonging to domains that match the contents of 

the registered domain list. 

Enter the domain data. Enter each domain separated by a line feed using less 

than 500 characters. Up to 10 domains may be registered. Any character, 

such as the asterisk (*), cannot be used as a wildcard. Enter as ‘com’ to 

search all. 

Set the image size to deliver by e-mail. 

Low (512KB)/Mid. (1024KB)/High (2048KB)/No-restricted 

Set the e-mail subject. Enter text less than 32 characters long. 

Enter the e-mail message body. Enter text less than 500 characters long. 

Set the text character set for the subject and message body. Set to match the 

system environment (for each language). 

SHIFT-JIS (Japanese)/US-ASCII (English)/ ISO-8859-1 (West Europe)/ 

Windows-1252 (West Europe)/ Windows-1250 (Central Europe) 

6-24


E-mail Destination List 

Display or edit the E-mail Destination List for Send E-mail. 

Item 

Name 

S 

Registration 

Number 


New Address 

Button 

New Group Button 

Edit Button 

Import Button 

Delete Button 

Description 

As the E-mail destination, displays the name displayed at the top of the 


When the address associated with the Sender (User) List has been 

registered, a * is shown in this field. When editing, the Sender (User) List is 

also modified. 

Displays the destination data registration numbers. Specify a registration 

number from 001 - 100. 

Shows the destination e-mail address. 

Click this button to create a new destination e-mail address. The destination 

editing dialog box is shown. (See page 6-26) 

Click this button to create a new destination e-mail group. The destination 

group editing dialog box is shown. (See page 6-26) 

Click this button to edit the destination e-mail address / group address data. 

The destination editing dialog box is shown. (See page 6-26) 

Click this button to import address data from Address Editor, Address Book 

for Scanner, or CSV format data exported from Outlook. The Import dialog 

box is shown. (See page 6-29) 

Click this button to delete destination e-mail address/group address data. You 

can also select and delete multiple destinations in a single operation. 

6-25


Destination Editing (E-mail) 

Display or edit destination e-mail address. 

Item 

Description 



Registration Enter the destination data registration number. 

Number 

E-mail Address Enter the destination e-mail address. 

Destination Address Registration/Editing 

Display or edit destination e-mail group address. 

Item 

Description 



Registration Enter the destination data registration number. 

Number 

Group members Displays the names, registration numbers, and E-mail addresses of members 

registered to a group. 

Delete Button Removes the selected address as a member of a group. The deleted address 

is added to the Auxiliary group members. 

Auxiliary group 

members 

Add Button 

Displays the names, registration numbers, and E-mail addresses of members 

available to be added to a group. 

Adds the selected address as a Group member. The added address is 

removed from the Auxiliary group members. Up to 30 addresses may be 

added to Group members. 

6-26


Scan to PC Setting 

Set basic settings and register/edit destinations for sending scanned images to computers. 

Sender List 

Display or edit the Destination List for Scan to PC. 

Item 

Name 

S 

Registration 

Number 

PC address 

New Address 

Button 

New Group Button 

Edit Button 

Import Button 

Delete Button 

Description 

As the Scan to PC destination, displays the name at the top of the scanner 


When the address associated with the Sender (User) List has been 

registered, a * is shown in this field. When editing, the Sender (User) List is 

also modified. As the destination, displays the name at the top of the scanner 


Displays the destination PC data registration numbers. Specify a registration 

number from 001 - 100. 

Displays the hostname or IP address of the destination PC. 

Click this button to create a new destination PC address. The destination 


Click this button to create a new destination PC group. The destination group 


Click this button to edit a destination PC address/group. The destination 


Click this button to import address data from Address Editor or Address Book 

for Scanner. The Import dialog box is shown. (See page 6-29) 

Click this button to remove the selected destination PC address/group data. 

You can also select and delete multiple destinations in a single operation. 

6-27


Destination Editing (Scan to PC) 

Display or edit destination PC addresses. 

Item 

Description 



Registration Enter the destination PC registration number. 

Number 

PC address Enter the hostname or IP address of the destination PC. 

Save number Enter the save destination folder number. 

Destination Address Registration/Editing 

Display or edit destination PC group addresses. 

Item 

Description 



Registration Enter the destination PC registration number. 

Number 

Change Password Change the password for the PC group address. 

Button 

Group members Displays the names, registration numbers, and PC addresses of members 

registered to a group. 

Delete Button Removes the selected address as a member of a group. The deleted address 

is added to the Auxiliary group members. 

Auxiliary group 

members 

Add Button 

Displays the names, registration numbers, and PC addresses of members 

available to be added to a group. 

Adds the selected address as a member of a group. The added address is 

removed from the Auxiliary group members. Up to 30 addresses may be 

added to Group members. 

6-28


Toolbar 

A row of buttons is provided for easy access to write edited data to the scanner or other operations. 

1 2 3 4 5 


1 Open Button Specify and open an Address Editor file. 

2 Save Button Save modified data to a file. 

3 Data Send Button Writes setting data for the edited page to the scanner. 

4 Batch Send Button Writes all modified page setting data to the scanner. 

5 Help Button Displays help. 

Importing Address Data 

Address Editor supports importing address data for the Sender List, Destination List (E-mail, PC) 

from Address Editor, Address Book for Scanner, or CSV files. 

Importing Address Data to Sender List, Destination List (E-mail, PC) 

Address data can be imported to the Sender List and Destination List (E-mail, PC). 

IMPORTANT: Address Editor (*.aed) data and Outlook (*.csv) data may be imported into the Sender 

List. 

Address Editor (*.aed) data, Address Book for Scanner (*.dat), and Outlook (*.csv) data may be 

imported into the Destination List (E-mail). 

Address Editor (*.aed) data and Address Book for Scanner (*.dat) data may be imported into the 

Destination List (PC). 

Item 

Look in 

File List 

Files of type 

File name 

Open Button 

Description 

Specify the folder containing the file you would like to import. 

A list of the files contained in the specified folder is displayed. 

Specify the file type of the data you would like to import. 

The selected filename is displayed. 

Open the data file to import. 

6-29


Field Settings 

If a CSV file has been selected, match the text fields with the Destination List items. 

Item 

Name 


Fields of the CSV 

file 

Description 

The name displayed at the top of the scanner operation panel as the e-mail 

destination. 

The e-mail address for the destination list. 

The item names described in the CSV file are displayed. Select the fields to 

match with the Destination List. 

Confirm Import Data 

Confirm the data to be imported and add to the list (Sender/Destination). 

Warning column 

Item 

Description 

Number of selected Displays the number of entries selected for importing from the list. 

addresses 

Edit Button Edit the selected entry details. 

Add to Destination Add the selected entries to the Destination List. 

List (E-mail) Button 

6-30


Item 

Warning column 

Description 

Displays a warning mark for entries containing import errors. The warning 

marks are as follows. 

The name exceeds the maximum number of characters. This display is 

cleared by editing to reduce the number of characters. 

! The name includes double byte (such as Japanese) characters. This 

display is cleared by editing to single byte alphanumeric characters. 

! The e-mail address exceeds the maximum number of characters or 

contains characters not valid for an e-mail address. 

If the warning mark is , data is automatically converted into valid data and 

added to the Destination List (E-mail). 

If the warning mark is ! data will not be added to the Destination List (E-mail). 

If data with the same name is already registered in the Destination List, after 

changing the name during importing, the data will be added to the Destination 

List (E-mail). 

Registration numbers are automatically created during importing. 

Group data from Address Editor and Address Book for Scanner cannot be 

imported. 

6-31


Address Book for Scanner 

About Address Book for Scanner 

Address Book for Scanner is a utility to register or delete destination lists for use from the scanner to 

send scanned images via e-mail or to PCs. 

After installation, Address Book for Scanner starts automatically when the computer is turned on. An 

icon is added to the taskbar to indicate running operation. 


Hardware 

Interfaces 









Installing Address Book for Scanner 



2 Click Address Book. 


NOTE: Address Book for Scanner is launched when the computer is started and remains running in 

the background. An icon is added to the Windows Taskbar to indicate running operation. 

Uninstalling Address Book for Scanner 


6-32


Start Dialog Box 

Address Book for Scanner is launched automatically after installation. Use the start dialog box to 

close this program or register or edit a Destination List. 

Displaying the Start Dialog Box 


Double-click the taskbar icon. The Address Book for Scanner start dialog box is displayed. 



ProgramsScanner User SoftwareAddress Book. An icon is shown on the Windows 

Taskbar to indicate Address Book for Scanner is running. Double-click on the icon that 

appeared. The start dialog box appears. 


Item 

Connected scanner field 

OK Button 

Setup Button 

Close Button 

Description 

A list of currently connected scanners is shown. Scanner Name 

shows the hostname and IP address registered to the scanner. 

Starting time shows when the connection to the scanner was 

started. 

Click to close the start dialog box. 

Click this button to register or edit destination addresses. The 

Address Book dialog box is displayed. 

Click to shut down Address Book for Scanner. 

6-33


Destination List Setting 

About Address Book Dialog Box 

To register or edit destination address for sending scanned images by e-mail or to other computers, 

press the Setup button on the start dialog box. The Address Book dialog box is shown. You can 

verify already registered destination addresses. By default, the destination list for Send E-mail is 

shown. 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 


1 Save Button Click to save changes to a destination list. 

2 New Address Button Click to register Send E-mail or Scan to PC destination address to a 

list. (See page 6-35 or page 6-37) 

3 New Group Button Click to create a new destination group for Send E-mail or Scan to 

PC. (See page 6-36 or page 6-38) 

4 Edit Button Click to change the saved details of a destination address or 

destination group registered to a destination list. (See page 6-35 or 

page 6-37) 

5 Delete Button Click to delete destination address or destination group from a 

destination list. 

6 E-mail Address Button Click to show the destination list for Send E-mail. 

7 PC Address Button Click to show the destination list for Scan to PC. 

6-34


E-mail Destination List 

In the Address Book dialog box, click the E-mail Address button. The destination list for e-mail 

sending is shown. 

Item 

Destination List field 

Name 

ID 

E-mail address 

Comment 

Description 

Shows a list of e-mail destinations saved to the destination list. 

Displays the destination (group) name. The same name is displayed 

on the scanner’s operation panel. 

Displays the destination (group) register number. The registration 

number is assigned to destinations in the order they are added to the 


Shows the destination e-mail address. 

Shows comments about the destination. 

Registering and Editing E-mail Destination 

For registering an e-mail destination to a destination list or editing details of an already registered 

e-mail destination, use the Destination Registration (E-mail) dialog box. 

1 In the Address Book dialog box, click the New Address 

button. The Destination Registration (E-mail) dialog box is 

shown. To edit an e-mail destination, select the e-mail 

destination to edit from the destination list and press the Edit 

button. The setting method is the same for registration and 

editing. 

2 Enter a destination name for Name using less than 16 characters. 

3 Registration Number (ID) is automatically assigned at the time of registration in order added from 

001 - 100. You can change the registration numbers. 

4 In the E-mail Address field, enter the destination e-mail address using less than 64 characters. 

5 Enter a comment. 

6 Click the OK button. The entered destination is registered and the display returns to the Address 

Book dialog box. 

7 In the Address Book dialog box, click the Save button. The changes to the destination list are 

saved. 

6-35


Registering and Editing E-mail Destination Group 

For adding an e-mail destination group to a destination list or editing details of an already registered 

e-mail destination group, use the Destination Group Registration (E-mail) dialog box. 

1 In the Address Book dialog box, click the New Group 

button. The Destination Group Registration (E-mail) 

dialog box is shown. To edit an e-mail destination group, 

select the e-mail destination group to edit from the 

destination list and click the Edit button. The setting method 

is the same for registration and editing. 





5 To add a destination to a group, click the Add button. The Editing member (E-mail) dialog box is 

shown. (See Adding Destinations to an E-mail Destination Group) 

6 Do delete a destination from a group, select destination you would like to delete from the E-mail 

address field and click the Delete button. 

7 Click the OK button. The entered destination group is registered and the display returns to the 

Address Book dialog box. 


saved. 

Adding Destinations to an E-mail Destination Group 

Add destinations to an e-mail destination group from the Editing member (E-mail) dialog box. 

1 In the Destination Group 

Registration (E-mail) dialog box, 

click the Add button. The Editing 

member (E-mail) dialog box is 

shown. 

2 Select the destinations to add from Auxiliary group members and click the Add button. 

3 Do delete a destination from a group, select destination you would like to delete from the Group 

members field and click the Delete button. 

4 Click the OK button. The display returns to the Destination Group Registration (E-mail) dialog 

box. 

6-36


PC Destination List 

In the Address Book dialog box, click the PC Address button. The destination list for Scan to PC is 

shown. 

Item 

Destination List field 

Name 

ID 

PC address 

Save No. 

Comment 

Description 

Shows a list of destination PCs saved to the destination list. 

Displays the destination (group) name. The same name is displayed 

on the scanner’s operation panel. 

Displays the destination (group) register number. The registration 

number is assigned to destinations in the order they are added to the 


Displays the hostname or IP address of the destination PC. 

Enter the folder number for the save destination PC. 

Shows comments about the destination. 

Registering and Editing Destination PC 

For registering a destination PC to a destination list or editing details of an already registered 

destination PC, use the Destination Registration (PC) dialog box. 

1 In the Address Book dialog box, click the New Address 

button. The Destination Registration (PC) dialog box is 

shown. To edit destination PC, select the destination PC to edit 

from the destination list and click the Edit button. The setting 

method is the same for registration and editing. 


3 Registration Number (ID) is automatically assigned at the time of registration in order and added 

from 001 - 100. You can change the registration numbers. 

4 Under PC address, enter the PC address (IP address or host name) for the destination PC using 32 

characters or less. 

5 Under Save number enter the destination PC’s save folder number from 001 - 100, using numeric 

characters. 


7 Click the OK button. The entered destination PC is registered and the display returns to the 


6-37



saved. 

Registering and Editing Destination PC Groups 

For registering a destination PC group to a destination list or editing details of an already registered 

destination PC group, use the Destination Group Registration (PC) dialog box. 

Registration Procedure 

1 In the Address Book dialog box, click the New Group 

button to show the Destination Group Registration (PC) 

dialog box. To edit destination PC group, select the 

destination PC group to edit from the destination list and 

click the Edit button. The setting method is the same for 

registration and editing. 




4 To set or change a group password, click the Change Password button. The Change Password 

dialog box is shown. (See Setting and Editing Destination PC Group Password) 


6 To add a destination PC to a group, click the Add button. The Editing member (PC) dialog box is 


7 Do delete a destination PC from a group, select destination PC you would like to delete from the PC 

address field and click the Delete button. 

8 Click the OK button. The entered destination PC group is registered and the display returns to the 



saved. 

Setting and Editing Destination PC Group Password 

Use the Change Password dialog box to set a destination PC group password or change an 

existing password. 

IMPORTANT: Set this group password to the same folder password for each PC that will be a 

member of the destination PC group. 

1 In the Destination Group Registration (PC) dialog box, click the 

Change Password button. The Change Password dialog box is 

shown. 

6-38


2 Enter a new password under 8 digits (numeric characters). 

3 For verification, enter the new password again. 

4 Click the OK button. The display returns to the Destination Group Registration (PC) dialog box. 

Adding Destination PC to a Destination PC Group 

Add destinations to a destination PC group from the Edit member (PC) dialog box. 

1 In the Destination Group 

Registration (PC) dialog box, 

click the Add button. The 

Editing member (PC) dialog 

box is shown. 

2 Select the destination PCs to add from Auxiliary group members and click the Add button. 

3 Do delete a destination PC from a group, select destination PC you would like to delete from the 

Group members field and click the Delete button. 

4 Click the OK button. The display returns to the Destination Group Registration (PC) dialog box. 

Importing Address Data Files 

Address Book for Scanner Importing 

Specify data created and saved using Address Book for Scanner to use that address data. 

1 From the Address Book dialog box menu, select 

FileImportAddress Book. The Open dialog box is 

shown. 

2 Select the folder containing the address data file. The Address Book folder is selected by default. 

3 Select the file type. Only .dat files can be chosen. 

4 Enter the filename in the File name field. You can also select a file from the Address data file list. 

5 Click the Open button. The address information from the selected address data file is displayed in 

the Address Book dialog box. 

6-39


Importing CSV files 

Open data created with other mail applications and saved as CSV files to use the address data with 

Address Book for Scanner. 

1 From the Address Book dialog box menu, select 

FileImportCSV file. The Open dialog box is shown. 

2 Select the folder containing the address data file in CSV format. 

3 Select the file type. Only .csv files can be chosen. 

4 Enter the filename in the File name field. You can also select a file from the list of CSV files. 

5 Click the Open button. The Import Field Setting dialog box is shown. 

Field Alignment 

Align fields from the imported CSV file with the display fields for the Address Book for Scanner 

E-mail destination list. 

6 Select the item to be displayed in the E-mail destination list Name field. 

7 Select the item to be displayed in the E-mail destination list E-mail address field. 

8 Select the item to be displayed in the E-mail destination list Comment field. 

9 Click the OK button. The Confirm Import Data dialog box is shown. 

Confirming Import Data Verification and Registering to Address Book for Scanner 

Verify the list details for the CSV file to be imported and register to the Address Book for Scanner 

E-mail destination list. 

Warning 

column 

10 Select the e-mail address to import from the list and click the Add to address list button. The 

number of selected address is displayed in the Number of selected addresses field. 

6-40


11 To edit the registration details of the selected e-mail address, click the Edit button. The Destination 

Registration (E-mail) dialog box is shown. (See page 6-35) 

12 Click the OK button. The selected e-mail address is added to the Address Book for Scanner E-mail 


IMPORTANT: About the Warning column 

A warning icon is displayed for e-mail addresses that cannot be registered to Address Book for 

Scanner due to import problems. In this case, click the Edit button. The Destination Registration 

(E-mail) dialog box is shown (see page 6-35). Correct the errors to the e-mail address registration 

details. The warning icon disappears. 

Warning Icon Description 

: Shown when the name value exceeds 16 characters. 

!: Shown when the name value contains double byte (Japanese, etc.) characters or when the e-mail 

address value exceeds 64 characters. 

6-41


TWAIN Source 

About TWAIN Source 

TWAIN Source is a utility used from a TWAIN-compliant application to scanned images from the 

scanner into the TWAIN-compliant application. This section explains how to import images using 

TWAIN-compliant general purpose applications. 

IMPORTANT: Install TWAIN Source onto the computer before importing images using this method. 

Install TWAIN Source onto each computer if multiple computers will be used. 

Scanner 

1. TWAIN Mode Configuration 

2. Loading Originals 

3. Selecting Scanner from the TWAIN-compliant Application 

4. Selecting the original size and resolution from TWAIN Source 

5. Request Scanning 

6. Transmit Scanned Image 

7. Display Scanned Image 


Hardware 

Interfaces 






Windows 98(Second Edition), Windows 95(OSR2) 


6-42


Installing TWAIN Source 



2 Click on TWAIN Source. 


Uninstalling TWAIN Source 


About Image Data 

Compatible image data specifications are as follows. 

TWAIN Specifications 

Image size (max.) 

Image width: 432 mm (17"), Image Height: 297 mm (A4 Long) 

Resolution (DPI) 200 × 200, 300 × 300, 400 × 400, 600 × 600 

Grayscale 

2 color B&W, 256 level (error diffusion) 

Importing Images 

There are two main methods to use a TWAIN-compliant application to import images from the 

scanner, and the operation method is as follows. Perform the image scanning method suitable to 

your working requirements. 

NOTE: See Operation Guide for operation procedure details. 

Starting Scanning from the Computer 

1 Launch TWAIN Source from the TWAIN-compliant application on the computer. 

2 Click the Scan. Setup button, check if it is selected and click the OK button. 

NOTE: When the scanner is not selected, click the Edit button and select the scanner. 

6-43


3 Click the TWAIN Source Connect(s) button. 

NOTE: Connection may fail if the scanner is currently starting up or in use. If this happens, set 

TWAIN mode from the scanner and click the Connect(s) button. 

4 Set Waiting Scan and click the Scan button. 


6 The scanned image is sent to the computer. 

Starting Scanning from the Scanner 

1 Set TWAIN mode from the scanner operation panel. 

2 Place the originals. 

3 Launch TWAIN Source from the TWAIN-compliant application on the computer. 

4 Click the Scan. Setup button, check if it is selected and click the OK button. 

NOTE: When the scanner is not selected, click the Edit button and select the scanner. 

5 Click the TWAIN Source Connect(s) button. 

6 Click the Scan button to begin scanning. 

7 The scanned image is sent to the computer. 

NOTE: You can change the resolution or original size settings from the computer or scanner. See 

the following About the Main Dialog Box for configuring TWAIN Source at the computer. See 

Operation Guide for configuring from the scanner’s operation panel. 

6-44


About the Main Dialog Box 

The items shown in the TWAIN Source main dialog box are as follows. 

Item 

Original Image Size 

Original Text Direction 

Transmission Size 

Description 

Select the standard size for original scanning. The following sizes are 

available. 

Auto, A3 (297 × 420 mm), Computer Form (11 × 15"), A4 

(210 × 297 mm), A5 (148 × 210 mm), JIS-B4 (257 × 364 mm), 

JIS-B5 (182 × 257 mm), JIS-B6 (128 × 182 mm), Letter (8 1/2 ×11"), 

Ledger (11 × 17"), Legal (8 1/2 × 14"), Statement (5 1/2 × 8 1/2"), 

Oficio II (8 1/2 × 13"), 8K (273 × 394 mm), 16K (197 × 273 mm), 

Foolscap (8 1/2 × 13 1/2"), Folio (210 × 330 mm), Custom (when set, 

the Custom Size dialog box is displayed.) 

Select the original set direction and text direction. 

When standard size is selected for original image size, select the 

standard size to use when receiving images from the scanner. The 

following sizes are available. 

A3 (297 × 420 mm), Computer Form (11 × 15"), A4 (210 × 297 mm), 

A5 (148 × 210 mm), JIS-B4 (257 × 364 mm), JIS-B5 

(182 × 257 mm), JIS-B6 (128 × 182 mm), Ledger (11 × 17"), Letter 

(8 1/2 × 11") Legal (8 1/2 × 14"), Statement (5 1/2 ×81/2"), Oficio II 

(8 1/2 × 13"), 8K (273 × 394 mm), 16K (197 × 273 mm), Foolscap 

(8 1/2 × 13 1/2"), Folio (210 × 330 mm) 

Color Specify color settings. Select from Color, Grayscale, ACS, B/W (2 

bit). 

Orig-image quality Select original type from Photo, Text, Text+Photo, OCR. 

Resolution 

Scanning 

Select the resolution to read the original from 

600 dpi, 400 dpi, 300 dpi, 200 dpi. 

Set the scanner operation. 

Auto: When an original is placed on the platen, after scanning that 

original, prompt to scan the next page. If an original is placed in the 

optional document processor, scanning continues until no pages are 

remaining in the document processor. 

Page: When an original is loaded in the optional document 

processor, scans only the first page of the original. 

6-45


Item 

2 sided Sets whether to scan both sides of an original with the optional 

document processor. 

Status Field 

Brightness 

Scan/Connect(s) Button 

Waiting Scan Checkbox 

Preview 

Default Button 

Scan. Setup Button 

Close Button 

Help Button 

Description 

None: Scan only 1 side of the original. 

2 sided (Left/Right): Set to scan left/right binding 2-sided originals. 

2 sided (Top): Set to scan top-binding 2-sided originals. 

The device status is displayed. 

Specify the image exposure. 

When successfully connected, this button turns into the Scan button. 

Click this button to begin scanning. When not connected, this button 

becomes the Connect(s) button. Click to reconnect to the scanner. 

For high resolution scanning, during image processing, the 

connection to the scanner may be lost. 

When checked, the scanner stops remaining in scanner mode. In this 

mode, to begin scanning originals requires the Start key on the 

scanner operation panel to be pressed. 

When checked, the image can be confirmed or colors adjusted 

before importing into the computer. 

Resets all TWAIN Source settings to defaults when clicked. 

Click this button to display the Scanner Setup dialog box. From this 

dialog box, change the scanner address (see Change Scanner IP 

Address), units (inches, centimeters), or set whether to compress 

data when scanning. 

Cancels settings and closes the main dialog box. 

Click this button to show the Help screen. 

Change Scanner IP Address 

If the Scanner IP address has changed after TWAIN Source was installed, change the IP address to 

use when connecting to the scanner. Follow the steps below to perform the operation. 

1 Click the Scan. Setup button on the TWAIN Source main dialog box. The Scanner Setup dialog 

box is shown. 

2 The currently configured address is shown in the Scanner 

Address field. Click the Edit button to change this address. 

The Address Setting dialog box is shown. 

3 Enter the new IP address. 

4 Click the OK button. The screen returns to the Scanner Setup dialog box. 

5 Click the OK button. The scanner’s IP address is changed. 

6-46


Job Accounting Setting 

If Job Accounting is configured for the device, the Job code must be entered when using the device. 

When Job Accounting is enabled, the job code sent by the computer is verified by the scanner. 

Therefore, the Job Accounting code must be configured in TWAIN Source at the computer. 

About Color Profiles 

Registration method 

1 Click the Scan. Setup button on the TWAIN Source main dialog box. The Scanner Setup dialog 

box is shown. 

2 Click the Edit button. The Address Setting dialog box is shown. 

3 Click the Use Management Code check box to add a check mark. 

4 To always use the same code, enter the desired Job code (8 digits or less) in the Code field. 

5 Enter the same Job code entered into the Code field again in the Confirm Code field. 

6 Click the OK button. 

7 If a Job code is not configured, a Job code entry screen will be displayed during connection. Enter 

the code to be used. 

The color scanner provides color profiles to adjust color. 

NOTE: The color profile data import method varies for every TWAIN-compliant software. Use the 

color profile after carefully reading the manual included with your TWAIN-complaint software. 

Selecting a color profile compatible with this device 

1 Launch the Web browser software. 

2 Enter the scanner IP address or hostname into the address bar and press Enter. 

3 The Web page feature top page is displayed. The file name for the color profile compatible with this 

this scanner is shown to the right of Profile in the main frame. 

4 Next, use the color profile with the same name as that shown in Step 3, found in the CD included 

with this scanner CD (Software Library) under the Color Profile folder. 

Unable to Connect to Scanner 

One of the following problems may be preventing scanner connection. Try again after confirming the 


• The machine is currently copying or operating in a mode other than Wait for Scan mode. 

• Original has been loaded into the optional document processor before connecting TWAIN 

Source to the scanner. 

6-47


Maximum image size 

Depending on available memory, scanning of certain image sizes may not be possible. 

Color, Grayscale Selection 

200 dpi 300 dpi 400 dpi 600 dpi 

A3 22 MB 50 MB 89 MB 199 MB † 

A4 11 MB 25 MB 44 MB 100 MB 

11 × 17" 21 MB 48 MB 86 MB 193 MB † 

8 1/2 × 11" 11 MB 24 MB 43 MB 96 MB 

† Unable to scan under Windows 95. 

Black & White 

200 dpi 300 dpi 400 dpi 600 dpi 

A3 0.9 MB 2.1 MB 3.7 MB 8.3 MB 

A4 0.5 MB 1.0 MB 1.8 MB 4.1 MB 

11 × 17" 0.9 MB 2.0 MB 3.6 MB 8.0 MB 

8 1/2 × 11" 0.4 MB 1.0 MB 1.8 MB 4.0 MB 

6-48


DB Assistant 

About DB Assistant 

DB Assistant is a utility that configures 2 features: PDF Keyword Assist option, to add keywords 

searchable from a computer to scanned images, and Database Assist option, to create text 

information CSV files. These features are extremely useful when organizing scanned images or 

managing databases. 

After installation, DB Assistant starts automatically when the computer is started. An icon is 

displayed on the task bar to indicate the running status and to wait for incoming data. 

• PDF Keyword Assist Option 

Adds keywords to scanned image text information. If the image format is PDF, you can confirm 

keyword entry for text information of Acrobat Reader general images (graphics). Also, you can 

use included software (PaperPort) to search for keywords from a computer. This feature is 

extremely useful when searching for a specific file from among many files. 

• Database Assist Option 

Creates added text information as CSV files together with scanned images. Use spreadsheet 

applications or database applications to read these CSV files. 

Preparing for Use 

Configure the following before using DB Assist. 

1 Install DB Assistant onto the computer. (See page 6-51) 

2 Launch DB Assist and register PDF Keyword Assist option or Database Assist option. (See 

page 6-52) 

3 From the scanner operation panel or web browser, register the IP address or hostname of the 

computer running DB Assist. 

4 Launch Scanner File Utility on the scanned image destination computer, and select PDF Keyword 

Embedder for PDF Keyword Assist option, or select Database Link Handler for Database Assist 

option. (See page 6-8) 

6-49


Operation Flow 

The operation flow for using DB Assistant to add text information to scanned images and save to 

specified folders is as follows. 

Scanner 

Administrator 

Save destination 

computer 

1. Use DB Assistant to add text information 

From a web browser or scanner, register the administrator PC’s IP address 

2. From Scanner File Utility, select whether to link to PDF Keyword Assist option or Database 

Assist option 

3. Select [Database Connect], set text information, and scan original 

4. Transmit scanned data 

PDF Keyword Assist option: Images with text data keywords 

Database Assist option: Image data and CSV text data files 

5. Receive image data and document data into the save folder 


Hardware 

Interfaces 








6-50



Installing DB Assistant 



2 Click on DB Assistant. 


NOTE: During installation, the following component installation screens appear. Select to use the 

following features with DB Assistant. 





NOTE: After installation is complete, DB Assistant starts up together with Windows and remains 

running in the background. An icon is added to the Windows Taskbar to indicate running operation. 

Uninstalling DB Assistant 


6-51


About the Operation Window 

DB Assistant is launched automatically after installation. To configure PDF Keyword Assist 

option/Database Assist option, open the setting dialog box. 

Showing the Setting Dialog Box 


Double-click the taskbar icon. The DB Assistant start dialog box is displayed. Next, click the 

start dialog box Configuration button to show the DB Assistant setting dialog box. 



ProgramsScanner User SoftwareDB Assistant. An icon is shown on the Windows 

Taskbar to indicate DB Assistant is running. Double-click on the icon that appeared. The start 

dialog box appears. Next, click the start dialog box Configuration button to show the DB 

Assistant setting dialog box. 


Item 

Connected scanner 

OK Button 

Configuration Button 

Close Button 

Description 

Scanner name shows the hostname and IP address registered to 

the scanner. Starting time shows when the connection to the 

scanner was started. 

Close the start dialog box. 

Show the setting dialog box. 

Shut down DB Assistant. 

About the Settings Dialog Box 

To configure PDF Keyword Assist option/Database Assist option, click the Configuration button on 

the start dialog box. The setting dialog box is shown. 

Save Button 

Item 

Save Button 

Description 

Click this button to update settings after changing settings. 

Configured items are not saved if data is not updated before closing. 

6-52


Setting PDF Keyword Assist Option 

This section explains setting and registering PDF Keyword Assist option (add text data keywords to 

scanned images) with DB Assistant. First, open the DB Assistant setting dialog box and follow the 

steps below. 

NOTE: Refer to the PDF Keyword Assist option setting information to configure Database Assist 

option (create CSV text data files for scanned images). 

1 To configure PDF Keyword Assist option, 

click Edit on the setting dialog box menu bar 

and select New. Next, select Destination 

PC from the menu displayed. A function 

name setting screen is displayed. 

NOTE: To create Database Assist option, select Database. 

2 Enter the function name. Enter a name into the Name field 

using less than 16 characters. The name entered here will be 

shown on the scanner operation panel. 

3 Enter the IP address or hostname of the destination PC (computer where the scanned image will be 

saved) in the PC Address field. Next, in the Save Number field, enter the Save Number from 

Scanner File Utility. 

NOTE: For further details on Save Number, see Scanner File Utility - Configuring a New Save 

Folder (page 6-8). 

Registration is not complete until all items from Steps 2 and 3 are entered. 

4 Click OK after configuring to create a PDF Keyword Assist option setting. 

5 Change the Scan default settings. Here, you 

can set some default settings for how to scan 

images. Double-click the created Default 

Settings (or right click and select Set from 

the menu that appears). The Scanner 

Default Settings dialog box is shown. 

6 Select the desired function from the Scanner Default Settings dialog box and click the OK button 

to save settings and return to the settings dialog box. 

6-53


NOTE: Refer to Setting Scanner Functions on page 4-2 for 

settings item details. These scan default settings can be 

changed later from the scanner operation panel. 

From the setting dialog box select Default 

Settings and right-click to show the Set, 

RegisterDefault, Return to default 

menu. 

Set: Shows the Scanner Default Settings 

screen. 

Default: Saves the current settings as 

defaults. 

Return to default Restores settings to their 

values before saving. 

7 Double-click the created Access Settings (or right click 

and select Set from the menu that appears). The Access 

Setting dialog box is shown. From here you can limit 

access of users to currently registered features. 

Non-restricted: Users can access without restriction. 

Access according to sender name: Configure users 

allowed access. Users other than those selected cannot 

access this setting. Select users to be granted access from 

the Sender User List registered in the scanner. Refer to 

Setting Restrict by Sender (User) on page 6-55 for settings 

details. 

NOTE: With Database Assist option, you can also limit access via a password. Enter a numerical 

password less than 8 digits long. 

8 Configure File Information. Items configured here can be set as 

text information (keywords) for scanned images. To the left of the 

created File Information, click +. Keyword and Creator are 

displayed. 

NOTE: By setting Keyword and Creator text information for 

scanned images, you can use the keyword search feature for the 

bundled software (PaperPort) to search for images. 

9 Set Keyword. Double-click Keyword (or right click and click Edit). The Keyword Edit dialog box is 

displayed. 

6-54


10 Enter the keyword in the List Change field. Enter text less 

than 32 characters long. Click Apply (or press Enter key) 

to register the keyword to the Keyword. To change an 

entered keyword, select the keyword you would like to 

change (reverse display) and click the Edit button. The 

keyword is displayed in the List Change field and can be 

again modified. Click the OK button when done editing. 

They keyword is set and the screen returns to the setting 

dialog box. 

NOTE: Up to 100 Keyword items may be added to the Register List. 

Select a keyword from the Register List (reverse display) and click or to change its order in 

the list. 

11 Sets the Creator. Double-click Creator (or right click 

and click Edit). The Creator Edit screen is displayed. 

Enter the Creator in the List Change field. Enter text less 

than 32 characters long. Continue referring to the setting 

method for Keyword from Step 10. 

NOTE: To use the bundled software PaperPort to search 

for this Creator, search from the keyword search item. 

Up to 100 Creator items may be added to the Register 

List. Select a creator from the Register List (reverse 

display) and click or to change its order in the list. 

This completes the configuration of PDF Keyword Assist 

option (add text information to scanned images) for DB Assistant. 

Setting Restrict by Sender (User) 

This section explains the setting operation for Setting PDF Keyword Assist Option on page 6-53, 

Step 7: Restrict by Sender (User). 

1 Enter the user name to be granted permission in the 

Sender (User) List Change field. Enter text less than 16 

characters long. Click Apply (or press Enter key) to 

register the name to the Register List. To change an 

entered user name, select the user name you would like to 

change (reverse display) and click the Edit button. The 

user name is displayed in the List Change field and can be 

again modified. Click the OK button when done editing. 

They user name is set and the screen returns to the setting 

dialog box. 

6-55


2 To verify the Senders (Users) previously 

registered in the scanner, click the 

Browse... button. The Current Sender 

List dialog box is displayed. 

3 Enter the address of the scanner to connect (hostname or IP address) in the Scanner Address 

field. Click the Download list button to display the list of Senders (Users) registered in the scanner. 

Select sender you wish to add from this list and click the Add (>>) button. The selection is displayed 

in the List of senders to be added at the right of the screen. Click the OK button to grant access to 

the added Sender (User) and return to the Access Setting dialog box. 

4 To verify the senders (users) registered for the currently 

connected scanner, click the ... button to the right of the 

Scanner Address field on the Current Sender List dialog 

box. The Scanner Search dialog box is shown. 

5 Click the Start Searching button. The IP address or hostname and MAC address of scanners found 

on the network are displayed. Select (reverse display) the address of the scanner for the sender 

(user) you would like to select. When the IP address or host name of the selected scanner appears 

in the Scanner Address field, click the OK button (or press the Enter key). The screen returns to 

Current Sender List and the selected scanner address is displayed in the scanner address entry 

field. 

6 Click the Download list button. The senders (users) registered in the scanner selected in Step 5 

are displayed in the scanner senders (users) list. You may now confirm the senders (users) set for 

the selected scanner. 

6-56

7 System Menu 

This chapter explains how to configure various settings using the menus on the machine’s operation 

panel. 


• Default Settings...7-2 

• Setting MP Tray...7-29 

• Registering Non-standard Sizes for Originals...7-30 

• User Adjustment...7-31 

• Setting Document Management Defaults...7-38 

• Hard Disk Management...7-42 

• Printing Reports...7-43 

• Checking Total Copy Count...7-46 

• Character Input Method...7-47 

7-1

System Menu 

Default Settings 

Default Settings for Copying 

This section explains how to change default settings which are applied when the machine is 

powered up or the Reset key is pressed. Automatically configured details set in default setting 

mode are called default settings. Default settings are divided between Default Settings for Copying 

and Machine Default. These settings may be freely modified to suit your usage patterns. 

Set the following default copy settings. 

• Exposure Mode...7-3 

• Exposure Steps...7-3 

• Original Image Quality...7-4 

• Color Mode Setting...7-4 

• Setting Auto Color Detection...7-4 

• Setting EcoPrint...7-5 

• Correct Fine Black Lines...7-5 

• Select Paper...7-5 

• Setting Auto Paper Selection...7-6 

• Paper Type (Auto Color Paper)...7-6 

• Paper Type (Auto BW Paper)...7-6 

• Selecting Default Cassette...7-7 

• Specifying Cassette for Cover Paper...7-7 

• Setting Auto % Priority...7-8 

• Adjusting Auto Exposure...7-8 

• Adjusting Manual Exposure...7-8 

• Selecting Default Zoom...7-9 

• Selecting Sorting and Offsetting Output...7-9 

• Selecting Auto Rotation...7-9 

• Setting Margin Defaults...7-10 

• Erasing Borders...7-10 

• Selecting Maximum Number of Copies...7-10 

• Enabling Repeat Copy...7-11 

• Showing the Register Key...7-11 

• Customize (Basic Screen)...7-11 

• Customize (User Choice)...7-12 

Accessing the Copy Default screen 

Follow the procedures below to access the Copy Default screen. 


7-2

System Menu 

2 Press [Copy Default]. 


System Menu 

Copy 

Default 

Language 

Job 

Accounting 

Scanner 

Default 

Printer 

Default 

MP tray 

Setting 

BOX 

Management 

Machine 

Default 

Document 

Management 

Register 

Orig. Size 

Print 

Report 



If the correct management code has been entered, the Copy Default screen will be displayed. 






Exposure Mode 

Set the exposure mode for default settings mode. The setting items are as follows. 

Item 

Manual 

Auto 

Description 

Sets manual copy exposure mode. 

Sets automatic copy exposure mode. 

For further information regarding exposure mode, see Operation Guide. 

1 Referring to Accessing the Copy Default screen on page 7-2, access the Copy Default screen. 

2 Press [] or [] to select Exposure Mode and press [Change #]. 

3 Select [Manual] or [Auto]. 

4 Press [Close] to save settings or [Back] to cancel settings. The display returns to the Copy Default 

screen. 

Exposure Steps 

Change the exposure adjustment step amount. The setting items are as follows. 

Item 

Description 

1 step 7 exposure adjustment steps are available. 

0.5 step 13 more accurate exposure adjustment steps are available. 


2 Press [] or [] to select Exposure Steps and press [Change #]. 

3 Select [1 step] or [0.5 step]. 


screen. 

7-3

System Menu 


Set the original image quality for default settings mode. The setting items are as follows. 

Item 

Text+Photo 

Photo 

Print 

Text 

Map 

Description 

Appropriate for mixed text and photo originals. 

Appropriate for photo originals taken with a camera. 

Appropriate for photo originals from magazines or printed media. 

Appropriate for document originals with large amounts of text. 

Appropriate for map originals. 


2 Press [] or [] to select Original Image Quality and press [Change #]. 

3 Select [Text+Photo], [Photo], [Print], [Text] or [Map]. 


screen. 

Color Mode Setting 

Set the color mode for default settings mode. The setting items are as follows. 

Item 

Auto color (Auto colour) 

Full color (Full colour) 

Black&White (Black white) 

Description 

Automatically detects color and black and white originals and copies 

color originals in color and black and white originals in black and white. 

Copies all originals in full color. 

Copies all originals in black and white. 


2 Press [] or [] to select Auto Color/Full-Color/B&W (Auto Colour/full col./B&W) and press 

[Change #]. 

3 Select [Auto color] ([Auto colour]), [Full color] ([Full colour]), or [Black&White] ([Black white]). 


screen. 

Setting Auto Color Detection 

Adjust the color and black&white detection level for auto color copy mode. Reduce the value to 

detect more color originals. Increase the value to detect more black&white originals. 


2 Press [] or [] to select Auto Color Correction (Auto colour Correction) and press [Change #]. 

3 Press [] or [] to adjust the value. 


screen. 

7-4

System Menu 

Setting EcoPrint 

Set EcoPrint for default settings mode. The setting items are as follows. 

Item 

Off 

On 

Description 

Do not enable EcoPrint. 

Enable EcoPrint. 

For more information on EcoPrint, see page 1-43. 


2 Press [] or [] to select EcoPrint and press [Change #]. 

3 Select [Off] or [On]. 


screen. 

Correct Fine Black Lines 

Set Fine Black Line correction to reduce the black lines (dragged stains not appearing on the 

original) that may occur when copying using the optional document processor. The setting items are 

as follows. 

Item 

Off 

On (Low) 

On (High) 

Description 

Disables Fine Black Line correction. 

Suppress black streaks moderately. 

Suppress black streaks strongly. 

NOTE: When suppressing black streaks, select [On (Low)]. Select [On (High)] only when the black 

streaks are not suppressed with the Low setting. 

When fine black line correction is enabled, the ability to reproduce fine text characters is reduced. 

For normal usage, the default setting ([Off]) is recommended. 


2 Press [] or [] to select Correct. fine black line and press [Change #]. 

3 Select [Off], [On (Low)] or [On (High)]. 


screen. 

Select Paper 

In default settings mode, set the paper selection method for when an original is set. The setting 


Item 

Description 

APS 

Selects the cassette loaded with the same size paper as the original. 

Default cassette Selects the cassette configured as the default cassette (see page 7-7). 


2 Press [] or [] to select Select Paper and press [Change #]. 

7-5

System Menu 

3 Select [APS] or [Default cassette]. 


screen. 

Setting Auto Paper Selection 

Set the paper selection method for Auto Paper Selection mode when changing the zoom ratio. The 

setting items are as follows. 

Item 

Most Suit Size 

Same as Orig. Size 

Description 

Changes the paper size to match the size after zooming. 

Leaves the paper size the same size as the original, even after 

zooming. 


2 Press [] or [] to select APS Setting and press [Change #]. 

3 Select [Most Suit Size] or [Same as Orig. Size]. 


screen. 

Paper Type (Auto Color Paper) 

Select Automatic Paper Selection mode for color copying to limit the paper types. For example, set 

to [Color] ([Colour]) to select the cassette set the same size paper and set to color paper for the 

paper type. Set to [Off] to select the cassette with the same size paper regardless of paper type. 

The following paper types are available. 

Plain, Rough, Vellum, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color (Colour), Prepunched, Letterhead, High 

Quality, Custom 1 - 8 

NOTE: Select the paper type set for the current cassette. For further details, refer to Specifying the 

Paper Type on page 7-15. 


2 Press [] or [] to select Pap. Type (Auto col. pap.) and press [Change #]. 


If [On] is selected, select the paper type. 


screen. 

Paper Type (Auto BW Paper) 

Select Automatic Paper Selection mode for black and white copying to limit the paper types. For 

example, set to [Plain] to select the cassette set the same size paper and set to plain paper for the 

paper type. Set to [Off] to select the cassette with the same size paper regardless of paper type. 

The following paper types are available. 

Plain, Rough, Vellum, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color (Colour), Prepunched, Letterhead, High 

Quality, Custom 1 - 8 

7-6

System Menu 

NOTE: Select the paper type set for the current cassette. For further details, refer to Specifying the 

Paper Type on page 7-15. 


2 Press [] or [] to select Paper Type (Auto BW Paper) (Paper Type (Auto B&W pap.)) and press 

[Change #]. 


If [On] is selected, select the paper type. 


screen. 

Selecting Default Cassette 

Automatically selects the default cassette (1 - 4). 

NOTE: The MP tray may not be set as the default cassette. 

3rd paper and 4th paper are shown when the optional paper feeder or 3000 sheet paper feeder 

have been installed. 


2 Press [] or [] to select Default cassette and press [Change #]. 

3 Select the cassette to use as the default. 


screen. 

Specifying Cassette for Cover Paper 

Specify the paper source cassette (1 - 4) or MP tray which is loaded with cover paper. Cover paper 

is used in cover mode (see page 1-25) and booklet mode (see page 1-26, page 1-28). 

NOTE: 3rd paper and 4th paper are shown when the optional paper feeder or 3000 sheet paper 

feeder have been installed. 


2 Press [] or [] to select Cassette for cover paper and press [Change #]. 

3 Select the paper source containing the cover paper. 


screen. 

7-7

System Menu 

Setting Auto % Priority 

Specify whether to set auto zoom when the paper in the selected cassette is different from the size 

of the original. The setting items are as follows. 

Item 

Description 

Off Sets zoom to equal (100%). 

On 

Automatically sets zoom to fit the paper size. 


2 Press [] or [] to select Auto % Priority Setting and press [Change #]. 



screen. 

Adjusting Auto Exposure 

Adjusts the overall lightness or darkness when copying in auto exposure mode. The setting items 


Item 

Lighter 

Darker 

Description 

Lightens the overall density when copying in auto exposure mode. 

Darkens the overall density when copying in auto exposure mode. 


2 Press [] or [] to select Density Adjustment (Auto) and press [Change #]. 



screen. 

Adjusting Manual Exposure 

Adjusts the overall lightness or darkness when copying in manual exposure mode. The setting items 


Item 

Lighter 

Darker 

Description 

Lightens the overall density when copying in manual exposure mode. 

Darkens the overall density when copying in manual exposure mode. 


2 Press [] or [] to select Density Adjust. (Manual) and press [Change #]. 



screen. 

7-8

System Menu 

Selecting Default Zoom 

Set the reduce/enlarge setting in default settings mode. The setting items are as follows. 

Item 

Description 

Auto % 

Automatically sets zoom to fit the paper size. 

100% Sets zoom to equal (100%). 


2 Press [] or [] to select Reduce/Enlarge and press [Change #]. 

3 Select [Auto %] or [100%]. 


screen. 

Selecting Sorting and Offsetting Output 

Set sorting and offsetting output options in default settings mode. The setting items are as follows. 

Item 

Description 

Sort Off (Sort:Off) Do not enable sort mode. 

On (Sort:on) 

Enable sort mode. 

Offset Off Do not enable offset mode. 

On (1 set or Output each 

page) 

Enable offset mode. (When set to [Sort:Off], defaults to 

[Output each page] with metric models) 

For further details about sort mode, refer to Operation Guide; for further details about offset mode, 

refer to page 1-9. 


2 Press [] or [] to select Sort/Offset (Sort/Group) and press [Change #]. 

3 Under Sort, select [Off] ([Sort:Off]) or [On] ([Sort:on]). 

4 Under Offset, select [Off] or [On] ([1 set] or [Output each page]). 


screen. 

Selecting Auto Rotation 

Set auto rotation in default settings mode. The setting items are as follows. 

Item 

No Rotate 

Rotate 

Description 

Do not enable auto rotation. 

Enable auto rotation. 

For further details about auto rotation, refer to page 1-41. 


2 Press [] or [] to select Auto Rotation and press [Change #]. 

3 Select [Rotate] or [No Rotate]. 

7-9

System Menu 


screen. 

Setting Margin Defaults 

Set margin the width default values. The setting ranges are as follows. 

Model Type 

Inch models 

Metric models 

Range 

0 - 3/4" (1/8" increments) 


For further details about margin mode, refer to page 1-17. 


2 Press [] or [] to select Default margin width and press [Change #]. 

3 Press [], [], [] or [] to set the margin width. 


screen. 

Erasing Borders 

Set the border erase default values. The setting ranges are as follows. 

Model Type 

Inch models 

Metric models 

Range 

0 - 2" (1/8" increments) 


For further details about border erase, refer to page 1-19. 


2 Press [] or [] to select Default erase width and press [Change #]. 

3 Press [+] or [–] to set the Border (outer edges) and Center (Centre) (middle) border widths. 


screen. 

Selecting Maximum Number of Copies 

Limits the number of sets that can be specified for a single copy. Set to between 1 - 999 sets. 


2 Press [] or [] to select Preset limit and press [Change #]. 

3 Use the numeric keys to specify the preset limit value. 


screen. 

7-10

System Menu 

Enabling Repeat Copy 

Disable repeat copy or configure repeat copy in default settings mode. The setting items are as 

follows. 

Item 

Description 

Function Off Prevents the use of repeat copy. 

On 

Allows the use of repeat copy. 

Default Off Do not enable repeat copy. 

On 

Enable repeat copy. 

For further details about repeat copy, refer to page 1-36. 

NOTE: This setting is not displayed when the optional security kit is installed. 


2 Press [] or [] to select Repeat Copy and press [Change #]. 

3 Under Function, select [Off] or [On]. 

4 Under Default, select [Off] or [On]. 


screen. 

Showing the Register Key 

Sets whether to show or hide [Shortcut] ([Register]) used to register/delete register keys. For further 

details about register keys, refer to page 1-57. 


2 Press [] or [] to select Display register key (Display “Register” key) and press [Change #]. 



screen. 

Customize (Basic Screen) 

Rearrange the basic screen layout for maximum ease of use. You can rearrange 3 [Basic] screen 

functions and 3 [User choice] screen functions. 


2 Press [] or [] to select Customize (Basic Screen) (Customize (Main function)) and press 

[Change #]. 

7-11

System Menu 

3 The current functions are shown in 

Registered Mode. 

Customize(Basic Screen) 

Back 

Press [] or [] to select the function to 

rearrange. Press [Move Ahead] or [Move 

Behind] ([Move Backward]) to change 

the Register Mode order. 

Basic 

User choice 

Register Mode 

Exposure Mode 

Reduce/Enlarge 

Staple 

1/2 sided 

Orig. Quality 

Sort/Offset 

Move 

Ahead 

Move 

Behind 

The number in Register Mode 

corresponds to the display position 

number (left side of the screen). 

System Menu 

- Copy Default 


screen. 

Customize (User Choice) 

Rearrange the screen to easily access frequently used functions. You can change 6 frequently used 

features on the [User choice] screen. 


2 Press [] or [] to select Customize (User Choice) (Customize (Add function)) and press [Change 

#]. 

3 Current functions are shown in Register 

Mode and Addition Mode shows 

available functions that can be 

substituted for the current functions. 

Under Addition Mode, press [] or [] 

to select the function to change. Under 

Register Mode, press [] or [] to 

select the function that is to be added 

and press [] to move the function. 

er Choice) 

- Copy Default 

Register Mode 

Margin 

Border Erase 

Combine 

Page # 

Booklet 

Cover 

The number in Register Mode corresponds to the display position number (left side of the screen). 


screen. 

Back 

Close 

Addition Mode 

Off 

Select Paper 

Original size 

Combine 


Margin 

7-12

System Menu 

Machine Default 

The following items can be set for machine default. 

• Enabling Auto Cassette Switching...7-14 

• Specifying the Paper Size...7-14 

• Specifying the Paper Type...7-15 

• Registering MP Tray Paper Size...7-15 

• Enabling Quick Access to MP Tray Settings...7-16 

• Setting Paper Type Properties (Paper Weight)...7-17 

• Setting Paper Type Properties (Duplex Mode)...7-18 

• Setting Handling for Special Paper Types...7-19 

• Auto Detect Originals...7-20 

• Orientation of Original Document...7-20 

• Setting Sleep Timer Timeout...7-21 

• Setting Low-Power Timer Timeout...7-21 

• Setting Auto Clear Timeout Time...7-21 

• Selecting Output Destination...7-22 

• Selecting FAX Output Mode...7-22 

• Select the Main Mode...7-23 

• Setting Notification Sounds...7-23 

• Silent Mode...7-24 

• Adjusting Date/Time...7-24 

• Setting Time Difference...7-24 

• Changing Management Code...7-25 

• Activating Auto Sleep...7-26 

• Activating Auto Clear...7-26 

• High Density Print...7-27 

• Prioritizing Copying Over Printing...7-27 

• Erasing Hard Disk Contents...7-27 

• Setting Hard Disk Encryption Key...7-28 

Accessing the Machine Default Screen 

Follow the steps as below to access the Machine Default screen. 


2 Press [Machine Default]. 


System Menu 

Copy 

Default 

Language 

Job 

Accounting 

Scanner 

Default 

Printer 

Default 

MP tray 

Setting 

BOX 

Management 

Machine 

Default 

Document 

Management 

Register 

Orig. Size 

Print 

Report 

7-13

System Menu 



If the correct management code has been entered, the Machine Default screen will be displayed. 






Enabling Auto Cassette Switching 

Use auto cassette switching to automatically switch the paper source to another cassette loaded 

with the same size and orientation paper when the current cassette runs out of paper. You can also 

switch to a cassette with a different paper type. 


Item 

Description 

Function Off Do not enable auto cassette switching. 

On 

Enable auto cassette switching. 

Paper Type All types of paper Automatically switches a cassette even with different 

paper type if the paper is the same size and direction. 

Feed same paper type Do not switch to a cassette with different paper type. 

1 Referring to Accessing the Machine Default Screen on page 7-13, access the Machine Default 

screen. 

2 Press [] or [] to select Auto cassette switching and press [Change #]. 

3 Under Function, select [Off] or [On]. 

4 Under Paper Type, select [All types of paper] or [Feed same paper type]. 

5 Press [Close] to save settings or [Back] to cancel settings. The display returns to the Machine 

Default screen. 

Specifying the Paper Size 

Specify the paper sizes for Cassettes 1 - 4. The setting items are as follows. 

Item 

Auto Detection 

Description 

The paper size is automatically detected. [Centimeter] ([Centimetre]) 

or [Inch] selection is required. 

Standard sizes Specify a standard size. The following paper sizes: 11 × 17", 

8 1/2 × 14", 11 × 8 1/2", 8 1/2 ×11", 51/2 ×81/2", 8 1/2 ×131/2", 8 1/2 × 13" 

(Oficio 2), A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16KR are 

available. 

NOTE: 3rd cassette and 4th cassette are shown when the optional paper feeder is installed. 

7-14

System Menu 


screen. 

2 Press [] or [] to select the cassette to configure from Paper size (1st cassette - 4th cassette) and 


3 Select [Auto Detection] or [Standard sizes]. 

If [Auto Detection] is selected, choose the unit type. 

If [Standard sizes] is selected, choose the paper type. 



Specifying the Paper Type 

Specify the paper type for Cassettes 1 - 4. 

The available paper types are Plain, Vellum, Rough, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color (Colour), 

Prepunched, Letterhead, High Quality, and Custom 1 - 8. 

NOTE: 3rd cassette and 4th cassette are shown when the optional paper feeder or 3000 sheet 

paper feeder have been installed. 

Paper types in Setting Paper Type Properties (Paper Weight) (See page 7-17) with weight 

(thickness) that cannot be inserted in the Cassette are not available. 


screen. 

2 Press [] or [] to select the cassette to specify paper type from Paper type (1st cassette - 4th 

cassette) and press [Change #]. 

3 Select the paper type. 



Registering MP Tray Paper Size 

Up to 4 custom paper sizes can be pre-registered for use with the MP tray. Registered sizes are 

shown as custom sizes when selecting paper size. The paper type can also be specified for each 

registered size. The setting items are as follows. 

Setting Detail 

Paper size 

Paper type 

Setting Item 

Inch models 

Height: 3 7/8 - 11 5/8" (1/8" increments) 

Width: 5 7/8 - 17" (1/8" increments) 

Metric models 

Height: 98 - 297 mm (1 mm increments) 

Width: 148 - 432 mm (1 mm increments) 

Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted, 

Bond, Cardstock, Color (Colour), Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick 

paper, Envelope, Coated, High Quality, Custom 1 - 8 


screen. 

2 Press [] or [] to select Store Paper Size for MPT and press [Change #]. 

7-15

System Menu 

3 Press [] or [] to select the number to register from Paper size (User reg. 1 - 4) and press 

[Change #]. 

4 Press [On] and press [+] or [–] to set the Height and Width. 

With the metric models, you may enter the size directly using the numeric keys by pressing 

[#-Keys]. 

To specify a paper type, press [Select Paper Type]. Select the paper type and press [Close]. 

5 Press [Close] to save settings or [Back] to cancel settings. 

6 Press [Close]. The display returns to the Machine Default screen. 

Enabling Quick Access to MP Tray Settings 

Set whether to show the MP tray Settings screen when the MP tray is selected from the [Basic] 

screen. The setting items are as follows. 

Item 

Off 

On 

Description 

Do not show MP tray Settings when MP tray is selected. 

Show MP tray Settings when MP tray is selected. 


screen. 

2 Press [] or [] to select Check MP tray sizing and press [Change #]. 




7-16

System Menu 

Setting Paper Type Properties (Paper Weight) 

Set the weight (paper thickness) for each type of paper. The weights that can be configured for 

paper type are as follows. 

Paper type to be placed in the Cassette. 

Paper Type 

Light 

(thin) 

Normal 1 Normal 2 Normal 3 Heavy 1 Heavy 2 Heavy 3 Extra 

Heavy 

Plain Y Y Y Y N N N N 

Preprinted Y Y Y Y N N N N 

Bond Y Y Y Y N N N N 

Recycled Y Y Y Y N N N N 

Vellum Y Y Y Y N N N N 

Rough Y Y Y Y N N N N 

Letterhead Y Y Y Y N N N N 

Color (Colour) Y Y Y Y N N N N 

Prepunched Y Y Y Y N N N N 

High Quality Y Y Y Y N N N N 

Custom 1 - 8 Y Y Y Y N N N N 

Y: Available. N: Not Available. 

Paper type to be placed in the MP tray. 

Paper Type 

Light 

(thin) 

Normal 1 Normal 2 Normal 3 Heavy 1 Heavy 2 Heavy 3 Extra 

Heavy 

Plain Y Y Y Y N N N N 

Transparency N N N N Y Y Y Y 

Preprinted Y Y Y Y N N N N 

Labels Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Bond Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N 

Recycled Y Y Y Y N N N N 

Vellum Y Y Y Y N N N N 

Rough Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N 

Letterhead Y Y Y Y N N N N 

Color (Colour) Y Y Y Y N N N N 

Prepunched Y Y Y Y N N N N 

Envelope N N N N Y Y Y Y 

Cardstock N N N N Y Y Y Y 

Coated Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Thick paper N N N N Y Y Y Y 

High Quality Y Y Y Y N N N N 

Custom 1 - 8 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Y: Available. N: Not Available. 

Set paper weight according to the following paper types and weights (g/m 2 ). 

• Light (Thin): 64 g/m 2 or less 

7-17

System Menu 

• Normal 1: From 60 g/m 2 to 75 g/m 2 or less 



• Heavy 1: From 106 g/m 2 to 135 g/m 2 or less 

• Heavy 2: From 136 g/m 2 to 170 g/m 2 or less 

• Heavy 3: 171 g/m 2 or more 

• Extra Heavy: OHP transparencies 

NOTE: When a paper type is configured for the cassette in Specifying the Paper Type (See 

page 7-15), the weight ([Extra heavy] and [Heavy 1-3]) cannot be selected for the cassette. 


screen. 

2 Press [] or [] to select Paper Type (paper weight) and press [Change #]. 

3 Press [] or [] to select the paper type to set the weight and press [Change #]. 

4 Select the weight. Press [Close] to save settings or [Back] to cancel settings. 


Setting Paper Type Properties (Duplex Mode) 

Specify whether to allow duplex printing for each of custom paper types 1 - 8. The setting items are 

as follows. 

Item 

Off 

On 

Description 

Do not use duplex mode. 

Use duplex mode. 


screen. 

2 Press [] or [] to select Select paper type (2 sided) and press [Change #]. 

3 Press [] or [] to select the paper type to adjust from Custom 1 - Custom 8 and press [Change #]. 

4 Select [Off] or [On]. Press [Close] to save settings or [Back] to cancel settings. 


7-18

System Menu 

Setting Handling for Special Paper Types 

When printing on prepunched, preprinted, or letterhead paper, depending on the original placement 

method or combination of copier functions, the hole positions may not align or images may be 

printed upside-down. Use this setting to change the direction of the finished output. The setting 


Item 

Adj. Print Direction 

Speed Priority 

Description 

Print with aligned finish direction. 

Releases the [Adj. Print Direction] setting. 

When [Adj. Print Direction] is enabled, load paper according to the following method. 

Example: Copying on letterhead paper 

Original 

Paper 

Finished 

Cassette 

MP tray 

Original 

Paper 

Finished 

Cassette 

MP tray 

NOTE: When loading paper into the cassette and MP tray, place the surface to be printed facing up. 

When [Adj. Print Direction] is enabled, the printing speed decreases slightly. 


screen. 

2 Press [] or [] to select Special paper action mode (Specif. paper action mode) and press 

[Change #]. 

3 Select [Adj. Print Direction] or [Speed Priority]. 



7-19

System Menu 

Auto Detect Originals 

Specify the paper size to select when an original with a similar size is automatically detected. The 


Item 

Description 

Cardstock/A6 

Select whether to detect the size as Postcard or A6R. 

B4/Folio 

Select whether to detect the size as B4 or Folio. 

11 × 15" Select whether to automatically detect as 11 × 15". 

NOTE: This setting is displayed only for metric models. 


screen. 

2 Press [] or [] to select Org. Auto Detect Setting and press [Change #]. 

3 Press [] or [] to select the paper size to specify and press [Change #]. 

4 For Cardstock/A6, select [Cardstock] or [A6]. 

For B4/Folio, select [B4] or [Folio]. 

For 11 × 15", select [On] or [Off]. 



Orientation of Original Document 

Set the original orientation in default settings mode. The setting items are as follows. 

Item 


Left Top Edge (Left top 

corner) 

Description 

Sets the top edge as the original’s upper edge. 

Sets the left edge as the original’s upper edge. 

For further details about original orientation, refer to page 1-7. 


screen. 

2 Press [] or [] to select Orig. Set Direction and press [Change #]. 

3 Select [Top Edge] ([Back Edge]) or [Left Top Edge] ([Left top corner]). 



7-20

System Menu 

Setting Sleep Timer Timeout 

Set the time until Auto Sleep mode is activated when [On] is selected in Activating Auto Sleep on 

page 7-26. Specify a value from 1 - 240 minutes (1 minute increments). For further details on Auto 

Sleep mode, refer to Sleep Mode in Chapter 3 of Operation Guide. 

NOTE: If the device is used frequently, it is recommended to set Auto Sleep mode to a larger time 

delay, and to a shorter time delay if the periods of non-use are longer. 


screen. 

2 Press [] or [] to select Sleep mode changing time and press [Change #]. 

3 Press [+] or [–] to set the time until Auto Sleep mode is activated. 



Setting Low-Power Timer Timeout 

Set the time until Auto Low-Power mode is activated. Specify a value from 1 - 240 minutes (1 minute 

increments). For further details on Auto Low-Power mode, refer to Low-Power Mode in Chapter 3 of 

Operation Guide. 


screen. 

2 Press [] or [] to select Low power mode chng. time and press [Change #]. 

3 Press [+] or [–] to set the time until Auto Low-Power mode is activated. 



Setting Auto Clear Timeout Time 

Set the time until Auto Clear is activated after the last operation when [On] is selected in Activating 

Auto Clear on page 7-26. Specify a value from 10 - 270 minutes (10 minute increments). 


screen. 

2 Press [] or [] to select Auto Clear Time Setting and press [Change #]. 

3 Press [+] or [–] to set the time until Auto Clear is activated. 



7-21

System Menu 


Set the default copy output destination. 

Paper Output 

Top tray 

Job separator 

Finisher tray 

Tray A 

Tray B 

Tray C 

Tray 1 - 7 

Description 








NOTE: This setting is displayed when the optional job separator, document finisher or 3000 sheet 

document finisher is installed. 


screen. 

2 Press [] or [] to select Select Copy output mode and press [Change #]. 




Selecting FAX Output Mode 

Set the default output destination for printing originals or reports received by fax. 

Paper Output 

Top tray 

Job separator 

Finisher tray 

Tray B 

Tray 1 - 7 

Description 






NOTE: This setting is displayed when the fax kit and optional job separator, document finisher or 

3000 sheet document finisher is installed. 


screen. 

2 Press [] or [] to select Select FAX output mode and press [Change #]. 




7-22

System Menu 

Select the Main Mode 

Specify the screen to be first shown after power-on. The setting items are as follows. 

Item 

Copy Mode 

FAX Mode 

Description 

Copy mode is set as the first screen to be shown after the power is 

switched on (the screen shown when the Copier key is pressed). 

Fax mode is set as the first screen to be shown the power is switched 

on (the screen shown when the Fax key is pressed). 

NOTE: This setting is displayed when the optional fax kit is installed. 


screen. 

2 Press [] or [] to select Select the main mode (Select main mode) and press [Change #]. 

3 Select [Copy Mode] or [Fax Mode]. 



Setting Notification Sounds 

Set the notification sounds made by the machine during operation. The setting items are as follows. 

Item 

Touch tone notification 

Finish notification 

Ready notification 

Attention notification 

Description 

The beep sound made when a key on the operation panel or touch 

panel is pressed. 

The sound made when a copy or print operation finishes without error. 

The sound made when warm-up is complete. 

The sound made when an error has occurred. 

Set each item to [On] to enable sound notification. Set each item to [Off] to disable sound 

notification. 


screen. 

2 Press [] or [] to select Notify (Touch tone), Notify (Finish), Notify (Ready) or Notify (Attention) 





7-23

System Menu 

Silent Mode 

Configures the machine to operate more quietly. To decrease the operating noise level, set Silent 

Mode to [On]. The setting items are as follows. 

Item 

Off 

On 

Description 

Do not enable Silent Mode. 

Enable Silent Mode and reduce the operating noise level. 


screen. 

2 Press [] or [] to select Silent Mode and press [Change #]. 




Adjusting Date/Time 

Set the current date and time. 

IMPORTANT: Before setting the date and time, perform the following Setting Time Difference. 


screen. 

2 Press [] or [] to select Date/Time and press [Change #]. 

3 Press [+] or [–] to set each of Year, Month, Day, and Time. To enable daylight savings time, set 

Summertime to [On]. 



Setting Time Difference 

Set the time difference. 

IMPORTANT: Set the time difference before Adjusting Date/Time. 


screen. 

2 Press [] or [] to select Time difference and press [Change #]. 

3 Press [+] or [–] to set the time difference. 



7-24

System Menu 

Changing Management Code 

Change the machine’s management code. 

IMPORTANT: Be sure to record the management code when changing it. If forgotten, contact your 

Service Representative. 

NOTE: The default setting is 2500 for the 25/20 ppm model and 3200 for the 32/25 and 32/32 ppm 

models. 

Change the management code to a value between 0000 - 9999. Always set to 4 digits. 



Change the management code to a value between 00000000 - 99999999. Always set to 8 digits. 

It is recommended to not set the management code to an easily guessed number such as 11111111 

or 12345678. 

The following settings require the management code to be entered. 

- Default Settings for Copying 

- Machine Default 

- Scanner Default Settings 

- Auto Gray Adjust 

- Color Registration 

- Developer Refresh 

- Printing Reports 

- Setting Document Management Defaults 

- Hard Disk Management 

- Job Accounting 


screen. 

2 Press [] or [] to select Management code change (Change MGMT code with #) and press 

[Change #]. 

3 Use the numeric keys to enter the new management code. 



7-25

System Menu 

Activating Auto Sleep 

In Auto Sleep mode, the machine automatically switches to Sleep mode if left idle for a preset 

period. Enable/disable the use of Auto Sleep mode here. For further details on Sleep mode, refer to 

Sleep Mode in Chapter 3 of Operation Guide. The setting items are as follows. 

Item 

Off 

On 

Description 

Do not use Auto Sleep mode. 

Use Auto Sleep mode. 

NOTE: If Auto Sleep mode interferes with normal operation, set to disable Auto Sleep mode. Before 

disabling Auto Sleep mode, it is first recommended to try extending the time until Auto Sleep mode 

is activated (sleep mode change time). 


screen. 

2 Press [] or [] to select Auto sleep and press [Change #]. 




Activating Auto Clear 

Auto Clear automatically releases various specified setting and returns to default settings mode 

after a specified period of time since the last device operation. Enable/disable the use of Auto Clear 

here. The setting items are as follows. 

Item 

Off 

On 

Description 

Do not use Auto Clear. 

Use Auto Clear. 


screen. 

2 Press [] or [] to select Auto Clear and press [Change #]. 




7-26

System Menu 

High Density Print 

Set priority between printing speed and image quality when continuously printing high density 

originals. The setting items are as follows. 

Item 

Fast Mode 

Quality Mode 

High Qual. Mode 

Description 

Printing speed is given priority. 

Image quality is given priority. This setting reduces the printing speed. 

Image quality is given priority. Use this setting when copying high 

density originals such as photographs. This setting reduces the 

printing speed more than Quality Mode. 


screen. 

2 Press [] or [] to select High Density Print and press [Change #]. 

3 Select [Fast Mode], [Quality Mode] or [High Qual. Mode]. 



Prioritizing Copying Over Printing 

Prioritize copy jobs over printer jobs in the job output queue. The setting items are as follows. 

Item 

Off 

On 

Description 

Do not prioritize copy jobs in the job output queue. 

Prioritize copy jobs in the job output queue and print them before 

printer jobs. 


screen. 

2 Press [] or [] to select Copy Job Priority and press [Change #]. 




Erasing Hard Disk Contents 

When the optional security kit is installed, select the hard disk overwrite method from [Once 

Overwrite] or [3-time Overwrite]. For further details about the hard disk overwrite method, refer to 

the optional security kit Operation Guide. 

NOTE: This setting is available when optional security kit is installed. 


screen. 

2 Press [] or [] to select Hard Disk Overwrite and press [Change #]. 

3 Select [3-time Overwrite] or [Once Overwrite]. 



7-27

System Menu 

Setting Hard Disk Encryption Key 

When the optional security kit is installed, you can specify an encryption key. For further details 

about encryption key, refer to the optional security kit Operation Guide. 

NOTE: This setting is available when optional security kit is installed. 

1 Referring to Accessing the Machine Default Screen on page 7-13, open the Machine Default 

screen. 

2 Press [] or [] to select HDD Encryption Key and press [Change #]. 

3 Press [Change #] for Encryption Key. 

4 Enter a 16 character encryption key and press [End]. 

Refer to Character Input Method on page 7-47 for how to enter text characters. 

5 To confirm the entry, press [Change #] under Confirm Encryption Key, enter the same key again, 

and press [End]. 


7 Press [Yes]. The hard disk data is overwritten and the specified encryption key is enabled. The 

display returns to the Machine Default screen. 

7-28

System Menu 

Setting MP Tray 

Set the paper size and paper type to match paper loaded in the MP tray. 

Specifying the Paper Size to the MP Tray 

The MP tray paper size setting method and available paper sizes are as follows. 

Setting method Unit Paper size 

Auto Detect Inch 11 × 17", 8 1/2 × 14", 11 × 8 1/2", 8 1/2 ×11", 51/2 ×81/2" 

Centimeter A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, B6R, A6R 

Other Standard Sizes ISO B5, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4, Comm. #10, 

Comm. #9, Comm. #6-3/4, Monarch, Executive, OUFUKU 

HAGAKI (return postcard), YOUKEI 2, YOUKEI 4, 8 1/2 ×131/2", 

8 1/2 × 13" (Oficio 2), 8K, 16K, 16KR 

Input Size 

Inch models 



Metric models 



Custom Size Pre-assigned paper size 1-4 

Assignable paper sizes 

Inch models 



Metric models 



NOTE: For further details on MP tray size setting, refer to Specifying the Paper Size to the MP Tray 

in Chapter 2 of Operation Guide. 

Specifying the Paper Type to the MP Tray 

The following paper types can be specified for the MP tray. 

Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color 

(Colour), Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick paper, Envelope, Coated, High Quality, Custom 1 - 8 

NOTE: For further details about MP tray paper type setting, refer to Specifying the Paper Type to 

the MP Tray in Chapter 2 of Operation Guide. 

7-29

System Menu 

Registering Non-standard Sizes for Originals 

Pre-register 4 types of non-standard original sizes. Registered sizes are shown as custom sizes 

when selecting the original size. 

The size range that can be registered is as follows. 

Model Type 

Inch models 

Metric models 

Range 

Height: 2 - 11 5/8" (1/8" increments) 

Width: 2 - 17" (1/8" increments) 




2 Press [Register Orig. Size]. 


System Menu 

Copy 

Default 

Language 

Job 

Accounting 

Scanner 

Default 

Printer 

Default 

MP tray 

Setting 

BOX 

Management 

Machine 

Default 

Document 

Management 

Register 

Orig. Size 

Print 

Report 

3 Select the number to register from Original Size (custom 1 - 4) and press [Change #]. 

4 Press [Set]. 

5 Press [+] or [–] to set the Y (height) and X (width) sizes. 


7 Press [Close]. The display is returned to the System Menu screen. 

7-30

System Menu 

User Adjustment 

Color Calibration 

Adjust color and image quality related settings. The following items can be set for user adjustment. 

• Color Calibration...page 7-31 

• Auto Gray Adjust...page 7-31 

• Color Registration...page 7-33 

• Drum Refresh...page 7-36 

• Developer Refresh...page 7-36 

After prolonged use, or from the effects of surrounding temperature or humidity, the hue of printed 

color output may shift or color drift may occur. Using this function enables printing in the most 

appropriate color by adjusting hue and color drift in detail. Use auto gray adjust when the color is not 

enhanced even after performing color calibration (see page 7-31). If the hue and color are not 

enhanced, use color registration (see page 7-33). 


2 Press [User Adjustment]. 

3 Press [Color Calibrat.] ([Colour 

Calibrat.]) . 


User adjustment 

Auto gray 

adjust 

Drum 

refresh 

Color 

Calibrat. 

Color 

Regist. 

Developer 

refresh 

System Menu 

Auto Gray Adjust 

4 Press [On]. Color calibration begins. Wait approximately 45 seconds. 

5 Press [Close] after color calibration is complete. 


After prolonged use, or from the effects of surrounding temperature or humidity, the hue of printed 

color output may shift or color drift may occur. Use this function to correct color settings when the 

color of a finished copy does not match the original. Perform color calibration before using auto gray 

adjust (see page 7-31). Use auto gray adjust when the color is not enhanced even after performing 

color calibration. 

NOTE: To perform auto gray adjust, verify that either 11 × 8 1/2" or A4 paper is loaded into a 

cassette. 


7-31

System Menu 


m Menu / Counter 

End 

Language 

Job 

Accounting 

Printer 

Default 

MP tray 

Setting 

BOX 

Management 

Check the 

counter 

Document 

Management 

Register 

Orig. Size 

Print 

Report 

User 

Adjustment 

3 Press [Auto gray adjust] ([Auto Grey 

Adjust]). 



Auto gray 

adjust 

Drum 

refresh 

Color 

Calibrat. 

Color 

Regist. 

Developer 

refresh 

System Menu 



If the correct code has been entered, the Auto gray adjust (Auto Grey Adjust) screen will be 

displayed. 





5 Press [On]. A color pattern is printed. Check that one Magenta color box appears at the top right of 

the color pattern. 

6 As shown in the illustration, place the printed side 

down on the platen with the three black boxes aligned 

to the top. 

7 Press the Start key. The color pattern is read and adjustment begins. 

8 The second color pattern is output. Confirm that two magenta boxes appear at the top right of the 

color pattern and repeat Steps 6 and 7. 

The display returns to the Auto gray adjust (Auto Grey Adjust) screen. 

IMPORTANT: The number of magenta boxes at the top right of the color pattern represents the 

color pattern number. Do not mistake the first and second color patterns. 



7-32

System Menu 

Color Registration 

When first installing the machine or moving it to a new location, color drift during printing may occur. 

Use this function to correct the color position of each of cyan, magenta and yellow to resolve color 

drift. 

Normal registration and detailed settings are available for Color Registration. Color drift can be 

largely corrected through normal registration. However, if it is not resolved or to perform more 

detailed settings, use the detailed settings. 

NOTE: To perform color registration, verify that either 11 × 8 1/2" or A4 paper is loaded into a 

cassette. 

Normal Registration 

Follow the steps below to correct normal color drift. 



3 Press [Color Regist.] ([Colour Regist.]). 


nt 

Close 

Drum 

refresh 

Color 

Calibrat. 

Color 

Regist. 

Developer 

refresh 



If the correct code has been entered, the Color Regist screen will be displayed. 





7-33

System Menu 

5 Press [PRT Chart]. A chart is printed. 

On the chart, for each of M (magenta), C (cyan) and Y (yellow), 3 chart types are printed: H-F (left), 

V (right), H-R (horizontal). 

Chart Example 

6 Find the location on each chart where 2 lines most 

closely overlap each other. If this is the 0 position, 

registration for that color is not required. For the 

illustration, B is the appropriate value. 

7 Press [Input Reg. value]. 

8 Press [+] or [–] to enter the values for 

H-F, V, and H-R from the chart for M 

(magenta). 

Color Registration(M) 

Refer to the printed chart, and enter each value from 

where the black and colored lines seem straight. 

Press [+] to increase the value from 0 to 

9. To decrease, press [-]. 

MH-F 

B MV 0 MH-R 0 

By pressing [-], the value changes from 

0 to alphabetic letters, going from A to I. 

To move in the reverse direction, press 

[+]. 

System Menu - User adjustment 

9 Press [Next] to continue entering the values for C (cyan) and Y (yellow). For each color, as in Step 

8, enter the value read from the chart. 

Press [Back] to return to the previous screen and reenter the values. 

7-34

System Menu 

10 Press [Completed.] after all values have been entered. Color registration begins. 

11 Press [Close] after color registration is complete. 


Detailed Settings 

Follow the steps below to perform more detailed correction. 

1 Refer to Steps 1-4 of Normal Registration to display the Color Registration screen. 


3 Press [PrintChart (Details)]. A chart is printed. 

On the chart, for each of M (magenta), C (cyan) and Y (yellow), charts for H-1 to 7 (upper) and V-1 

to 5 (lower) are printed. 

Chart Example 

4 Find the location on each chart where 2 lines most 

closely match. If this is the 0 position, registration for 

that color is not required. For the illustration, B is the 

appropriate value. 

From the V-1 to 5 chart, read only the value for V-3 (the 

middle value). 

5 Press [InputValue (Details)]. 

7-35

System Menu 

6 Press [+] or [–] to enter the value for H-1 

from the chart for each of M (magenta), 

C (cyan) and Y (yellow). 

PrintPosAdjust (Details) 

Refer to the printed chart, and enter each value from 

where the black and colored lines seem straight. 

Press [+] to increase the value from 0 to 

9. To decrease, press [-]. 

MH-1 

B CH-1 0 YH-1 0 

By pressing [-], the value changes from 

0 to alphabetic letters, going from A to I. 

To move in the reverse direction, press 

[+]. 

System Menu - User adjustment 

Drum Refresh 

7 Press [Next] to continue entering the values for H-2 to H-7, and V-3. For each color, as in Step 6, 

enter the value read from the chart. 

Press [Back] to return to the previous screen and reenter the values. 

8 Press [Completed.] after all values have been entered. Color registration begins. 

9 Press [Close] after color registration is complete. 

10 Press [Close]. The System Menu screen is displayed. 

Refresh the drum when printed images are blurred or white spots appear on the image. 



3 Press [Drum refresh]. 



Auto gray 

adjust 

Drum 

refresh 

Color 

Calibrat. 

Color 

Regist. 

Developer 

refresh 

System Menu 

Developer Refresh 

4 Press [On]. Drum refresh begins. Wait approximately 100 seconds. 

5 Press [Close] after drum refresh is complete. 


When the printing is too light or incomplete, even though there is enough toner, refresh the 

developer. 



7-36

System Menu 

3 Press [Developer refresh]. 


nt 

Close 

Drum 

refresh 

Color 

Calibrat. 

Color 

Regist. 

Developer 

refresh 



If the correct code has been entered, the Developer refresh screen will be displayed. 





5 Press [On]. Developer refresh begins. Wait approximately 140 seconds. 

NOTE: Waiting time may be longer when the toner is refilled during developer refresh. 

6 Press [Close] after developer refresh is complete. 


7-37

System Menu 

Setting Document Management Defaults 

Set the Shared Data Box and Synergy Print Box to be used by the document management function. 

The following settings may be specified here. 

• Print Document List...7-39 

• Resetting a Document Box...7-40 

• Setting Box Names and Box Passwords...7-40 

• Deleting All Documents in Box...7-41 

• Specifying Period to Store Documents...7-41 

Accessing the Document management screen 

Access the document management default settings from the Document management screen. 

Follow the steps below to access the Document management screen. 


2 Press [Document Management]. 


System Menu 

Copy 

Default 

Language 

Job 

Accounting 

Scanner 

Default 

Printer 

Default 

MP tray 

Setting 

BOX 

Management 

Machine 

Default 

Document 

Management 

Register 

Orig. Size 

Print 

Report 



If the correct code has been entered, the Document management screen will be displayed. 






7-38

System Menu 

Print Document List 

Print the Document list for the Shared Data Box and Synergy Print Box. 

Document List (Shared Data Box) 

Document List (Synergy Print Box) 

NOTE: Before list printing, verify that either 11 × 8 1/2" or A4 paper is loaded into a cassette. 

7-39

System Menu 

1 Referring to Accessing the Document management screen on page 7-38, access the Document 

management screen. 

2 From Shared Data Box or Synergy Print 

Box, press [Print the list] for the box for 

which you would like to print the list. 

Document management 

Document management 


Print 

the list 

Reset 

Box 

System Menu 


Print 

the list 

Reset 

Box 

Box 

Editing 

Document 

save term 

3 Printing of the list begins. When done printing, the display returns to the Document management 

screen. 

Resetting a Document Box 

Delete at once all documents stored in the Shared Data Box or Synergy Print Box. Verify documents 

before deleting. 



2 From Shared Data Box or Synergy Print Box, press [Reset Box] for the box you would like to reset. 


All documents in the box are deleted, and the display returns to the Document management screen. 

Setting Box Names and Box Passwords 

Set the box name and box password for each Synergy Print Box. When a box password is set, the 

password must be entered to print or delete documents stored in the Synergy Print Box. The setting 


Setting Item 

Box name 

Password 

Description 

Set the box name using 16 or less characters. 

Set the box password in 8 digits or less. 




3 Select the box to configure. Directly press the box key or use the numeric keys to input the box 

number and press [Enter]. 

4 Press [] or [] to select Box Name and press [Change #]. 

5 Enter the box name and press [End]. 


6 Press [] or [] to select Password and press [Change #]. 

7 Use the numeric keys to enter the password. Press [Close] to save settings or [Back] to cancel 

settings. 

NOTE: To skip setting a password, press [Clear] and press [Close], leaving the fields blank. 

7-40

System Menu 

8 Press [Close]. To set another box, repeat steps 3 - 8. 

9 Press [Cancel] ([Job cancel]). Document management is displayed. 

Deleting All Documents in Box 

Delete all documents in each Synergy Print Box. 




3 Select the box to delete all documents. Directly press the box key or use the numeric keys to input 

the box number and press [Enter]. 

4 Press [Reset Box]. 

5 Press [Yes]. All documents in the box are deleted. 


7 Press [Cancel] ([Job cancel]). Document management is displayed. 

Specifying Period to Store Documents 

Set to delete documents from a Synergy Print Box after storing them for a predefined period. The 


Setting 

Set save period 

No time limit 

Description 

Set the saving term to 1 - 7 days. Documents are automatically 

deleted at the end of the saving term. 

Documents remain saved in the Synergy Print Box until they are 

manually deleted. 



2 Press [Document save term] ([Document saving]) under Synergy Print Box. 

3 Select [Set save period] or [No time limit]. 

When [Set save period] is selected, press [+] or [–] to set the document save term. 

4 Press [Close] to save settings or [Back] to cancel settings. Document management is displayed. 

7-41

System Menu 

Hard Disk Management 

Verify available hard disk space and delete invalid data from the Hard Disk Management screen. 

Perform the following steps. 


2 Press [BOX Management] ([Hard Disk 

Management]). 


End 

Language 

Job 

Accounting 

Printer 

Default 

MP tray 

Setting 

BOX 

Management 

Check the 

counter 

Document 

Management 

Register 

Orig. Size 

Print 

Report 

User 

Adjustment 



If the correct code has been entered, the HDD management mode (HDD management) screen will 

be displayed. 





4 To verify available hard disk space or total capacity, press [On] below Check Hard Disk Capacity (on 

the left side of the screen). 

To delete invalid data, press [On] below Delete invalid data (on the right side of the screen). 

NOTE: When the optional security kit is installed, Format Hard Disk is displayed. For further details, 

refer to the optional security kit Operation Guide. 



7-42

System Menu 

Printing Reports 

You can print the following reports from the operation panel. 

Copy Status Report 

Machine Status Report 

7-43

System Menu 

Toner Coverage Report 

The toner coverage report includes for each paper size details about the number of sheets printed 

and black coverage ratio. You can print the following 4 report types. 

• Total toner coverage report 

• Copy toner coverage report 

• Printer toner coverage report 

• Fax toner coverage report 

The number of pages output according to details of the toner coverage report does not exactly 

match the number of guaranteed print pages for the toner container. The actual number of pages 

that can be printed may vary depending on the usage conditions (type of information being printed 

and frequency of isolated copying versus continuous copying) and installed environment 

(temperature and humidity). 

NOTE: Before printing reports, verify that either 11 × 8 1/2" or A4 paper is loaded into a cassette. 


2 Press [Print Report]. 


End 

Language 

Job 

Accounting 

Printer 

Default 

MP tray 

Setting 

BOX 

Management 

Check the 

counter 

Document 

Management 

Register 

Orig. Size 

Print 

Report 

User 

Adjustment 

7-44

System Menu 



If the correct management code has been entered, the Print Report Menu is displayed. 





4 Press the key for the report you would like to print. Report printing begins. 

NOTE: Select [Toner coverage] to print all 4 toner coverage reports at once. 


7-45

System Menu 

Checking Total Copy Count 

Check the total copy count from the operation panel. You can check the following values. 

• Number of copies for each color mode, number of prints, number of faxes, and total of all of 

these 

• Number of original pages scanned for copy mode, scanner mode, and fax send mode, and total 

of all of these 

You can also print this information as a counter report. 

Counter Report 

NOTE: Before printing reports, verify that either 11 × 8 1/2" or A4 paper is loaded into a cassette. 


2 Press [Check the counter]. 


End 

Language 

Job 

Accounting 

Printer 

Default 

MP tray 

Setting 

BOX 

Management 

Check the 

counter 

Document 

Management 

Register 

Orig. Size 

Print 

Report 

User 

Adjustment 

3 The counts are displayed on the touch panel. 

To print a counter report, press [Print Report]. 

To finish checking, press [Close]. The display is returned to the System Menu screen. 

7-46

System Menu 

Character Input Method 

Input Type A 

Characters may be input using one of the 2 input methods: Input Type A or Input Type B. The input 

method changes depending on the function being used. 

This input method is used in the following functions. 

• Programmed copying (page 1-55) 

• PDF encryption function (page 4-9) 

• Programmed scanning (page 4-20) 

• Setting hard disk encryption key (page 7-28) 

• Job accounting (page 8-1) 

• Entering user choice display names (see Operation Guide) 

• Entering shared address book edit display names, user names, passwords (see Operation 

Guide) 

Input Screen 

Inch models 

Keyboard 

1 

6 7 9 10 

Name to display 

Stop 

End 


AllDel. 

Del. prev 

8 

Capital 

Letter Num./Sym. Space 

2 3 4 5 

1 Character display: Displays the characters entered. 

2 [Capital]: Press this key to enter capital letters. 

3 [Letter]: Press this key to enter lowercase letters. 

4 [Num./Sym.]: Press this key to enter the numeric and symbols. 

5 [Space]: Press this key to enter a space. 

6 [AllDel.]: Press this key to delete all characters entered. 

7 [][]: Press these keys to move the cursor left and right. 

8 [Del. prev]: Press this key to delete the character to the left of the cursor. 

9 [Stop]: Press this key to return to the previous screen. 

10 [End]: Press this key to confirm the characters you entered. 

7-47

System Menu 

Capital keyboard 


Stop 

End 


AllDel. 

Del. prev 

Capital 


Numeral/Symbol keyboard 


Stop 

End 


AllDel. 

Del. prev 

Capital 


Metric Models 

Keyboard 

1 

7 8 10 11 


Stop 

End 

Char.Limit: 32 letters inc. # key 

AllDel. 

Del. prev 

9 

Capital 

Letter Symbol 1 Symbol 2 

Space 

2 3 4 5 

6 

1 Character display: Displays the characters entered. 

2 [Capital]: Press this key to enter capital letters. 

3 [Letter]: Press this key to enter lowercase letters. 

4 [Symbol 1]: Press this key to enter the numeric and symbols. 

5 [Symbol 2]: Press this key to enter other symbols. 


7 [AllDel.]: Press this key to delete all characters entered. 

8 [][]: Press these keys to move the cursor left and right. 

9 [Del. prev]: Press this key to delete the character to the left of the cursor. 

10 [Stop]: Press this key to return to the previous screen. 

11 [End]: Press this key to confirm the characters you entered. 

7-48

System Menu 

Capital keyboard 


Stop 

End 


AllDel. 

Del. prev 

Capital 


Space 

Symbol 1 keyboard 


Stop 

End 


AllDel. 

Del. prev 

Capital 


Space 

Symbol 2 keyboard 


Stop 

End 


AllDel. 

Del. prev 

Capital 


Space 

Entering Characters 

The following is an example of how to enter ‘Abcde’ using the keyboard. 

1 Press [Capital] and press [A] on the 

keyboard. 


A| 


AllDel. 

Stop 

Capital 


2 Press [Letter]. 


A| 


AllDel. 

Stop 

Capital 


7-49

System Menu 

3 Press [b], [c], [d] and [e] in order. 


Abcde| 


AllDel. 

Stop 

Capital 


4 When entering all characters are complete, press [End]. 

Input Type B 

This input method is used in the following functions. 

• Document management functions (page 2-1) 

• Configuring the scanner function (page 4-2) 

• Scanner basic settings (see Operation Guide) 

• User choice E-mail address, IP address input (see Operation Guide) 

• Common Address Book editing E-mail address input, IP address, hostname input (see 

Operation Guide) 

Input Screen 

1 

2 3 4 

Box name. 

Stop 


Back 

Del. 

5 

6 

Shift 

Space 

End 

7 

8 

1 Character display: Displays characters entered. 

2 [][]: Press these keys to move the cursor left or right. 

3 [Back]: Press this key to delete the character to the left of the cursor. 

4 [Stop]: Press this key to stop entering text and return to the previous screen. 

5 [Del.]: Press this key to delete all characters to the right of the cursor at once. 

6 [Shift]: Press this key to toggle between entry of capital letters and lowercase letters. 


8 [End]: Press this key to confirm your entry. The touch panel will return to the previous screen. 

NOTE: Use the numeric keys to enter numbers. 

7-50

System Menu 

Entering Characters 

The following is an example of how to enter ‘abcde’ using the keyboard. 

1 Press [Shift] to select lowercase letters. 

Box name. 


Shift 

Space 

2 Press [a], [b], [c], [d] and [e] in this order. 

The character display field will show 

abcde. 

Box name. 


Shift 

Space 

3 Press [End]. 

7-51

System Menu 

7-52

8 Job Accounting 

This chapter explains how to manage job accounting to share usage among various departments. 

• Overview of Job Accounting...8-2 

• Managing Accounts...8-4 

• Copy Count per Department...8-13 

• Activating and Deactivating Job Accounting...8-16 

• Job Accounting Default Settings...8-17 

• Using Job Accounting...8-22 

8-1

Job Accounting 

Overview of Job Accounting 

You can manage accounting the copy count incurred by individual departments by assigning a 

unique ID code to each department. 

Job accounting helps the following activities in business organizations. 

• Integrated management of copier/printer/scanner functions using the same department ID 

code. 

• Manageability of up to 1,000 individual departments. 

• Availability for department ID codes with as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999) for 

security. 

• Tracking the copy volume for each department and for all departments combined. 

• Management of full color and MonoColor copying. 

• Restricting the copy count per department in one-page increments up to 999,999 copies. 

• Resetting the copy counter for each department or for all departments combined. 

• Checking the total count for each department by entering the department ID code. 

IMPORTANT: To restrict the number of copies, printouts or scanned images using job accounting, 

you must switch Job Accounting to [On] as the default for Copy Job Accounting, Printer Job 

Accounting and Scanner Job Accounting. For further details, refer to Job Accounting Default 

Settings on page 8-17. 

Job accounting includes the following functions for managing printing counts. 

Setting Description Reference 

Page 

Management Edit New Account: adds a new department. Up to 1,000 

departments may be added. 

page 8-4 

Copy Count per 

Department 

Delete Account: Deletes the registered departments. 

Edit Department Information: Changes the name and ID 

code for the department. 

Restricting Usage: changes usage restrictions for each 

department. 

Total Copy Volume: For reading the total copy counts of 

all departments, printing job accounting reports and 

resetting the copy counter. 

Copy count by department: Takes totals for each 

department and clears counters. 

page 8-13 

Activating and Deactivating Set whether to use Job Accounting. page 8-16 


Job Accounting Default 

Settings 

Changes the defaults for Job Accounting. page 8-17 

8-2


Accessing the Job Accounting Screen 

Set up Job Accounting from the Job Accounting screen. Follow the steps below to access the Job 

Accounting screen. 


2 Press [Job Accounting]. 


System Menu 

Copy 

Default 

Language 

Job 

Accounting 

Scanner 

Default 

Printer 

Default 

MP tray 

Setting 

BOX 

Management 

Machine 

Default 

Document 

Management 

Register 

Orig. Size 

Print 

Report 



If the correct code has been entered, the Job Accounting screen will be displayed. 






8-3


Managing Accounts 

You can add and delete departments and define restrictions to copy count as needed. 

New Account 

Adds a new department. The following settings are required. 

Setting 

Department ID Code 


Limit in use 

Description 

Set for department ID codes up to 8 digits long (between 0 and 

99999999) for security. 

Set the department name using a maximum of 32 alphanumeric 

characters. 

Set usage limitation for each of the copier/printer/scanner functions. 

Refer to Restricting Usage on page 8-5 for setting procedure. 

1 Referring to Accessing the Job Accounting Screen on page 8-3, access the Job Accounting screen. 

2 Press [Management Edit]. 


Job Accountg T 

Register/Sett. 

Management Each Mgt. 

Management Job Accntg 

Total 

Total 

Edit 

Def. Set. 

System Menu 


Management Edit 

ID-Code 

11111111 

22222222 

-------- 

1st sales division 

2nd sales division 

ETC 

Up 

Order of 

indication 

Mgt. Inf. 

Correction 

Down 

Delete 

Register 

System Menu 

- Job 

4 Press [] or [] to select Account ID and press [Change #]. 

5 Use the numeric keys to enter the department ID code. 


7 Press [] or [] to select Name to Display and press [Change #]. 

8 Enter the department name and press [End]. 


9 When all entries are complete, press [Next]. 

IMPORTANT: An error will occur if you do not complete Account ID and Name to display, and you 

will not be able to proceed to the next screen. Be sure that you have completed the entries. 

An error will occur if you attempt to enter an existing department ID code. You will not be able to 

proceed to the next screen. Use a different ID code. 

8-4


Restricting Usage 

10 Specify restrictions on copying as desired. 

See Restricting Usage for how to set usage restrictions. 

11 Press [Registr.] to finalize settings. 

To make settings on another department, press [Register] and repeat steps 4 to 11. 

12 Press [Close]. The touch panel will return to the Job Accounting screen. 

Set usage restrictions to restrict copier/printer/scanner functions to specific departments or set page 

count limitations. 

For Copy/Printer Output Management under Job Accounting default settings, select [All] or [Each] to 

change the setting items for usage restriction. For further details, refer to Copy/Printer Output 

Management on page 8-19. 

When [All] is set under copier/printer output management (factory default) 

Manage copier and printer output count together. The items that may be configured are as follows. 

• Restricting Copying...8-5 

• Restricting Printing...8-6 

• Limitation (All)...8-6 

• Limitation (Full Color)...8-7 

• Restricting Transferring Scanned Image...8-7 

• Restricting FAX Usage...8-8 

When [Each] is set under copier/printer output management 

Manage copier and printer output count individually. The items that may be configured are as 

follows. 

• Restricting Copy Usage (Overall)...8-8 

• Restricting Copy Usage (Full-Color)...8-9 

• Restricting Printer Usage (All)...8-9 

• Restricting Printer Usage (Full Color)...8-10 

• Restricting Transferring Scanned Image...8-7 

• Restricting FAX Usage...8-8 

Restricting Copying 

Specify whether to allow copying. The setting items are as follows. 

Item 

Permitted 

Is not permitted (Is not 

permited) 

Description 

Allows copying. 

Prevents copying. 

NOTE: This item is not shown when Job Account default setting Copy Job Accounting (see 

page 8-17) is set to [Off]. 

1 Refer to steps 1 to 9 of New Account on page 8-4 on page to display the usage restriction screen. 

8-5


2 Press [] or [] to select Copy and press [Change #]. 

3 Select [Permitted] or [Is not permitted] ([Is not permited]). 

4 Press [Close] to save settings or [Back] to cancel settings. The touch panel will return to the usage 

restriction screen. 

Restricting Printing 

Specify whether to allow printing. The setting items are as follows. 

Item 

Permitted 


permited) 

Description 

Allows printing. 

Prevents printing. 

NOTE: This item is not shown when Job Account default setting Printer Job Accounting (see 



2 Press [] or [] to select Printer and press [Change #]. 

3 Select [Permitted] or [Is not permitted] ([Is not permited]). 



Limitation (All) 

Set to limit the total pages used for copier and printer. The setting items are as follows. 

Item 

No limit 

Counter limit 

Description 

Do not limit the number of pages used by the copier and printer 

functions. 

Limit the total number of pages used by the copier and printer 

functions to between 1-999,999 pages (1 page increments). 

NOTE: This setting is not displayed when both Restricting Copying (see page 8-5) and Restricting 

Printing are set to [Is not permitted] ([Is not permited]). 


2 Press [] or [] to select Limitation (All) and press [Change #]. 

3 Select [No limit] or [Counter limit]. 

When [Counter limit] is selected, use the numeric keys to enter the page limit. 



8-6


Limitation (Full Color) 

Set the usage total usage limit for full color copying and full color printing. The setting items are as 

follows. 

Item 

No limit 

Counter limit 


permited) 

Description 

Do not limit the page count for full color copying and full color printing. 

Limit the total number of pages used by the full color copier and full 

color printer functions to between 1-999,999 pages (1 page 

increments). 

Disable full color copying and full color printing. 

NOTE: This setting is not displayed when both Restricting Copying (see page 8-5) and Restricting 

Printing (see page 8-6) are set to [Is not permitted] ([Is not permited]). 

Even if the page count set in [Counter Limit] is not exceeded, when the count exceeds the value set 

in Limitation (All) (see page 8-6) the feature is disabled or a warning message is displayed. 


2 Press [] or [] to select Limitation (Full-Color ) (Limitation (Full-Colour)) and press [Change #]. 

3 Select [No limit], [Counter limit] or [Is not permitted] ([Is not permited]). 




Restricting Transferring Scanned Image 

Set limitations for scanner usage. The setting items are as follows. 

Item 

No limit 

Counter limit 


permited) 

Description 

Do not limit the number of pages read by the scanner. 

Limit the total number of pages read by the scanner to between 

1-999,999 pages (1 page increments). 

Disable scanner usage. 

NOTE: This item is not shown when Job Account default setting Scanner Job Accounting (see 



2 Press [] or [] to select Scanner transmission and press [Change #]. 





8-7


Restricting FAX Usage 

Set limitations for sending faxes when the optional fax kit has been installed. The setting items are 

as follows. 

Item 

Description 

No limit 

Do not limit the number of pages transmitted by fax 

Counter limit Limit the total number of pages sent by fax to between 1-999,999 

pages (1 page increments). 

Is not permitted (Is not Prevents fax transmission. 

permited) 


This item is not shown when Job Account default setting Fax Job Accounting (see page 8-20) is set 

to [Off]. 


2 Press [] or [] to select FAX TX and press [Change #]. 





Restricting Copy Usage (Overall) 

Set the number of sheets to copy. The setting items are as follows. 

Item 

Description 

No limit 

Do not limit the number of pages copied 

Counter limit Limit the total number of pages copied to between 1-999,999 pages (1 

page increments). 

Is not permitted (Is not Prevents copying. 

permited) 

NOTE: This item is not shown when Job Account default setting Copy Job Accounting (see 



2 Press [] or [] to select Copy (Overall) and press [Change #]. 





8-8


Restricting Copy Usage (Full-Color) 

Set the number of sheets to copy for full-color. The setting items are as follows. 

Item 

No limit 

Counter limit 


permited) 

Description 

Do not limit the number of pages copied for full color. 

Limit the total number of pages copied for full color to between 


Prevents full color copying. 

NOTE: This item is not shown when Job Account default setting Restricting Copy Usage (Overall) 

(see page 8-8) is set to [Off]. 

This item is not shown when Job Account default setting Copy Job Accounting (see page 8-17) is 

set to [Off]. 


2 Press [] or [] to select Copy (Full-Co.) and press [Change #]. 





Restricting Printer Usage (All) 

Set printer usage restrictions. The setting items are as follows. 

Item 

Description 

No limit 

Do not limit the number of pages printed. 

Counter limit Limit the total number of pages printed to between 1-999,999 pages (1 

page increments). 

Is not permitted (Is not Prevents printing. 

permited) 

NOTE: This item is not shown when Job Account default setting Printer Job Accounting (see 



2 Press [] or [] to select Printer (All) and press [Change #]. 





8-9


Restricting Printer Usage (Full Color) 

Set the number of sheets to print for full-color. The setting items are as follows. 

Item 

No limit 

Counter limit 


permited) 

Description 

Do not limit the number of pages printed for full color. 

Limit the total number of pages printed for full color to between 


Prevents full color printing. 

NOTE: This item is not shown when Job Account default setting Restricting Printer Usage (All) (see 

page 8-9) is set to [Is not permitted] ([Is not permited]). 

This item is not shown when Job Account default setting Printer Job Accounting (see page 8-17) is 

set to [Off]. 

Deleting Accounts 


2 Press [] or [] to select Printer (Full. Col.) and press [Change #]. 





You can delete the department accounts registered. 



3 Select the department ID code to delete 

and press [Delete]. 

NOTE: You can change the 

department display order. Press [Order 

of indication] and select from [Sort by 

Code] ([19] and [91]) and [Sort by 

Name] ([AZ] and [ZA]). 


ID-Code 

11111111 

22222222 

-------- 



ETC 

Up 

Down 

Order of 

indication 

Mgt. Inf. 

Correction 

Delete 

Register 

System Menu 

- Job 

4 Check the ID code to delete and press [Yes]. 

NOTE: To delete other ID codes, repeat steps 3 and 4. 


8-10


Editing Department Information 

Changes the name and ID code registered for the department. 



3 Select the department ID code to modify 

and press [Mgt. Inf. Correction]. 







ID-Code 

11111111 

22222222 

-------- 



ETC 

Up 

Down 

Order of 

indication 

Mgt. Inf. 

Correction 

Delete 

Register 

System Menu 

- Job 

4 Press [] or [] to select Account ID 


Department inform. edit 

Back 

Setting Item 

Value 

Account ID 

11111111. 

Name to display 1st sales division 

Change # 

System Menu 

- Job Accounting - Management Edit 

5 Press [Clear] to blank the current entry. Use the numeric keys to enter the new ID code (up to eight 

digits). Press [Close]. 

6 To change the department name, press [] or [] to select Name to display and press [Change #]. 

7 Press [AllDel.] to clear the old department name. Enter the new department name and press [End]. 



9 Press [Close] to save settings or [Back] to cancel settings. The touch panel will return to the Job 

Accounting screen. 

Changing Restrictions on Usage 

You can change the restriction on usage per individual department. 

IMPORTANT: To restrict the number of copies, printouts or scanned images using Job Accounting, 

you must switch Job Accounting to [On] as the default for Copy Job Accounting, Printer Job 

Accounting and Scanner Job Accounting. For further details, refer to Job Accounting Default 

Settings on page 8-17. 



8-11


3 Select the department ID code to modify 

and press [Limit in use]. 






dit 

11 

22 



ETC 

Up 

Down 

Order of 

indication 

Mgt. Inf. 

Correction 

Delete 

Register 

Close 

Limit 

in use 

- Job 

4 Select the usage restriction as desired. See Restricting Usage on page 8-5 for how to set 

restrictions on usage. 



8-12


Copy Count per Department 

Management Total 

You can read the overall usage count or the usage per individual department. You can also clear the 

usage count for a period of time and begin again counting usage. 

Calculate the total usage count for all departments. You can print the total in the form of Job 

Accounting reports. The total usage count can be reset as necessary. 

NOTE: Before printing the Job Accounting report, verify that either 11 × 8 1/2" or A4 paper is loaded 

into a cassette. 


2 Press [Management Total]. 

3 The total usage count is displayed for 

your reference. 

Press [Print Report] and choose the 

report type to print this information as a 

management report. 

Press [Report by Function] to count a list 

of reports by function. 


Press [Report by Size] in Total Count by 

Size, 1-5 (see page 8-21) of the Job 

Accounting default settings for a list of reports by paper size. 

otal 

te: 

or: 

lor: 

al: 

es: 

Copy 

Printer 

Fax 

Total 

.1,234 .5,678 ------- .6,912 

.0 ------- ------- 

.0 

.1,234 .5,678 ------- .6,912 

.2,468 .11,356 ------- .13,824 

Fax Tx. 

scanner 

Fax 

.1,234 Trsm. # pages: 

------- 

Commun.Time: --- Hrs -- Mins 

Close 

Counter 

clear 

Print 

Report 

Sample: Job Accounting Reports 

By function: copying and printing managed together ([All] is selected) 

8-13


By function: copying and printing managed separately ([Each] is selected) 

By paper size 

NOTE: Change the type of form to be printed from the Job Accounting default settings in 

Copy/Printer Output Management(see page 8-19). 

4 To reset the usage count, press [Counter clear]. 



Copy Count per Department 

Tracks the copy count per individual department. The copy count per department can be reset as 

necessary. 


2 Press [Each Mgt. Total]. 

8-14


3 Select the ID-code of the department 

and press [Total]. 

ent Total 

11 

22 

33 



3rd sales division 

ETC 

Up 

Order of 

indication 

Total 

Close 

Down 

- Job 

NOTE: In the list, ---ETC indicates the number of printouts delivered without entering an ID-code. 

The printouts include the following documents: 

- Various reports 

- Reports for printing errors 

- Printouts from computers of which the department ID-codes are not specified (if Printing from 

Unregistered Sources (Printer) is enabled in the job accounting default settings) 

You can change the department display order. Press [Order of indication] and select from [Sort by 

Code] ([19] and [91]) and [Sort by Name] ([AZ] and [ZA]). 

4 The usage count for the selected 

department is displayed for your 

reference. 

NOTE: The copy limitation per 

department is given in parentheses 

after the current volume, as in 1,234 

(999,999). 

Each Management Total 

Number print. 

Copy 

Printer 

Total 

Black & White: 

.1,234 .5,678 .6,912 

Monocolor: 

.0 ------- .0 

Full-color: 

.1,000 .234 .1,234(999,999) 

Total: 

.2,234 .5,912 .8,146 

Scan. Transm. 

Fax Tx. 

scanner 

Fax 

Scan # pages: 

.1,234 Trsm. # pages: 

------- 

Commun.Time: --- Hrs -- Mins 

System Menu 


Nu 

is l 

11111111 1st sales divisio 

5 To reset the usage count, press [Counter clear]. 




8-15


Activating and Deactivating Job Accounting 

Turn job accounting on or off as necessary. The setting items are as follows. 

Setting 

Off 

On 

Description 

Job accounting is deactivated. 

Job accounting is activated. 



g 

Close 


Job Accountg 

Each Mgt. 

Total 

Management 

Edit 

Job Accntg 

Def. Set. 

Off 

On 


4 Press [End]. 

When you select [On], the screen for the department ID-code entry is displayed. 

When you select [Off], the screen [Basic] screen is displayed. 

8-16


Job Accounting Default Settings 

Changes the defaults for Job Accounting. 

The following items can be configured for Job Accounting default settings. 

• Copy Job Accounting...8-17 

• Printer Job Accounting...8-17 

• Printer Error Report...8-18 

• Printing from Unregistered Sources (Printer)...8-18 

• Copy/Printer Output Management...8-19 

• Scanner Job Accounting...8-19 

• Fax Job Accounting...8-20 

• Response to Unauthorized Requests...8-20 

• Default Counter Limit Value...8-20 

• Total Count by Size, 1-5...8-21 

Copy Job Accounting 

Activate or deactivate Job Accounting for copy jobs. The setting items are as follows. 

Setting 

Off 

On 

Description 

Copy Job Accounting is deactivated. 

Copy Job Accounting is activated. 


2 Press [Job Accntg Def. Set.]. 


Job Accountg T 


Management Each Mgt. 

Management Job Accntg 

Total 

Total 

Edit 

Def. Set. 

System Menu 

3 Press [] or [] to select Copy Job Accounting and press [Change #]. 


Printer Job Accounting 



Activate or deactivate Job Accounting when the device is used as a printer. The setting items are as 

follows. 

Setting 

Off 

On 

Description 

Printer Job Accounting is deactivated. 

Printer Job Accounting is activated. 


8-17


Printer Error Report 


3 Press [] or [] to select Print. Job Accounting and press [Change #]. 




When you use Job Accounting to manage printing, you can specify whether an error report is 

printed in case that the user attempts to print using the incorrect department code. 

When the user attempts to print using the incorrect department ID code, Account ID mismatch will 

be displayed and the job will not be printed. Press [Cancel] to print the error report. 


Setting 

Off 

On 

Description 

Do not print error report when there is an account ID mismatch. 

Print error report even if there is an account ID mismatch. 

NOTE: This item is not shown when Printer Job Accounting (see page 8-17) is set to [Off]. 



3 Press [] or [] to select Printer error report and press [Change #]. 




Printing from Unregistered Sources (Printer) 

If you use Job Accounting to manage printing, you can authorize or prohibit printing from computers 

with printer drivers that do not support Job Accounting. The setting items are as follows. 

Setting 

Off 

On 

Description 

Users cannot print unless their printer driver supports Job Accounting. 

Users can print from computers with printer drivers that do not support 

Job Accounting. 

NOTE: This item is not shown when Printer Job Accounting (see page 8-17) is set to [Off]. 



3 Press [] or [] to select Other Mgt. reg. (print) and press [Change #]. 


8-18




Copy/Printer Output Management 

You can choose whether copying and printing are managed together or separately. The setting 


Setting 

All 

Each 

Description 

Manage copier and printer output count together. 

Manage copier and printer output count individually. 

NOTE: Changing this setting affects which setting items are available in the usage restriction 

screen. For further details, refer to Restricting Usage on page 8-5. 



3 Press [] or [] to select Copy/Printer output mgt and press [Change #]. 

4 Select [All] or [Each]. 

Scanner Job Accounting 



Activate or deactivate Job Accounting when the device is used for scanning. The setting items are 

as follows. 

Setting 

Off 

On 

Description 

Scanner Job Accounting is deactivated. 

Scanner Job Accounting is activated. 



3 Press [] or [] to select Scanner Job Accounting and press [Change #]. 




8-19


Fax Job Accounting 

Activate or deactivate job accounting when the optional fax function is used. The setting items are 

as follows. 

Setting 

Off 

On 

Description 

Fax Job Accounting is deactivated. 

Fax Job Accounting is activated. 




3 Press [] or [] to select Fax Job Accounting and press [Change #]. 




Response to Unauthorized Requests 

Specify the actions when users attempt to copy in excess of the specified copy limitation. The 


Setting 

Stop job immediately 

Stop after job done 

Only warning 

Restriction 

Restricts usage and stops output immediately once the maximum 

usage has been exceeded. 

Continues output or scanning of the current job and restricts usage 

from the next job. 

Only a warning message is displayed. 



3 Press [] or [] to select Excess of Limit Setting and press [Change #]. 

4 Press [Stop job immediately], [Stop after job done] or [Only warning]. 



Default Counter Limit Value 

Specify the default of usage limitation when registering a new department. Specify between 

1-999,999 sheets in 1 sheet increments. 



3 Press [] or [] to select Def. Val. of coun. Limit and press [Change #]. 

8-20


Total Count by Size, 1-5 

4 Use the numeric keys to enter the counter limit default value. 



You can register specific paper sizes to monitor so that you can check the copy count. You can also 

register types of paper. 

NOTE: Up to five different paper sizes can be registered for keeping track of the copy count. 

If you do not specify the paper type, the registered paper size will be counted regardless of the type. 

However, if you register a size without specifying the type as the first entry and register the same 

size with a type as the second entry, the usage count for the first entry will not include the count of 

the second entry. 



3 Press [] or [] to select the number to configure from Total size 1-5 and press [Change #]. 

4 Press [On]. 

Total size 1 

Can set totals of paper size and type. 

Paper Size 

Back 

Paper Type 

Off 

11×17" 

Select 

size 

With no 

Specif. 

On 

System Menu 

- Job Accounting - Jpb A ccounting Def set. 

5 Press [Select Size]. 

6 Select a paper size and press [Close]. 

7 To specify a paper type, press [Select Paper Type]. 

8 Select the paper type and press [Close]. 



NOTE: You can include the registered copy count of the paper when printing reports on copy count 

per department. For further details, refer to Management Total on page 8-13. 

8-21


Using Job Accounting 

Copying 

When Job Accounting is activated, users must enter their department ID-code on the numeric keys 

to perform copying. 

IMPORTANT: After copying, be sure to press the Job Accounting key to display the initial screen 

so that the next user is prompted to enter the department ID-code. 

1 Use the numeric keys to enter the 

department ID code and press [Enter]. 

[Basic] screen is displayed. 

D. 

Each Mgt. 

Total 

Clear 

Enter 

NOTE: If you enter the code incorrectly, press [Clear] to reenter the correct code. 

Entering an invalid department ID-code will trigger an error alarm. Use the numeric keys to enter the 

correct code. 

You can review the department’s copy count by pressing [Each Mgt. Total] after entering your 

department ID-code. 

2 Complete the copy job as usual. 

3 After finishing copying, Press the Job Accounting key. The screen for the department ID-code 

entry is displayed. 

Printing 

When Job Accounting is enabled, users must enter the department ID code from the computer to 

print using the device. For further details, refer to the Extended Driver User Guide. 

Scanning 

When Job Accounting is activated, users must enter their department ID-code on the numeric keys 

to perform scanning. 

NOTE: An department ID code is not required to check [History of Sending] ([Report of sent data]). 

An department ID code must be entered when using TWAIN from a computer. For further details, 

refer to Job Accounting Setting on page 6-47. 


2 Select the function to use from [Send E-Mail], [Scan to PC], [Scan to FTP] or [Database 

Connection]. 

8-22


3 The department ID entry screen is 

displayed. Use the numeric keys to enter 

the department ID and press [Enter]. 

The screen for the each function is 

displayed. 

D. 

Each Mgt. 

Total 

Clear 

Enter 

NOTE: If you enter the code incorrectly, press [Clear] to reenter the correct code. 

Entering an invalid department ID-code will trigger an error alarm. Use the numeric keys to enter the 

correct code. 

You can review the department’s copy count by pressing [Each Mgt. Total] after entering your 

department ID-code. 

4 Complete the scan job as usual. 

5 After finishing scanning, the touch panel will return to the screen in step 1. The department ID code 

must be reentered for the next scan operation. 

8-23


8-24

9 Troubleshooting 

This chapter explains how to solve problems when they occur. 

• Solving Malfunctions...9-2 

• Responding to Error Messages...9-6 

9-1

Troubleshooting 

Solving Malfunctions 

The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving. 

If a problem occurs with your machine, check the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on 

the following pages. If the problem persists, contact your Service Representative. 

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference 

Page 

The operation panel does Is the machine plugged in Plug the power cord into an AC outlet. — 

not respond when the 

machine is switched on 

( | position). 

Pressing the Start key Is a message displayed on the touch 

does not produce copies. panel 

The original size is not 

detected properly. 

Are the originals loaded correctly 

Is the machine installed beneath 

fluorescent lights 

Determine the appropriate response to 

the message and take action 

accordingly. 

When placing originals on the platen, 

place them face-down and align them 

with the original size indicator plates. 

Place originals face-up in the optional 


Do not install this machine beneath 

fluorescent lights. 

Blank sheets are output. Are the originals loaded correctly When placing originals on the platen, 

place them face-down and align them 

with the original size indicator plates. 



Place originals face-up in the optional 




page 9-6 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 

— 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 

— 

9-2



Page 

Printing is too light. Is Auto Exposure mode set Set the correct exposure level for auto 

exposure. 

Is Manual Exposure mode set 

Is the toner distributed evenly within the 

toner container 

Use the exposure adjustment key to set 

the correct exposure level. 

page 7-8 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 3 

When changing the default exposure page 7-8 

level, adjust the exposure manually and 

choose the desired level. 

Shake the toner container up and down 

approximately 10 times. 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 5 

Is EcoPrint is enabled Set EcoPrint to [Off]. page 1-43 

Is there a message indicating the 

addition of toner 

Is the copy paper damp 

Replace the toner container. 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 5 

Replace the copy paper with new paper. Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 

Printing is too dark. Is Auto Exposure mode set Set the correct exposure level for auto 

exposure. 

Copies have a moire 

pattern (dots grouped 

together in patterns and 

not aligned uniformly). 

Color of original and copy 

not the same. 

Copies are not clear. 

Is Manual Exposure mode set 

Use the exposure adjustment key to set 

the correct exposure level. 

page 7-8 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 3 

When changing the default exposure page 7-8 

level, adjust the exposure manually and 

choose the desired level. 

Is the original a printed photograph Set the image quality to [Print]. Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 3 

Are image adjust settings appropriate Perform color balance adjustment. page 1-49 

Perform automatic gray adjustment. page 7-31 

Did you choose appropriate image 

quality for the original 

Select an appropriate Image Quality 

mode. 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 3 



Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 

Is special color copy paper being used Use special color copy paper. — 

Copies are dirty. Are the original platen or platen dirty Clean the original platen or platen glass. Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 5 

9-3



Page 

Printer output is fuzzy. 

Is the printer in a high humidity 

environment 


Perform a drum refresh. page 7-36 


Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 


Printing is skewed. Are the originals loaded correctly When placing originals on the platen, 

place them face-down and flush against 

the original size indicator plates. 

Paper jams frequently 

occur. 

Copies from the optional 

document processor 

have black lines. 

Is the paper loaded correctly 

When placing originals in the document 

processor, align the original width 

guides securely before placing the 

originals. 

Check the position of the paper width 

guides. 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 

Is the paper loaded correctly Load the paper correctly. Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 

Is the paper of the supported type Is it 

in good condition 

Remove the paper, turn it over, and 

reload it. 

Is the paper curled, folded, or wrinkled Replace the paper with new paper. 

Are any loose scraps of paper or is 

there any jammed paper inside the 

device 


Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 

Remove any jammed paper. 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 6 


Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 


Is the slit glass dirty Clean the slit glass. Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 5 

Follow the procedure for correcting 

black lines. This may remove the black 

lines. 

page 7-5 

9-4



Page 

Printing is wrinkled. Is the separator dirty Clean the separator. Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 5 



Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 


Is the paper set in a proper orientation Change the orientation in which the — 

paper is positioned. 

Image portion of originals 

is too light when 

continuous printing 

originals with 

photographs or other 

images. 

High exposure printer setting value. 

From the high exposure printer setting, 

select [Image Quality Priority] or [Image 

Quality Highest Priority]. 

page 7-27 

Unable to print. Is the machine plugged in Plug the power cord into an AC outlet. — 

Is the machine switched on 

Turn the main power switch to on 

— 

( | position). 

Is the printer cable connected Confirm the printer cable is securely 

connected. 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 

Characters are not 

printed correctly. 

Was the printer switched off when 

connecting the printer cable 

Is the device in Offline mode 

Is the printer cable connected 

Are the computer settings configured 

correctly 

Print output is not correct. Are the computer settings configured 

correctly 

Switch on the printer after connecting 

the printer cable. 

Press the Printer key and press [GO] to 

restore Online mode. 

Confirm the printer cable is securely 

connected. 

Confirm printer driver and application 

software settings. 

Confirm printer driver and application 

software settings. 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 

— 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 

— 

— 

9-5


Responding to Error Messages 

Copy Error Messages 

If the touch panel displays any of these messages, follow the corresponding procedure. 

If the Copy mode touch panel displays any of these messages, follow the corresponding procedure. 

Display Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference 

Page 

Close ### cover. Is the indicated cover open Close all covers securely. — 

Check the cover. 

Are any covers open 

Close all covers securely. — 

Close Document processor. 

Close Document processor 

cover. 

Set cassette #. 

(Close paper cassette #.) 

Open cassette #, check and 

remove paper from inside of the 

machine. 

(Open cassette #, check and 

remove paper from inside of 

machine.) 

Reset feeding unit for paper 

cassette. 

Add paper in cassette #. 

(Add paper cassette #.) 

Add paper in the Multipurpose 

tray. 

## size 

(Place paper on the 

Multipurpose tray. 

## size) 

Add paper in the Multipurpose 

tray. 

(Add paper on the Multipurpose 

tray.) 

Place transparency in the 

Multipurpose tray. 

(Place transparencies on the 

Multipurpose tray.) 

Does the message indicate which 

cover is open 

Is the optional document processor 

open while loading the original 

Is the optional document processor's 

document processor cover open 

Is the indicated cassette not fully 

closed 

Is the paper feed unit securely 

pushed into the machine 

Is the indicated cassette out of 

paper 

Close the document processor. — 

Close the document processor 

cover. 

Pull out the cassette and push in 

securely. 

— Completely pull out the indicated 

cassette and remove any paper 

inside. 

Is paper of the specified size loaded 

in the MP tray 

Has all the paper on the MP tray 

been fed 

Are any transparencies loaded in the 

MP tray 

Pull out the paper feed unit and 

securely push it all the way into the 

machine. 

Load paper. If the same type of 

paper is loaded in another cassette 

in the same orientation, you can 

press either one of paper selection 

keys on the left of the touch panel to 

switch to that cassette for copying. 

Load paper of the size indicated in 

the MP tray. 

Load paper in the MP tray. 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 

— 

— 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 6 

— 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 

Place transparencies on the MP tray. Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 

9-6



Page 

Change the size of MP tray. 

Is the specified size paper loaded in 

the MP tray 

Reconfigure the size of the MP tray. Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 

Check paper size. Is the specified size paper loaded Load paper of a size that can be 

used. 

Reposition original. 

Check paper size. Copy paper is 

not the same size as original. 

(Paper size in cassette differs 

from actual size. 

Check paper size in cassette.) 

Check original size. 

Original size: 11 × 17", 8 1/2 × 11" 

(Check original size. 

Original size: A3, A4R) 

Change original destination. 

Original size: 8 1/2 × 11" 

(Change original destination. 

Original size: A4R) 

Reposition original or change 

cassette. 

(Reset original or select another 

paper cassette.) 

Is the orientation of the specified 

paper different from that of the 

original 

Is the specified paper loaded Or 

are the settings incorrect 

Change the orientation of the 

original. If you press the Start key 

without doing so, the original will be 

copied at the current size. 

Load the specified paper. Adjust any 

settings that are incorrect. 

Is Poster enabled 11 × 17", 8 1/2 × 11", A3, A4R - 

Original other than the above sizes 

has been loaded. Poster feature is 

available for 11 × 17", 8 1/2 ×11", A3, 

or A4R size originals only. 

page 1-22 

Is Poster enabled 

Is the orientation of the specified 

paper different from that of the 

original 



Poster is not available for the 

currently placed original orientation. 

11 × 8 1/2", A4 - For originals of 

above sizes, set in horizontal 

direction. 

Change the orientation of the 

original. 



Reset originals in processor. — Remove originals from the optional 

document processor, stack them 

uniformly and reset them. 

Reset all originals in processor. 

(Reset originals in processor.) 

Reset all originals in Document 

Processor. 

(Reset originals in Document 

Processor.) 

Cannot copy this paper type. 

Cannot staple this paper type. 

Cannot punch this paper type. 

Cannot offset this paper size. 

(Cannot group this paper size.) 

Are there any originals left in the 

optional document processor 

— 

— 

— 

page 1-22 

— 

— 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 

— Remove originals from the optional Refer to 

document processor, and reset them Operation 

in the original order. 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 

Can the specified copy functions be 

used with the selected paper type 

Did you select a paper type that 

cannot be stapled 

Did you select a paper type that 

cannot be punched 

Is a paper size not supported by 

Offset mode (11 × 17", 8 1/2 × 14", 

5 1/2 ×81/2", A3, B4, A5R, B6R, 

Folio, 8K) loaded 

Remove all originals in the optional 


— 

Select another type of paper. — 



Change the paper size. page 1-9 

9-7



Page 

Cannot staple this size. 

(Cannot staple this paper size.) 

Cannot punch this size. 

(Cannot punch this paper size.) 

Cannot staple. 

## :maximum capacity (Staple) 

(Cannot staple. 

## :Max. staples) 

The top tray is full of paper. 

Remove paper, and press "Start" 

key. 

The top tray is full of paper. 

Remove paper, and press 

"Continue" key. 

Finisher paper capacity 

exceeded. (Tray #) 

Remove paper, and press "Start" 

key. 

Finisher paper capacity 

exceeded. (Tray #) 

Remove paper, and press 

"Continue" key. 

Remove paper. Finisher tray. 

These functions cannot be 

combined. 

Exceeds pre registered copying 

quantity. 

(Copy limit for this ID-code has 

been reached.) 

Unable to copy. (Full-Color) 

Job Accounting capacity has 

limit. 

(Cannot copy. (Full Col.) 

Job Accounting capacity has 

limit.) 

Unable to copy. (Full-Color) 

Exceeded the limitation of Job 

Accounting. 

(Cannot copy. (Full Col.) 

Exceeded the limitation of Job 

Accounting.) 

Is stapling available for the size of 

the loaded paper For further 

details, see the optional document 

finisher or 3000 sheet document 

finisher Operation Guide. 

Is punching available for the size of 

the loaded paper For further 

details, refer to the optional 3000 

sheet document finisher Operation 

Guide. 

Is the maximum page quantity for 

stapling exceeded For further 

details, see the optional document 


finisher Operation Guide. 

During copying, is the maximum 

capacity of the output tray 

exceeded 

During printing, is the maximum 

capacity of the output tray 

exceeded 

During copying, is the maximum 

capacity of the optional document 


finisher output tray exceeded 

During printing, is the maximum 

capacity of the optional document 


finisher output tray exceeded 

Is the maximum capacity of the 

optional document finisher output 

tray exceeded 

Have you selected functions that 

cannot be used together 

Is the maximum limit for copying as 

specified in Job Accounting mode 

exceeded 

Is full color copy set to [Is not 

permitted] ([Is not permited]) in Job 

Accounting 



exceeded 

Change the paper size. — 

Change the paper size. — 

Decrease the number of sheets to 

be stapled to less than the maximum 

staple sheet count. 

Remove some pages from the 

output tray and press the Start key. 

Printing continues. 


output tray and press [Continue]. 

Printing continues. 


optional document finisher or 3000 

sheet document finisher and press 

the Start key. Printing continues. 

Remove some pages from the 3000 

sheet document finisher and press 

[Continue]. Printing continues. 


optional document finisher. 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

Check the settings. — 

The copy volume has been reached 

the set limit of your department. No 

additional copying is possible. Clear 

the copy count in Job Accounting. 

Change the restriction setting for full 

color copy in Job Accounting. 

Clear the copy count in Job 

Accounting. 

page 8-13 

page 8-5 

page 8-13 

9-8



Page 

Paper capacity is over the limit, 

unable to copy. 

Change preset of color or B&W 

selection. 

(Paper capacity is over the limit, 

unable to copy. 

Change preset of colour or B&W 

selection.) 

Insert key counter. 

Does the number of copies set for 

Color/B&W selection exceed the 

maximum limit set in Job 

Accounting 

Is the key counter inserted 

correctly 

Set so the total of color and B&W 

copies does not exceed the 

maximum limit for copying as 

specified in Job Accounting. 

Insert the key counter securely and 

completely. 

Memory full. — The current copy cannot be 

processed because there is no more 

copy memory free space, or the 

number of original pages exceeded 

the maximum 999 pages. When the 

following message is displayed 

select the resolution method. 

Memory full. 

Delete the registered data in the 

box. 

(Memory full. 

Delete the registered data from 

box.) 

Toner will be empty soon. [C], 

[M], [Y], [K] 

[Cancel]: Cancels copying. 

[Continue]: Copies up to the last 

scanned page. 

page 1-53 

— The data box for document 

management functions has been 

reached the permissible capacity. 

When assigning new originals to the 

boxes, delete unnecessary data. 

page 2-2 

— The toner container will need to be 

replaced soon. Prepare the 

replacement toner container for the 

indicated color. 


Add toner. [C], [M], [Y], [K] 

— Remaining toner is low, so only one 

page may be printed at a time. 

Prepare the replacement toner 

container. 

Add toner. [C], [M], [Y], [K] — Replace the toner container for the 

indicated color. 

Image cycle. 

(Now adding toner.) 

Please wait. 

Now in the fusing temperature 

adjustment process 

Check waste toner box. 

Is the waste toner box securely 

fastened 

— Toner replenishment is in progress. 

Wait until the process is completed. 

— Performing internal maintenance. 

Wait until the process is completed. 

— 

— 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 5 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 5 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 5 

Securely fasten the waste toner box. Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 5 

Replace the waste toner box. — Replace the waste toner box. Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 5 

— 

— 

9-9



Page 

Clean the slit glass for original 

fed from DP. 

(Clean the slit glass for original 

fed.) 

Check the waste punch box. 

(Check Punch Hole box.) 

Empty waste punch box. 

Out of staples. 

Add staples. 

(Stapler empty. 

Add staples.) 

— Rub the slit glass with the included 

dry cleaning cloth. 

Is the optional 3000 sheet document 

finisher waste punch box securely 

fastened 

Is the container for hole punch waste 

paper in the optional 3000 sheet 

document finisher full 

Is the optional document finisher or 

3000 sheet document finisher out of 

staples 

Refer to the optional 3000 sheet 

document finisher Operation Guide 

to securely fasten the waste punch 

box. 



to empty the waste punch box. 

Refer to the optional document 


finisher Operation Guide to refill 

staples. 

Time for maintenance. — Periodic maintenance is required to 

maintain the equipment in good 

condition. Contact your Service 

Representative or Authorized 

Service Center promptly. 

Paper misfeed. — If a paper jam occurs, the location of 

the jam will be indicated on the 

touch panel and the machine will 

stop. Leaving the main power 

switched on (| position) follow the 

instructions to remove the jammed 

paper. 

Remove paper from inner tray of 

Finisher. 

Remove paper from the folding 

unit of the Finisher. 

Staple jam. 

System error. 

Call service. 

Paper cassette is out of order. 

Select another paper cassette. 

(Paper cassette is out of order. 

Select other paper cassette.) 

System error. 

Main Power Switch Off / On. 

Is there any paper left in the optional 

document finisher or 3000 sheet 

document finisher 

Is there any paper left in the folding 

unit of the optional 3000 sheet 

document finisher 


3000 sheet document finisher 

experiencing a staple jam 

Is it re-displayed after opening and 

closing the front cover, turning off 

and on the main power switch, and 

plugging out and plugging in the 

power plug in the power outlet 

Remove all paper left in the optional 

document finisher or 3000 sheet 

document finisher. 



to remove all paper left in the 

ejection section of the folding unit. 



finisher Operation Guide to remove 

the jammed staple. 

Make a note of this message (C 

followed by a number). Switch off 

the power (◦ position), unplug the 

power cord, and contact your 

Service Representative or 

Authorized Service Center. 

— The cassette in use has a problem 

and is temporarily unavailable. 

Contact your Service Representative 

or Authorized Service Center 

promptly. To continue copying, use 

another cassette. 

— A system error has occurred. Turn 

the main power switch off and on 

again. 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 5 

— 

— 

— 

— 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 6 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

9-10



Page 

HDD error. 

Cannot activate Job Accounting 

mode. 

Please wait. 

Remote edit. 

(Please wait. 

Remote editing.) 

Security key is not recognized. 

Printer Error Messages 






Is Job account editing being done 

from a network connected 

computer 






A hard disk error has occurred. 


or Authorized Service Center. 

Copying is not possible until editing 

is complete. 



If the Printer mode touch panel displays any of these messages after pressing the Printer key, 

follow the corresponding procedure. 


Page 

Load Paper. 

### size (###) 

Use alternative 

Press GO. 

Does the print data match the feed 

paper size and paper type 

Replace the size or type of source 

paper. 

To change the paper source, select 

paper source from the touch panel 

and press [GO]. 

To print on the loaded paper, press 

the Printer key and press [GO]. 

To cancel printing, press the Printer 

key and press [Cancel]. 

— Displayed when paper source is 

changed. Press [GO]. 

Set paper Press GO. — This mode supplies paper one sheet 

at a time even if multiple sheets 

have been loaded. To feed each 

sheet, press [GO]. 

— 

— 

— 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 

Load Paper. Is the paper source empty Load more paper. Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 

Out of staples. 

Add staples. 

(Stapler empty. 

Add staples.) 


3000 sheet document finisher out of 

staples 



finisher Operation Guide to refill 

staples. 

Call service. — An internal error has occurred. 



Account ID mismatch. — No matching ID-code found. Verify 

the registered ID-code using the 

driver. 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

9-11



Page 

Exceeded print quantity limit. 

Error has occurred. Change to 

printer screen and check. 

RAM disk error Press GO. 

Code: ## 

Memory Card error Press GO. 

Code: ## 

HARD DISK error Press GO. 

Code: ## 



exceeded 

To perform printing, reconfigure Job 

Accounting for the machine. 

— Shown when a printer error has 

occurred when other modes are 

currently being displayed. Press the 

Printer key to switch to the printer 

screen and display the specific error 

message. 

— (For further details, refer to RAM 

Disk Error on page 9-14.) 

— (For further details, refer to Memory 

Card Errors on page 9-14.) 

— (For further details, refer to Hard 

Disk Errors on page 9-14.) 

KPDL error Press GO. — Unable to continue processing 

current print job. From the printer 

menu, open KPDL Error Print and 

select [On] to print an error report. 

Memory card error Insert again. 

Was the memory card 

(CompactFlash) removed during 

printer configuration 

Press [GO] to print data up to the 

point of error. If resume time has 

been configured for Auto Continue, 

printing resumes automatically after 

the set time has elapsed. 

Insert the memory card. When 

inserting the memory card, turn off 

the main power switch. 

Insert the same Memory card. — Memory card (CompactFlash) could 

not be recognized when reading 

data from the memory card. 

Re-insert the memory card. When 

inserting the memory card, turn off 

the main power switch. 

page 8-4 

— 

page 9-14 

page 9-14 

page 9-14 

page 3-11 

page 3-27 

page 3-27 

Format error Memory card. — The inserted memory card page 3-27 

(CompactFlash) requires formatting. 

Format the memory card. 

Option interface error 

Code: ## 

Is the installed option interface slot 

incorrect 

Switch the main power switch to off 

(◦ position) and install in the correct 

slot. 

File not found Press GO. — A file error has occurred. Press 

[GO]. 

Read Fonts: Failed — Unable to read font data. Try the font 

data read operation again. 

Read macro: Failed — Unable to read macro data. Try the 

macro data read operation again. 

Warning Low memory. — Memory is low. Print the status page 

to confirm the current printer 

memory capacity. Delete 

unnecessary font or macro data. 

— 

— 

page 3-29 

page 3-29 

— 

9-12



Page 

Warning image adapt. — Printing not possible at currently set 

resolution due to insufficient 

memory. Add memory to the printer 

or change the print resolution. 

Print overrun Press GO. — Overrun has occurred due to 

insufficient memory. 

Press the Printer key to switch to 

printer mode. 

Press [GO] to continue printing. 


If resume time has been configured 

for Auto Continue, printing resumes 

automatically after the set time has 

elapsed. After displaying this 

message, Page Protect mode is 

automatically set to [On]. 

Memory overflow Press GO. — The current print job cannot be 

processed due to insufficient free 

memory. 

Press the Printer key to switch to 

printer mode. 

Press [GO] to continue printing. The 

remaining pages will be printed up to 

the final processed data. 


If RAM Disk is enabled, decrease 

the RAM disk size. Additional printer 

memory is recommended if this error 

frequently occurs. For additional 

printer memory, contact your Service 

Representative or Authorized 

Service Center. If resume time has 

been configured for Auto Continue, 

printing resumes automatically after 

the set time has elapsed. 

Virtual mailbox full. — Insufficient virtual mailbox space. 

Print the data stored in the virtual 

mailbox. 

— 

— 

— 

page 3-37 

Interface occupied. 

Is the selected interface currently in Try the operation again later. — 

use 

Opt. ROM error Press GO. — An option ROM read error has 

occurred. Press the Printer key and 

press [GO]. The error is cleared. 

— 

Format error Hard Disk. — Format the Hard Disk. page 3-33 

Check the waste punch box. 

(Check Punch Hole box.) 

Is the optional 3000 sheet document Refer to the optional 3000 sheet 

box. 

finisher waste punch box securely document finisher Operation Guide 

fastened 

to securely fasten the waste punch 

— 

9-13


Memory Device Error Messages 

RAM Disk Error 

If RAM disk error Press GO is displayed, verify the error code (numeric) and refer to the following 

table. 

Code Detail Contents 

01 Format error. Cycle the system power. 

02 Ram disk mode is set to [Off]. Set RAM Disk mode to [On]. 

03 A write error has occurred. Write protect is enabled. Disable write protect. 

04 Insufficient RAM disk space to complete this operation. Move or delete data stored in the 

RAM disk to increase available space. 

05 File not found. Check whether the specified file name exists in the RAM disk. 

06 Insufficient system memory. Install more memory. 

98 Unable to read data during sort operation. The saved job data is corrupt. 

Memory Card Errors 

If Memory Card error Press GO is displayed, verify the error code (numeric) and refer to the 

following table. 


01 Format error. Format the memory card again. 

02 Memory card insertion error. Re-insert the memory card. 


04 Insufficient memory card space to complete this operation. Move or delete data stored 

on the memory card to increase available space. 

05 File not found. Check whether the specified file name exists in the memory card. 

Hard Disk Errors 

If HARD DISK error Press GO is displayed, verify the error code (numeric) and refer to the following 

table. 


01 Format error. Format the hard disk again. 

02 Hard disk connection error. Verify the hard disk connections. 


04 Insufficient space on hard disk to complete this operation. Move or delete data stored on 

the hard disk to increase available space. 

05 File not found. Check whether the specified file name exists in the hard disk. 

06 Insufficient system memory. Install more memory. 

20 Hard disk is installed to the wrong slot. Install in a hard disk compatible slot. 

85 Invalid virtual mailbox tray name. Specify a valid name. 

86 Invalid virtual mailbox password. Enter the correct password. 

88 Invalid data in the virtual mailbox. The saved job data is corrupt. 

97 Maximum number of register jobs exceeded. Additional jobs cannot be saved. Increase 

the maximum number of registered jobs or maximum allowed space usage. 

98 Invalid data in the job. The saved job data is corrupt. 

9-14


Scanner Error Messages 

If the Scanner mode touch panel displays any of these messages after pressing the Scanner key, 

follow the corresponding procedure. 


Page 

Unable to use scanner. 

Unable to find destination PC. 

Check the PC. 

This name is already in use. 

Input new name again. 

This number is already in use. 

Input new number again. 

Registration full. 

You can not add any more. 

(Registration full. 

Cannot register anymore.) 

E-mail size, exceeds data 

capacity. 

(E-mail size exceeds send 

capacity limit.) 

Destination address is not being 

registered. 

(This number is not registered. 

Input number again.) 

Unable to find SMTP server. 

Contact administrator. 

SMTP Authentication error. 


Unable to find PC for personal 

address list. 

Check the PC. 

Is the network cable connected 

properly 

Is Scanner File Utility running on the 

computer being used 


properly 

Is the SMTP server running 

Confirm the network cable is 

properly connected. If the scanner 

has just been started, try again later 

(approximately 2 minutes). 

Launch Scanner File Utility to enable 

receive status. 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 

page 6-6 

— Change the name and re-enter. — 

— Change the number and re-enter. — 

— Delete unnecessary entries before 

registering a new entry. 

— Resend after decreasing the number 

of sheets to be transmitted or 

decreasing resolution. 

— The specified number does not 

exist. 

Have the correct login account name 

and password for SMTP 

authentication been set 

Is Address Book for Scanner 

running on the computer 

Is the network properly connected 

on the specified computer 

Is the network cable properly 

connected to the scanner network 

interface 

Check the number and try again. 


properly connected. If the scanner 

has just been started, try again later 

(approximately 2 minutes). 

Contact your system administrator 

or support personnel. 



— 

— 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 

— 

— 

— 

Launch Address Book for Scanner. — 

Confirm the computer is properly 

connected to the network. 


properly connected to the scanner 

network interface. 

Network scanner system error. — Switch the device off and back on 

again. 

— 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 

— 

9-15



Page 

Communication error. 

Scan to PC: 

Sending computer status. 

E-Mail Send: 

Is the SMTP server running 

Database Connection: 

Save destination computer status. 

Try retransmitting. — 

Contact your system administrator. — 

An unsupported response was 

received from DB Assistant. Check 

the computer running DB Assistant. 

Destination PC’s system error. Destination PC computer status. Try retransmitting. — 

The file was not saved. 

Check the destination PC. 

Destination PC’s application is 

out of order. 

Destination PC is in use. 

Try again later. 

PC’s version of personal address 

list is different. 


PC of personal address list is in 

use. 


(PC’s version of personal 

address list is in use. 

Try again later.) 

Sender (user) is not registered. 


No Destination address being 

registered. 

(Destination address has not 

being registered.) 

Wrong password. 

(Incorrect password.) 

Check domain name and host 

name. 

Overflow of original pages. 

Scanned documents were sent. 

Check the DB Assistant PC. 


DB Assistant Server version is 

different. 


Has the maximum hard disk usage 

set by Scanner File Utility at the 

destination PC been exceeded 

Are you trying to from multiple 

scanners using the same filename 

Is Scanner File Utility running on the 

destination PC 

Is the Address Book for Scanner 

version different 

Is the sender (user) registered as 

User No. 001 in the scanner's 

sender (user) list 

Is the specified destination 

registered 

Scanner domain name, host name 

not set. 

Increase available space and try 

again. 

Try again later or change the 

filename. 

Launch Scanner File Utility. page 6-6 

— A connection currently exists 

between the destination PC and a 

scanner. Try retransmitting later. 



— A connection current exists between 

the specified Address Book for 

Scanner and a scanner. Try making 

the selection again later. 

Create a new user number 001 entry 

or select another user after setting 

the scanner default for Selec. of 

senders (users) to [Off]. 

Create a new entry or select another 

destination. 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 

— Enter the correct password. — 

Limit of 999 pages that can be sent 

at 1 time has been exceeded. 

Is the DB Assistant version 

different 

Check if domain name and host 

name have been configured. 

Send the excess pages separately. 

Depending on 2-sided or book 

original settings, the maximum 

sheets that can be sent may be 998 

pages. 

— DB Assistant not found. Make sure 

that DB Assistant is running on the 

PC which has DB Assistant installed. 



— 

page 5-6 

— 

— 

— 

9-16



Page 

DB Assistant Server error. 


DB Assistant Server is in use. 


Unable to find FTP server. 


Unable to Log in to the FTP 

Server 

The Path attempted to use for 

saving does not exist 

Error occurred at FTP Server 

Please contact Administrator 

POP3 server not found. 

Contact Administrator. 

Unable to find POP3 server. 


Unable to Log in to the POP3 

Server. 

Confirm the login account and 

password for SMTP TX authen. 

Error occurred at POP3 Server. 



properly 

Is the FTP server running 


properly 

— An error has occurred with DB 

Assistant or the computer running 

DB Assistant. Communication 

cannot continue. Check the 

computer running DB Assistant. 

— DB Assistant currently connected to 

another scanner. Try connecting 

again later. 


properly connected. 

Contact your server administrator or 

support personnel. 

— FTP server login failed. Make sure 

username and password have been 

configured. 

— Save folder does not exist or path to 

save folder is incorrect. Verify that 

the FTP server save folder and the 

path registered in the machine are 

matching. 

— FTP server returned an unexpected 

error. Unable to save. Ask your 

server administrator to verify that the 

logged in user account has write 

permissions. 


properly connected. 

— 

— 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 

— 

page 5-26 

page 5-26 

— 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 

Is the POP3 server running Start the POP3 server. — 

Are the POP3 user account or 

password correct 

Verify the POP3 user account and 

password. 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 

— Verify POP3 server settings. — 

9-17


Scanner Error Codes 

Below is a list of scanner send log error codes and their corrective actions. 

Error Code Detail Contents Corrective Actions Reference 

Page 

E001 User initiated cancel during send. — — 

E010 

E011 

E012 

E020 

E021 

E022 

Connection to destination PC lost during 

data transmission (an error greater than 

E011 has occurred that cannot be further 

categorized). Or, connection to the 

computer running Address Book for 

Scanner (Private Address Book) has been 

lost. 

Transmission aborted due to error in 

transmitted image data. 

Access to Address Book for Scanner 

(Private Address Book) data during image 

transmission was lost due to a line fault. 

Connection to SMTP server lost while 

opening E-mail transmission. 

Receive blocking is configured at the e-mail 

destination or e-mail address not allowed 

as a destination in destination permission 

settings. 

Recipient(s) list includes e-mail address not 

recognizable by SMTP server. 

• Confirm that there is no link fault by checking 

whether the network cable is properly 

connected. 

• Check that the destination PC is running 

properly. 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 

Retry the operation. — 

Check that the computer running Address Book 

for Scanner (Private Address Book) is properly 

connected. 

Confirm that there is no link fault by checking 


connected. Otherwise, ask your system 

administrator or support personnel to check that 

the SMTP server is working properly. 

• Check the list of restricted destination 

domain settings and adjust setting as 

necessary. 

• Check that the destination e-mail address 

has been correctly entered. 

Check that the destination e-mail address has 

been correctly entered. 

E023 SMTP server not functioning correctly. Ask system administrator or support personnel 

to verify SMTP server is functioning properly. 

E024 SMTP Authentication error. Check with the system administrator that the 

user account and password used in SMTP 

authentication are correctly configured. 

E030 

E031 

E032 

E033 

E034 

E035 

Unable to recognize destination PC. 

Scanner File Utility not running or already 

connected to another scanner. 

Scanner password and destination PC 

password do not match when preparing for 

image transmission. 

During Scan to PC, destination PC hard 

disk usage limit exceeded. 

Version of the Scanner File Utility is 

different. 

Scanner File Utility connected to another 

scanner. Send failed. 

No match for Scanner File Utility folder 

number during group send. Configuration 

change was made during send operation. 

• Verify that Scanner File Utility is running on 

the destination PC and if it is currently 

connected to another scanner. 



connected. 

— 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 

page 5-20 

— 

— 

page 5-8 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 

Check the destination PC password. — 

Try again after increasing available space on the 

destination PC hard disk. 

Check the Scanner File Utility version. — 

Try Scan to PC again after closing connection to 

another scanner. 

Check the Scanner File Utility settings. page 6-9 

— 

— 

9-18


Error Code Detail Contents Corrective Actions Reference 

Page 

E036 

E039 

E059 

E061 

E080 

During scanned image compression, 

compressed data overran available 

memory. 

Invalid command received from computer 

during Scan to PC. An unexpected 

condition has occurred on the destination 

PC. 

Invalid command received from computer. 

There is problem with the computer running 

Address Book for Scanner (Private Address 

Book). 

Decrease data size as follows and try again. 

• Decrease resolution. 

• Set image quality to OCR. 

• Decrease number of pages scanned in one 

operation. 

• Check that the Scanner File Utility on the 

destination PC is running properly. 

• Confirm that no other programs to receive 

network data are running on the computer 

other than Scanner File Utility. 

• Resolve the error condition on the destination 

PC. 

• Confirm that Address Book for Scanner 

(Private Address Book) is running properly 

on the destination PC. 

• Confirm that no other programs to receive 

network data are running on the computer 

other than Address Book for Scanner 

(Private Address Book). 

• Resolve the error condition on the destination 

PC. 

An error has occurred for one of the group Check the group member (destination)'s 

members (destinations) when group is computer and correct any problems. 

selected during Send E-Mail or Scan to PC. 

The network cable is not connected 

properly. 

Confirm the network cable is properly connected. 

Also, ask system administrator or support 

personnel to verify FTP server is functioning 

properly. 

E081 FTP server login failed. Make sure username and password have been 

configured. 

E082 

Save folder does not exist or path to save 

folder is incorrect. 

Verify that the FTP server save folder and the 

path registered in the machine are matching. 

E083 FTP server returned an unexpected error. Unable to save. Ask your server administrator to 

verify that the logged in user account has write 

permissions. 

E090 POP3 server not found. • Check that the POP3 server is running 

properly. 

E091 

Unable to login to POP3 server - POP3 

server user account or password incorrect. 



connected. 

Change the POP3 server user account or 

password. 

— 

— 

— 

— 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 

page 5-26 

— 

— 

Refer to 

Operation 

Guide, 

Chapter 2 

page 5-6 

E092 Error occurred at POP3 server. Verify POP3 server settings. — 

E101 Error occurred when multiple destinations Check for error for each individual selection and — 

selected. 

resolve the error condition. 

9-19


9-20

Appendix 

This chapter covers the following topics. 

• Paper...Appendix-2 

• Specifications...Appendix-8 

• Intercompatibility of Functions...Appendix-14 

• Glossary...Appendix-23 

Appendix-1

Appendix 

Paper 

Basic Paper Specifications 

This machine is designed to print on standard printing paper as used in regular (‘dry’) copiers and 

page printers such as laser printers. It also supports a variety of other types of paper that conform to 

the specifications given in this appendix. 

Be careful when choosing paper. Paper unsuitable for the machine may cause jams or paper 

wrinkling. 

Use the MP tray for transparencies, labels, envelopes, and similar types of paper. 

NOTE: Some recycled paper does not meet requirements for use with this machine as listed in the 

Basic Paper Specifications shown below, such as moisture or pulp content requirements. For this 

reason, we recommend purchasing a small amount of recycled paper as a sample for testing prior 

to use. Choose recycled paper that gives the best printing results and contains low levels of paper 

dust. 

We are not responsible for any problems arising from the use of paper that does not conform to 

these specifications. 

Usable Paper Types 

Use standard copier paper for regular copiers or laser printers. The print quality will vary depending 

on the paper quality. Poor quality paper may cause unsatisfactory printing results. 

Basic Paper Specifications 

The following table lists the specifications of paper that is supported with this machine. Refer to the 

subsequent sections for further details. 

Item 

Specifications 

Weight Cassettes: 60 - 105 g/m 2 

MP tray: 60 - 220 g/m 2 

Weight 

0.086 - 0.110 mm 

Dimensional accuracy ±0.7 mm 

Squareness of corners 90° ±0.2° 

Moisture Content 4 - 6 % 

Paper Grain 

Long grain (paper supply direction) 

Pulp content 

80 % or more 

Appendix-2

Appendix 

Choosing the Appropriate Paper 

This section describes guidelines for choosing paper. 

Paper Condition 

Avoid using paper with bent corners or paper that is curled, dirty, or torn. Do not use paper that has 

a rough surface or paper fiber lint, or that is especially delicate. Use of paper in any of these 

conditions will not only deliver poor copies but may also cause paper jams and shorten the useful 

life of the machine. Choose paper with a smooth and even surface; however, avoid coated paper or 

paper with a treated surface as this may damage the drum or fusing unit. 

Constituent components 

Do not use coated or surface-treated papers, or paper that contains plastic or carbon. These paper 

may produce harmful fumes from the heat of copying and may damage the drum. 

For standard paper, choose paper with at least 80 % pulp content. Select products with less than 

20 % cotton or other fiber content. 

Paper size 

The cassettes and MP tray support the following paper sizes. 

Measurements in the table take into account a dimensional variance of ±0.7 mm for length and 

width. Corner angles must be 90° ±0.2°. 

MP Tray 

Cassette or MP Tray 

B6R (128 × 182 mm) 

A3 (297 × 420 mm) 

Postcard (100 × 148 mm) 

B4 (257 × 364 mm) 

Return postcard (148 × 200 mm) 

A4 (297 × 210 mm) 

Executive (7 1/4 ×101/2") 

A4R (210 × 297 mm) 

Envelope DL (110 × 220 mm) 

B5 (257 × 182 mm) 

Envelope C5 (162 × 229 mm) 

B5R (182 × 257 mm) 

Envelope C4 (229 × 324 mm) 

A5R (148 × 210 mm) 

ISO B5 (176 × 250 mm) 

Folio (210 × 330 mm) 

Comm.#10 (4 1/8 ×91/2") 11 × 17" 

Comm.#9 (3 7/8 ×87/8") 8 1/2 × 14" 

Comm.#6-3/4 (3 5/8 ×61/2") 11 × 8 1/2" 

Monarch (3 7/8 ×71/2") 8 1/2 ×11" 

YOUKEI 2 (114 × 162 mm) 5 1/2 ×81/2" 

YOUKEI 4 (105 × 235 mm) 8 1/2 × 13" 

Input size 

(3 7/8 ×57/8" - 11 5/8 ×17") 

(98 × 148 - 297 × 432 mm) 

8 1/2 ×131/2" 

8K (273 × 394 mm) 

16K (273 × 197 mm) 

16KR (197 × 273 mm) 

Appendix-3

Appendix 

Smoothness 

The paper surface should be smooth, but it must be uncoated. With paper that is too smooth and 

slippery, several sheets may accidentally be supplied at once, causing jams. 

Basis Weight 

In countries that use the metric system, basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper 

one square meter in area. In the United States, basis weight is the weight in pounds of one ream 

(500 sheets) of paper cut to the standard size (or trade size) for a specific grade of paper. Paper that 

is too heavy or too light may be supplied incorrectly or cause paper jams, which may cause 

excessive wear of the machine. Mixed paper weight (i.e., thickness) may cause several sheets to be 

supplied at once accidentally and may also cause blurring or other printing problems if the toner fails 

to adhere correctly. 

Appropriate paper weight is 60 - 105 g/m 2 (16 - 28 lb/ream) for cassettes or 60 - 220 g/m 2 (16 - 

58.5 lb/ream) for MP tray. 

Weight 

Avoid using paper that is too thick or thin. Signs that paper may be too thin include frequent 

problems with paper jams or with several sheets being supplied at once. Paper jams may also 

indicate that the paper is too thick. The proper thickness is between 0.086 and 0.110 mm. 

Moisture Content 

Paper moisture content is the ratio of moisture to dryness expressed as a percentage. Moisture 

affects how the paper is supplied, the electrostatic chargeability of the paper, and how the toner 

adheres. 

Paper moisture content varies depending on the relative humidity in the room. High relative humidity 

causes paper to become damp, making the edges expand so it appears wavy. Low relative humidity 

causes paper to lose moisture, making the edges tighten and weakening copy contrast. 

Wavy or tight edges may cause the paper to slip when it is supplied. Try to keep the moisture 

content between 4 to 6 %. 

To maintain the right level of moisture content, bear in mind the following considerations. 

• Store paper in a cool, well-ventilated place. 

• Store paper flat and unopened in the package. Once the package is opened, reseal it if the 

paper is not to be used for a while. 

• Store paper sealed in the original package and box. Put a pallet under the carton to keep it 

raised above the floor. Especially during rainy seasons keep the paper a sufficient distance 

away from wooden or concrete floors. 

• Before using paper that has been stored, keep it at the proper moisture level for at least 48 

hours. 

• Do not store paper where it is exposed to heat, sunlight, or damp conditions. 

Paper Grain 

Paper is cut into sheets either with the grain running parallel to the length (long grain) or with the 

grain parallel to the width (short grain). Avoid using short-grain paper because it may be supplied 

incorrectly; use long-grain paper. 

Appendix-4

Appendix 

Other Paper Specifications 

Porosity: The density of the paper fibers. 

Stiffness: Paper must be stiff enough or it may buckle in the machine, causing jams. 

Curl: Most paper naturally tends to curl in one direction after the package is opened. When paper 

passes through the fixing unit, it curls upward slightly. To deliver flat printouts, load the paper so that 

the curl faces towards the bottom of the paper tray. 

Static electricity: During the printing process, paper is electrostatically charged so that the toner 

adheres. Choose paper that can be discharged quickly so that copies do not cling together. 

Whiteness: The printed page contrast varies depending on the whiteness of the paper. Use whiter 

paper for sharper, brighter copies. 

Quality: Machine problems may occur if sheet sizes are not uniform or if corners are not square, 

edges are rough, sheets are uncut, or edges or corners are crushed. In order to prevent these 

problems, be especially careful when cutting paper yourself. 

Packaging: Choose paper that is properly packaged and stacked in boxes. Ideally, the packaging 

itself should have been treated with a coating to inhibit moisture. 

Specially treated paper: Use of the following paper types is not recommended, even if they 

conform to basic specifications. Before using these kinds of paper, purchase a small amount first for 

testing purposes. 

• Glossy paper 

• Watermarked paper 

• Paper with an uneven surface 

• Perforated paper 

Special Paper 

This section describes printing onto special paper and print media. 

The following paper and media can be used. 

• Overhead transparencies 

• Preprinted paper 

• Bond paper 

• Recycled paper 

• Thin paper (from 60 g/m 2 to 64 g/m 2 or less) 

• Letterhead 

• Colored paper 

• Prepunched paper 

• Envelopes 

• Postcards 

• Thick paper (from 106 g/m 2 to 220 g/m 2 or less) 

• Label paper 

• Coated paper 

• Rough paper 

• High Quality paper 

Choose products for these kinds of paper and media that are specifically designed for use in copiers 

or page printers (such as laser printers). Use the MP tray for transparencies, thin or thick paper, 

envelopes, and postcards. 

Appendix-5

Appendix 

Choosing Special Paper 

Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used with the machine, copy 

quality will vary considerably due to differences in the construction and quality of special paper. 

Thus, special paper is more likely than regular paper to cause printing problems. Before purchasing 

special paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the printing quality is satisfactory. General 

precautions when copying onto special paper are given below. Note that we are not responsible for 

any harm to the user or damage to the machine caused by moisture or characteristics of special 

paper. 

When using special paper, set the paper type to use the cassette or MP tray. (Refer to Specifying 

the Paper Type on page 7-15 and Specifying the Paper Type in Chapter 2 of Operation Guide.) 

Overhead transparencies 

Transparencies must be able to withstand the heat of printing. 

Transparencies must meet the following conditions. 

Item 


Heat resistance 

Must withstand at least 190 °C. 

Weight 

0.100 - 0.110 mm 

Quality 

Polyester 

Dimensional accuracy ±0.7 mm 

Squareness of corners 90° ±0.2° 

To avoid printing problems, supply overhead transparencies from the MP tray. Always place in the 

vertical direction (with the long edge of the paper facing toward the machine). 

If transparencies jam frequently at the ejector, try gently pulling the leading edge of sheets as they 

are ejected. 

Postcards 

Before loading postcards in the MP tray, fan and align 

the edges. If the postcard paper is curled, straighten it 

before loading. Copying onto curled postcards may 

cause jams. 

Do not use perforated return postcards. 

Some postcards may still have rough edges on the 

back side caused during paper cutting. Remove any 

such rough edges by placing the postcards on a flat 

surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with 

a ruler. 

Burrs 

Burrs 

Appendix-6

Appendix 

Envelopes 

Always use the MP tray for envelopes. 

Due to the structure of envelopes, in some instances, printing evenly over the entire surface may 

not be possible. Thin envelopes in particular may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they 

pass through it. Before purchasing envelopes in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the printing 

quality. 

Storing envelopes for a long period may cause them to become wrinkled. Thus, keep the package 

sealed until you are ready to use them. 

Keep the following points in mind. 

Do not use envelopes with exposed adhesive. In addition, do not use the envelopes in which the 

adhesive is exposed after the top layer is peeled off. Serious damage may be occur if the paper 

covering the adhesive comes off in the machine. 

Do not use envelopes with certain special designs. For example, do not use envelopes with a 

grommet for winding a string to close the flap or envelopes with open or film-covered windows. 

If paper jams occur, load fewer envelopes at a time. 

To prevent paper jams when copying onto multiple envelopes, do not allow more than ten envelopes 

remain in the output tray at a time. 

Thick paper 

Before loading thick paper in the MP tray, fan it and align the edges. Some thick paper may still have 

rough edges developed by paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges like for 

Postcards by placing the paper on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a 

ruler. Printing onto paper with rough edges may cause jams. 

NOTE: If the paper is does not feed correctly even 

after it is smoothed, load the paper in the MP tray with 

the leading edge curled up a few millimeters as shown 

in the figure. 

Colored Paper 

Colored paper must meet the conditions as shown in page 2 of the Appendix. In addition, the 

pigments in the paper must be able to withstand the heat of copying (up to 200 °C or 392 °F). 

Preprinted Paper 

Preprinted paper must meet the conditions as shown in page 2 of the Appendix. The colored ink 

must be able to withstand the heat of printing and resistant to silicone oil. Do not use paper with a 

treated surface such as glossy paper used for calendars. 

Recycled Paper 

Except for whiteness, recycled paper must conform to the specifications listed in page 2 of the 

Appendix. 

NOTE: Before purchasing recycled paper in volume, try testing a sample to verify the printing 

quality. 

Appendix-7

Appendix 


NOTE: These specifications are subject to change without notice. 

Body 

Copying System 

Supported Original Types 

Copy Sizes 

Cassette 1, 2 

MP Tray 

During Duplex Usage 

Non-Copying Margin 

Supported paper 

Paper Supply Capacity 

Cassette 1 

Cassette 3 and 4 

MP Tray 

Dry static transfer copy system (Laser), Tandem drum system 

Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: 

11 × 17"/A3 

11 × 17", 8 1/2 ×14", 11×81/2", 8 1/2 ×11", 51/2 ×81/2", 8 1/2 × 13", 

8 1/2 ×131/2", A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16KR 

11 × 17" - 5 1/2 ×81/2", A3 - A6R, 8K, 16K, 16KR, YOUKEI 2, 

YOUKEI 4 

11 × 17" - 5 1/2 ×81/2", A3 - A5R 

4 mm or less 

For further details, refer to Paper on page 2 of the Appendix. 

500 sheets (80 g/m 2 , 11 × 8 1/2"/A4 or smaller), 250 sheets (80 g/m 2 , 

8 1/2 × 14"/B4 or larger) 

500 sheets (80 g/m 2 ) 

100 sheets (80 g/m 2 , 11 × 8 1/2"/A4 or smaller), 50 sheets (80 g/m 2 , 

8 1/2 × 14"/B4 or larger) 

Output Tray Capacity 250 Sheets (80 g/m 2 ) 

Warm-up Time 

Less than 45 seconds 

Recovery time from energy save mode: 10 seconds or less 

Recovery time from sleep mode: 45 seconds or less 

(Room temperature 71.6 °F/22 °C, humidity 60 %) 

Memory 

For Copying/ 

For Scanner 

For Printing 

Additional Memory 


Temperature 

Humidity 

Altitude 

Brightness 

Power Supply 

Dimensions 

(W) × (D) × (H) 

Weight 

Space Required 

(W) × (D) 

768 MB 

256 MB 

Printer: 128 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB 

10 to 32.5 °C 

15 to 80 % 

2,500 m or less 

1,500 lux or less 

AC 120 V 60 Hz 12 A 

AC 220 to 240 V 50 Hz 7.2 A 

23 13/16 ×253/8 ×295/16" 

605 × 645 × 745 mm 

215.6 lbs./98 kg (excluding toner containers and waste toner box) 

34 1/2 ×253/8" 

877 × 645 mm 

Appendix-8

Appendix 

Copying Performance 

Copying Speed 

25/20 ppm model 



First Copy Time 

Resolution 

Continuous Copying 

Zoom Level 

Color copy 

11 × 17"/A3: 10 sheets/min 

8 1/2 × 14"/B4: 10 sheets/min 

11 × 8 1/2"/A4: 20 sheets/min 

8 1/2 × 11"/A4R: 14 sheets/min 

B5: 20 sheets/min 

B5R: 14 sheets/min 

Color copy 

11 × 17"/A3: 13 sheets/min 

8 1/2 × 14"/B4: 13 sheets/min 

11 × 8 1/2"/A4: 25 sheets/min 

8 1/2 × 11"/A4R: 17 sheets/min 



Color copy 

11 × 17"/A3: 16 sheets/min 

8 1/2 × 14"/B4: 16 sheets/min 

11 × 8 1/2"/A4: 32 sheets/min 

8 1/2 × 11"/A4R: 22 sheets/min 



Black and White copy 

11 × 17"/A3: 13 sheets/min 

8 1/2 × 14"/B4: 13 sheets/min 

11 × 8 1/2"/A4: 25 sheets/min 

8 1/2 × 11"/A4R: 17 sheets/min 




11 × 17"/A3: 16 sheets/min 

8 1/2 × 14"/B4: 16 sheets/min 

11 × 8 1/2"/A4: 32 sheets/min 

8 1/2 × 11"/A4R: 22 sheets/min 




11 × 17"/A3: 16 sheets/min 

8 1/2 × 14"/B4: 16 sheets/min 

11 × 8 1/2"/A4: 32 sheets/min 

8 1/2 × 11"/A4R: 22 sheets/min 



Full color: 7.9 seconds or less 1:1, 11 × 8 1/2"/A4 

B/W - Single color: 5.9 seconds or less (1:1, 11 × 8 1/2"/A4) 

Scanning: 600 × 600 dpi 

Printing: 600 × 600 dpi 

1 - 999 sheets 

Any level of zoom from 25 - 400 % (in 1 % increments) 

includes preset zoom levels 

Printing Performance 

Printing Speed 

First Print Time 

Resolution 

Supported Operating 

Systems 

Interface 

Same as Copying Speed 

Same as First Copy Time 

300 dpi, 600 dpi, Fast 1200 mode 

Windows 95 OSR2, Windows 98 Second Edition, 

Windows NT 4.0 Service Pack 5 or later, 

Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 or later, Windows Me, Windows XP, 

Windows Server 2003, Apple Macintosh OS 9.x/OS X 10.x 

Parallel port interface: 1 IEEE1284 

Network interface: 1 

USB 2.0: 1 USB Hi-Speed 

Network interface cards (option): 1 

Serial interface (option): 1 

Appendix-9

Appendix 

Scanning Performance 

Hardware 

Supported Operating 

Systems 


Windows 95 OSR2, Windows 98 Second Edition, 

Windows NT 4.0 Service Pack 5 or later, 

Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 or later, Windows Me, Windows XP, 

Windows Server 2003, Mac OS 9.1-9.2.2, Mac OS 10.1.5-10.4 

(TWAIN: Mac OS 10.2-10.4) 

Operating Environment CPU Pentium 133 MHz or higher (Windows Me 150 MHz or 

higher, Windows XP Celeron 600 MHz or higher, 

Macintosh Power PC G3 or higher) 

Recommended 

Environment 

CD-ROM 

RAM 

HDD 

CPU 

RAM 

HDD 

1 drive 

64 MB or greater (Windows XP 128 MB) 

20 MB or greater 

Celeron 266 MHz or higher (Windows XP Celeron 

800 MHz or higher) 



Ethernet 

Network Protocol 


TCP/IP 

Communications Protocols Proprietary (image transferring, setting via utility), SMTP (e-mail 

sending), HTTP (setting via web), FTP (When sending FTP), TWAIN 

(When using TWAIN) 

Document Processor (option) 

Original Feed Method 

Supported Original Types 

Paper Size 

Automatic feed 

Sheet originals 

Maximum: 11 × 17"/A3 

Minimum: 5 1/2 ×81/2"/A5R 

Paper Weight 1-sided original: 45 - 160 g/m 2 

2-sided original: 50 - 120 g/m 2 

Original No. of Sheets 11 × 8 1/2"/A4 or smaller: 100 sheets or less 50 - 80 g/m 2 

8 1/2 × 14"/B4 or larger: 70 sheets or less 50 - 80 g/m 2 

Device Dimensions 

(W) × (D) × (H) 

Weight 

22 1/2 ×193/16 ×51/4" 

571 × 488 × 134 mm 

Approx. 25.3 lbs./Approx. 11.5 kg 

Appendix-10

Appendix 

Paper Feeder (option) 

Paper Supply Method 

Friction Feed (No. Sheets: 500, 80 g/m 2 , 2 cassettes) 

Paper Size 11 × 17", 8 1/2 ×14", 11×81/2", 8 1/2 ×11", 101/2 ×71/4", 7 1/4 ×101/2", 

5 1/2 ×81/2", 8 1/2 ×13", 81/2 ×131/2", A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 

Folio, 8K, 16K, 16KR 

Supported Paper Paper weight: 60 - 105 g/m 2 

Paper types: standard, recycled, color 

Dimensions 

(W) × (D) × (H) 

Weight 

23 5/16 ×231/4 ×123/8" 

585 × 590 × 315 mm 

Approx. 57.2 lbs. / Approx. 26 kg 

3000 Sheet Paper Feeder (option) 

Paper Supply Method Friction retard method (No. sheets: 3000, 80 g/m 2 ) 

Paper Size 

11 × 8 1/2", A4 

Supported Paper Paper weight: 60 - 105 g/m 2 

Paper types: standard, recycled, color 

Dimensions 

(W) × (D) × (H) 

Weight 

23 5/16 ×235/8 ×123/8" 

585 × 600 × 314 mm 

Approx. 50.6 lbs. / Approx. 23 kg 

Document Finisher (option) 

Number of Trays 

Paper Size 

(Non-stapling) 

Supported Paper 

Weight 

Maximum Sheets for 

Stapling † 

Dimensions 

(W) × (D) × (H) 

Weight 

1 tray 

11 × 17", 8 1/2 × 14", A3, B4: 500sheets 

11 × 8 1/2", 8 1/2 × 11", A4, A4R, B5, B5R, Folio: 1000 sheets 

Stapling: 80 g/m 2 or less 

11 × 17", 8 1/2 × 14", A3, B4: 20 sheets, 11 × 8 1/2", 8 1/2 × 11", A4, A4R, 

B5: 30 sheets (Paper weight 80 g/m 2 or less) 

22 × 20 11/16 ×361/16" 

558 × 526 × 916 mm 

Approx. 55 lbs./Approx. 25 kg 

† When using color copy paper, stapling up to the number of allowed sheets may not be 

possible due to paper quality. 

NOTE: When using the document finisher or 3000 sheet document finisher, the optional job 

separator must be installed. 

Only paper that can be fed from the cassette can be ejected from the document finisher or 3000 

sheet document finisher. 

Appendix-11

Appendix 

3000 Sheet Document Finisher (option) 


3 tray 

Paper Size 

Tray A (Non-stapling) 11 × 17", 8 1/2 × 14" A3, B4, 8K: 1500 sheets 

11 × 8 1/2", 8 1/2 × 11", A4, A4R, B5, Folio, 16K: 3000 sheets 

Tray B 

11 × 17", 8 1/2 × 14" A3, B4, 8K: 100 sheets 

11 × 8 1/2", 8 1/2 ×11", 51/2 ×81/2", A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, B6R, A6R, 

Folio, 16K, 16KR: 200 sheets 

Postcard: 50 sheets 

Tray C 

11 × 8 1/2", 5 1/2 ×81/2", A4, B5, A5, A5R, B6R, A6R, 16K: 50 sheets 

Postcard: 10 sheets 

Supported Paper 

Weight 

Maximum Sheets for 

Stapling † 

Dimensions 

(W) × (D) × (H) 

Weight 

Stapling: 90 g/m 2 or less 

Punchingoption: 45 - 200 g/m 2 

11 × 17", 8 1/2 × 14", A3, B4: 30 sheets, 11 × 8 1/2", 8 1/2 × 11", A4, A4R, 

B5: 50 sheets (Paper weight 90 g/m 2 or less) 

26 15/16 ×223/16 ×4213/16" 

684 × 563 × 1087 mm 

Approx. 105.6 lbs. or less/Approx. 48 kg or less 

† When using color copy paper, stapling up to the number of allowed sheets may not be 

possible due to paper quality. 

NOTE: When using the document finisher or 3000 sheet document finisher, the optional job 

separator must be installed. 

Only paper that can be fed from the cassette can be ejected from the document finisher or 3000 

sheet document finisher. 

Job Separator (option) 


1 tray 

Maximum Sheets 100 sheets (80 g/m 2 ) 

Paper Size 11 × 17", 8 1/2 × 14", 11 × 8 1/2", 8 1/2 ×11", 71/4 ×101/2", 5 1/2 ×81/2", 

8 1/2 × 13", 8 1/2 ×131/2", A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, Folio 

Paper Type Paper weight: 60 - 105 g/m 2 

Paper type: standard, recycled, color, thin, letterhead 

Device Dimensions 

(W) × (D) × (H) 

Weight 

22 7/16 ×227/16 ×91/2" 

570 × 570 × 240 mm 

5.06 lbs. or less/2.3 kg or less 

Appendix-12

Appendix 

Environmental Specifications 

Recovery time from Low-Power mode 

Time to Low-Power mode (factory default setting) 

Time to Sleep mode (factory default setting) 

Duplexing 

Paper supply capability 

10 seconds or less 

15 minutes 

45 minutes 

Standard 

Paper with 100 % recycled paper 

content may be used 

NOTE: Contact your Dealer or Service Representative for recommended paper types. 

Appendix-13

Appendix 

Intercompatibility of Functions 

Combine the various functions to provide even greater usage efficiency. 

Intercompatibility of Copier Functions 

Primary Function 

Refer to the following charts for a list of functions that may be used in combination. 

Secondary Functions 

Duplex/Split Mode Select original 

size 

Auto color 

Full-color 

Black/White 


Hue Adjust 




Selection of Paper 

One-sided to Two-sided 

Two-sided to Two-sided 

Book to Two-sided 

Two-sided to One-sided 

Book to One-sided 

Standard/Other Standerd Size 

Input size 

Auto Detect 

Custom size 

Combine mode 

Auto Exposure mode 

Manual Exposure mode 


Reducing/ 

enlarging 

Equal size (100%) 

XY zoom 

Auto zoom 

Manual zoom 

Auto Selection mode copying (mixed finish sizes) † 

Auto Selection mode copying (same finish size) † 


Image Quality 

Text + Photo 

Photo 

Print 

Text 

Map 

Auto color Y Y Y Y Y 54 85 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Full-color Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 62 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Black/White Y Y 59 58 57 54 55 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 67 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Color Balance Adjust Y Y 56 Y N Y 55 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 59 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Hue Adjust Y Y 56 Y N Y 55 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 58 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

One touch Image Adjust Y Y 56 N N Y 55 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 57 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Color/B&W selection 54 Y 56 Y Y Y 54 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

MonoColor Copy Y Y 56 55 55 55 54 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Selection of Paper Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 31 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

One-sided to Two-sided Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 12 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Two-sided to Two-sided Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Book to Two-sided Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N 69 14 Y 14 15 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 12 12 Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Two-sided to One-sided Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Book to One-sided Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N 69 14 Y 14 15 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 12 12 Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Duplex/Split Mode 

Select original 

size 

Standard/Other Standerd Size Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 74 Y 74 N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 12 12 Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Input size Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 21 Y 21 N N N 32 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 12 12 Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Auto Detect Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Custom size Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 21 Y 21 N N N 32 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 12 12 Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Combine mode Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 72 Y 72 Y 32 Y 32 Y Y Y Y 2 Y Y 12 12 Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Auto Exposure mode Y 61 Y 59 58 57 N 1 N 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N 67 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 68 68 Y 68 

Manual Exposure mode Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Background Exposure Adjust Y Y 56 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 62 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 67 67 Y N 1 

Reducing/ 

enlarging 

Equal size (100%) Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 2 Y Y Y N N N 3 2 Y Y Y Y Y Y 

XY zoom Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 2 Y Y Y N N N 3 2 Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Auto zoom Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 2 Y Y Y N N N 3 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Manual zoom Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 2 Y Y Y N N N 3 2 Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Auto Selection mode copying (mixed finish sizes) † Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 12 12 Y 12 Y 12 12 12 Y 12 12 Y Y Y 3 3 3 3 N Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Auto Selection mode copying (same finish size) † Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 12 Y 12 12 12 Y 12 12 Y Y Y 2 2 Y 2 N 33 Y Y Y Y Y 

Batch Scanning Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 27 Y Y Y Y Y 

Text + Photo Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N 

Photo Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 1 Y 67 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N 

Print Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 1 Y 67 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N 

Text Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N 

Map Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 1 Y N 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N 

Margin mode Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 5 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Centering Originals Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Page Numbering Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 12 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Poster Y Y Y Y Y Y 53 Y Y 53 53 53 53 53 Y Y Y Y 53 Y Y Y 53 53 53 53 53 53 53 Y Y Y Y Y 

Sort mode Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Offset mode (per page) Y Y Y Y Y Y 87 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Offset mode (per set) Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Image Quality 

Border 

erase 

Sheet Erase Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 6 Y 6 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 7 7 Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Book Erase Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 6 Y 6 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 7 7 Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Separate Border Erase Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 6 Y 6 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 7 7 Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Cover Mode Y Y Y Y Y Y 54 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 24 Y 24 25 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 12 12 Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Booklet from Sheets Y Y Y Y Y Y 54 Y Y 10 10 10 10 10 86 20 Y 20 23 Y Y Y Y 2 Y Y 12 12 Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Booklet from Facing Pages Y Y Y Y Y Y 54 Y Y 10 10 10 10 10 70 20 Y 20 23 Y Y Y 73 73 Y 73 12 12 Y Y Y Y Y Y 

† This operation requires the optional document processor. 

Appendix-14

Appendix 


Margin mode 



Poster 

Sort mode 

Offset mode (per page) 

Offset mode (per set) 

Border 

erase 

Sheet Erase 

Book Erase 


Cover Mode 


Booklet from Facing Pages 

Auto Rotation 


Proof Copy 

Memo Mode 

EcoPrint 





Output destination 

Job separator 

Top tray 

Tray A 

Tray B 

Tray C 

Tray 1 - 7 


Stapling 

Punching 

Bind & Fold 


Interrupt Mode 

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 52 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Auto color 

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Full-color 

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Black/White 

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Color Balance Adjust 

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Hue Adjust 

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y One touch Image Adjust 

Y Y Y 53 Y N 1 Y Y Y Y 54 54 54 Y 54 54 Y Y Y N 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N 1 Y 34 Color/B&W selection 

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y MonoColor Copy 

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Selection of Paper 

Y Y Y 53 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 10 10 Y 11 Y Y Y Y 13 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 66 Y One-sided to Two-sided 

Y Y Y 53 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 10 10 Y 11 Y Y Y Y 13 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 66 Y Two-sided to Two-sided 

Y Y Y 53 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 10 10 Y 11 Y N 1 Y 9 13 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 66 Y Book to Two-sided 

Y Y Y 53 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 10 10 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 66 Y Two-sided to One-sided 

Y Y Y 53 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 10 10 Y Y Y N 1 Y 9 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 66 Y Book to One-sided 

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 86 75 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Standard/Other Standerd Size 

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 6 6 6 24 21 21 Y 29 Y 32 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Input size 

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Auto Detect 

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 6 6 6 24 21 21 Y 29 Y 32 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Custom size 

5 Y Y 53 Y Y Y Y Y Y 25 23 23 Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 63 Y Y N 1 66 Y Combine mode 

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 82 Y Auto Exposure mode 

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Manual Exposure mode 

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Background Exposure Adjust 

Y Y Y 75 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 2 2 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 76 Y Equal size (100%) 

Y Y Y 53 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 2 2 Y Y Y 2 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 76 Y XY zoom 

Y Y Y 75 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 2 2 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 76 Y Auto zoom 

Y Y Y 75 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 2 2 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 76 Y Manual zoom 

Y Y 12 53 Y Y Y 7 7 7 12 12 12 Y 12 Y 12 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 12 Y N 1 66 Y Auto Selection mode copying (mixed finish sizes) † 

Y Y Y 53 Y Y Y 7 7 7 12 12 12 Y 12 Y 12 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N 1 66 Y Auto Selection mode copying (same finish size) † 

Y Y Y 53 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 66 Y Batch Scanning 

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Text + Photo 

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Photo 

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Print 

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Text 

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Map 

N Y 53 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 4 4 Y Y Y 5 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 66 Y Margin mode 

N Y 53 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 66 Y Centering Originals 

Y Y 53 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 66 Y Page Numbering 

53 53 53 Y Y Y 53 53 53 53 53 53 Y 53 Y 53 Y Y 53 Y N 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y 63 Y Y 53 66 34 Poster 

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 18 18 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Sort mode 

Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y 27 27 Y 27 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y N 80 Y Offset mode (per page) 

Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y 27 27 Y 27 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y N 80 Y Offset mode (per set) 

Y Y Y 53 Y Y Y N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 66 Y Sheet Erase 

Y Y Y 53 Y Y Y N N Y 8 Y Y Y Y Y Y 9 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 66 Y Book Erase 

Y Y Y 53 Y Y Y N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 66 Y Separate Border Erase 

Y Y Y 53 Y Y Y Y Y Y 18 18 Y 19 Y 25 Y Y 26 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N 1 66 Y Cover Mode 

4 Y Y 53181717 Y 8 Y 18 N Y 11 Y 23 Y Y 13 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 63 22 22 Y 66 Y Booklet from Sheets 

4 Y Y 53181717 Y Y Y 18 N Y 11 Y 23 Y 9 13 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 63 22 22 Y 66 Y Booklet from Facing Pages 

Duplex/Split Mode 


size 

Reducing/ 

enlarging 

Image Quality 

Border 

erase 


Appendix-15

Appendix 


Auto color 

Full-color 

Black/White 


Hue Adjust 




Selection of Paper 

† This operation requires the optional document processor. 

Secondary Function 

Duplex/Split Mode Select original 

size 

One-sided to Two-sided 

Two-sided to Two-sided 

Book to Two-sided 

Two-sided to One-sided 

Book to One-sided 

Standard/Other Standard Size 

Input size 

Auto Detect 

Custom size 

Combine Mode 

Auto Exposure mode 

Manual Exposure mode 


Reducing/ 

Enlarging 

Equal size (100%) 

XY zoom 

Auto zoom 

Manual zoom 

Auto Selection mode copying (mixed original sizes) † 

Auto Selection mode copying (all same size) † 


Image Quality 

Text + Photo 

Photo 

Print 

Text 

Map 

Auto Rotation Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

OHP Backing Sheet Mode Y Y Y Y Y Y 54 Y Y 11 11 11 Y Y Y 29 Y 29 60 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 12 12 Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Proof Copy Y Y Y Y Y Y 54 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Memo Mode Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N 1 Y N 1 Y 32 Y 32 N Y Y Y Y 70 Y Y 12 12 Y Y Y Y Y Y 

EcoPrint Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Original Orientation Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 71 Y 71 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Inverted Copying 52 N 1 Y N 1 N 1 N 1 N 1 N 1 Y 27 27 27 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Mirror Copying Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Preparing a Job for Repeat Copy Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Job separator Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Top tray Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Tray A Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Tray B Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Tray C Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Tray 1 - 7 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Sharpness Adjust Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 64 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Stapling ††† 

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 12 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Punching †††† 

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Bind & Fold ††††† 

Y Y Y Y Y Y N 1 Y N 1 N 1 N 1 N 1 N 1 Y N 1 Y N 1 N 1 Y Y Y Y N 1 Y Y N 1 N 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Image Repeat Copy Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 66 66 66 66 66 Y Y Y Y 66 81 Y Y 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 Y Y Y Y Y 

Interrupt Mode Y Y Y Y Y Y 34 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Shared Data Box (Document Registration) Y Y Y Y Y N N N Y N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y N 1 Y Y Y Y N N Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Synergy Print Box (Document Registration) Y Y Y Y Y N N N Y N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y N 1 Y Y Y Y N N Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Shared Data Box (Document Output) N N N N N N N N Y Y N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N 

Synergy Print Box (Document Output) N N N N N N N N Y Y N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N 

Programming multi-part jobs: Step 1 Y Y Y Y Y N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y N 1 Y Y Y Y N N N Y Y Y Y Y 

Programming multi-part jobs: Step 2- N N N Y Y N N N Y N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y N 1 Y Y Y Y N N N Y Y Y Y Y 

Output Management Functions N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N 

Repeat Copy N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N 

Output destination †† 


Functions 

†† Requires the optional job separator, document finisher, 3000 sheet document finisher or mailbox. 

††† Requires the optional document finisher or 3000 sheet document finisher. 

†††† Requires the optional 3000 sheet document finisher and punching unit. 

†††††Requires the optional 3000 sheet document finisher and folding unit. 

Y: May be combined. 

N: May not be combined. 

N1: Primary function takes precedence. Secondary function cannot be selected. 

1 Auto Exposure mode is not available for photo original and print original. 

2 Auto zoom is set because only auto zoom is available. 

3 Auto paper is set because only auto paper is available. 

4 Margin mode and booklet mode cannot be combined. 

5 Margin mode and combine mode cannot be combined. 

6 Border erase and input size cannot be combined. 

7 Border erase and auto selection cannot be combined. 

8 Book border erase and booklet (sheet original) cannot be combined. 

Appendix-16

Appendix 


Margin Mode 



Poster 

Sort Mode 

Offset mode (per page) 

Offset mode (per set) 

Border 

Erase 

Sheet Erase 

Book Erase 


Cover Mode 


Booklets from Facing Pages 

Auto Rotation 


Proof Copy 

Memo Mode 

EcoPrint 





Selecting output destination 

Job separator 

Top tray 

Tray A 

Tray B 

Tray C 

Tray 1 - 7 


Stapling 

Punching 

Bind & Fold 


Interrupt Copy 

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 79 Y Auto Rotation 

Y Y Y 53 60 30 30 Y Y Y 19 11 11 Y Y 60 Y Y 28 Y Y 60 60 60 60 60 60 Y 30 30 N 1 Y 34 OHP Backing Sheet Mode 

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 34 Proof Copy 

5 Y Y 53 Y Y Y Y Y Y 25 23 23 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 63 Y Y N 1 Y Y Memo Mode 

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y EcoPrint 

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 71 Y Y Y 71 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 78 Y Original Orientation 

Y Y Y 53 Y Y Y Y Y Y 27 27 27 Y 27 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Inverted Copying 

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 66 Y Mirror Copying 

Y Y Y N 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Preparing a Job for Repeat Copy 

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N Y 76 77 87 Y Y Job separator 

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N Y 76 77 87 Y Y Top tray 

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 60 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N Y Y Y 87 Y Y Tray A 

Y Y Y Y Y 76 76 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 60 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N Y 76 Y 87 Y Y Tray B 

Y Y Y Y Y N 1 N 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 60 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N Y 76 77 87 Y Y Tray C 

Y Y Y Y Y N 1 N 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 60 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N Y 767787 Y Y Tray 1 - 7 

Y Y Y 64 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 64 64 Y Y Y 64 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Sharpness Adjust 

Y Y Y Y Y N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 27 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N Y N N N Y Y N 66 Y Stapling †† 

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 22 22 Y 27 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N Y Y N 88 Y Y N Y Y Punching ††† 

Output destination † 


Y Y Y 53 N 1 N N Y N 1 Y Y Y Y Y N 1 Y N 1 Y Y N 1 Y Y 88 88 88 88 88 88 Y N N 66 Y Bind & Fold †††† 

66 66 66 66 Y 80 80 66 66 66 66 66 66 79 Y Y Y Y 78 Y 66 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 66 Y 66 Y Image Repeat Copy 

Y Y Y 34 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Interrupt Mode 

N N N N N N N Y Y Y N N N N N N N N Y N N N N N N N N N Y N N N N N Shared Data Box (Document Registration) 

N N N N N N N Y Y Y N N N N N N N N Y N N N N N N N N N Y N N N N N Synergy Print Box (Document Registration) 

Y N Y Y Y Y Y N N N Y Y N N N N N N N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y N N Shared Data Box (Document Output) 

Y N Y Y Y Y Y N N N Y Y N N N N N N N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y N N Synergy Print Box (Document Output) 

Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y N Y N N N N N N N Y Y N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N Programming multi-part jobs: Step 1 

N N N N N N N Y N Y N N N N N N N N Y N N N N N N N N N Y N N N N N Programming multi-part jobs: Step 2- 

N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Output Management Functions 

N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Repeat Copy 

† Requires the optional job separator, document finisher, 3000 sheet document finisher or mailbox. 

†† Requires the optional document finisher or 3000 sheet document finisher. 

††† Requires the optional 3000 sheet document finisher and punching unit. 

†††† Requires the optional 3000 sheet document finisher and folding unit. 


Functions 

9 Combination not available because book original only allows top edge to align to the back. 

10 When Duplex mode or Split mode is selected, Booklet modes are given secondary priority. 

11 Duplex mode is not available for OHP transparencies. 

12 May not be combined with Auto Selection mode. 

13 Inverted copying not permitted for Duplex mode. 

14 Original size selection not available for split mode (booklet to one-sided). 

15 Combine mode not available for split mode (booklet to one-sided). 

16 Split mode (Book to 1-sided) is not allowed when producing OHP backing sheet mode. 

17 Booklet copying may not be combined with offset mode. 

18 Cover page may be set during booklet operation setting. 

19 Cover mode is not available when producing OHP backing sheet mode. 

20 Booklet mode is not available when the original size is selected via user entry. 

21 The secondary function takes priority and setting is returned to Auto Detect. 

Appendix-17

Appendix 

22 Stapling/punching is not permitted. 

23 Combine mode and booklet mode may not be combined. 

24 Cover mode is not available when the original size is selected via user entry. 

25 Cover mode and combine mode may not be combined. 

26 Cover mode is not available with inverted copying. 

27 The secondary function takes priority and the primary function is released. 

28 OHP backing sheet mode are not available with inverted copying. 

29 OHP backing sheet mode are not available when the original size is selected via user entry. 

30 OHP backing sheet mode are not available with Offset mode, stapling, or punching copies. 

31 Setting is canceled due to switch to automatic paper select. 

32 Combine mode is not available when the original size is selected via user entry. 

33 May not be combined with batch scanning. 

34 May not be combined with Interrupt mode. 

35 May not be combined with Offset mode. 

36 Auto Selection mode may not be combined with centering originals. 

51 Page numbering forces fixed auto zoom setting. 

52 May not be combined with auto color. 

53 May not be combined with poster mode. 

54 May not be combined with Color/BW selection. 

55 May not be combined with MonoColor copying. 

56 The secondary function takes priority and color function is released. 

57 May not be combined with One-touch image adjust. 

58 May not be combined with Hue Adjust. 

59 May not be combined with Color Balance Adjust. 

60 May not be combined with OHP backing sheet mode or when the MP tray paper type is set to 

transparency or thick paper. 

61 Full color copy mode is given priority and Auto Exposure mode is canceled. 

62 Full color copy and Auto Exposure mode may not be combined. 

63 May not be combined with Sharpness Adjust. (B&W/MonoColor copy) 

64 The secondary function takes priority and sharpness adjust function is released. 

(B&W/MonoColor copy) 

65 The secondary function is given priority and Auto Exposure mode is released. 

(B&W/MonoColor copy) 

66 May not be combined with Image Repeat Copy. 

67 May not be combined with background adjust. 

68 Auto Exposure mode is not available for photo original and print original. (switches to manual 

exposure mode) 

69 Original Size Selection (B6, B6R, A6R, 11 × 15", Postcard) not available. 

70 May not be combined with Memo mode. 

71 The secondary function takes priority and original set direction is set to [Top Edge] ([Back 

Edge]). 

72 May not be combined with Combine mode. 

73 May not be combined with Booklet mode. (switches to auto zoom) 

74 When selecting original size (B6, B6R, A6R, 11 × 15", Postcard), secondary function is given 

priority and setting switches to auto detect. 

75 The secondary function is given priority and zoom is set to 100%. (No change if already set to 

100%) 

Appendix-18

Appendix 

76 The secondary function is given priority and Tray A is set. 

77 The secondary function is given priority and Tray B is set. 

78 Original orientation is set to [Top Edge] ([Back Edge]). 

79 Auto rotation mode is set to [No rotate]. 

80 Offset mode is set to [Off]. 

81 May not be combined with Image Repeat Copy Set original area. 

82 May not be combined with Image Repeat Copy Set original area. (switches to manual exposure 

mode) 

83 The secondary function takes priority and the primary function is released. 

84 Changes to Full Color. 

85 When selecting original size (B6, B6R, A6R, 11 × 15", Postcard), a message prompt is 

displayed to change the setting. 

86 Status changes to [Sort:Off]. 

87 The secondary function takes priority and status is set to Folding Tray. 

88 The secondary function takes priority and a message prompting to cancel stapling is displayed. 

Appendix-19

Appendix 

Intercompatibility of Scanner Functions 

Refer to the following charts for a list of scanner functions that may be used in combination. 

Secondary Function 


Basic selection function 



size 

Original 

set 

direction 

Auto color 

Full-color 

Black&White 

Grayscale 

Auto Detect 

Select size 

Input size 

Custom size 

Other Standard Size 

Top Edge 

Left Top Fdge 


Sending 

Size 

select 

Auto size 

Select size 


File Type 

Contrast 

Original Image 

Quality 

Black/ 

White 

select 

PDF 

TIFF 

JPEG 

High Comp. PDF 

Auto (B&W function) 

Manual 

Text + Photo 

Photo 

Text 

OCR 

Black&White 

Grayscale 


Sharpness 

Border 

Erase 

Sheet border erase 

Book border erase 

Separate border erase 


Auto Center 



Original 

type 

1 sided 

2 sided 

Book 

Scan to PC: Step 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Scan to PC: Step 2- N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N Y Y Y 

Send E-Mail: Step 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Send E-Mail: Step 2- N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y N N N N Y Y Y N Y Y N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N Y Y Y 

TWAIN: Step 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y 

TWAIN: Step 2- 

N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N 

Database Connection: Step 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Database Connection: Step 2- N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N Y Y Y 

Scan to FTP: Step 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Scan to FTP: Step 2- N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N Y Y Y 

Auto color 1 1 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N 1 N 7 N 1 Y Y Y Y Y N 1 N 8 N 8 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Full-color 1 1 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N 1 Y Y N 1 Y Y Y Y N 1 N 1 N 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Black&White 1 1 N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N 1 N 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Grayscale 1 1 N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N 1 Y N 1 N 1 Y Y Y Y N 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Auto Detect Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Select size Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y Y Y Y N 4 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 1 Y Y Y Y Y 5 

Basic 

Quality 

Edit 

Select original size 

Original 

set 

direction 

Input size Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y Y N 1 N 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 1 Y Y Y Y N 1 N 1 

Custom size Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y Y N 1 N 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 1 Y Y Y Y N 1 N 1 

Other Standard Size Y Y Y Y N N N N Y Y Y Y Y N 4 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 1 Y Y Y Y Y 5 

Top Edge Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Left Top Fdge Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 3 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 3 

File Name Input Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Sending 

Size 

select 

Auto size Y Y Y Y Y Y 7 7 Y Y Y Y N N 4 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Select size Y Y Y Y Y Y 7 7 Y Y Y Y N N 4 Y Y Y 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 6 Y Y Y Y Y 6 

Scan Resolution Y Y Y Y Y N 4 Y Y N 4 Y Y Y N 4 N 4 Y Y Y N 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

PDF Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

TIFF 1 1 Y 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 1 N 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

JPEG 1 Y 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N 1 Y Y Y Y Y 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N 1 Y Y Y 

High Comp. PDF † 1 Y 1 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N 1 N 1 N 1 N N N N 1 Y N 5 N 5 N 5 Y 1 1 Y N 1 Y Y Y N 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Auto (B&W function) Y 1 Y 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N Y 2 Y Y Y 2 N 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Manual Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

File Type 

Contrast 

Original 

Image Quality 

Black/ 

White 

select 

Text + Photo Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 4 Y Y N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Photo Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 4 N 1 Y N N N Y Y N 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Text Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 4 Y Y N N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

OCR 1 1 Y 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N Y 4 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Black&White Y 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N 1 N 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y 1 N 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Grayscale Y 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N 1 Y N 1 N 6 Y Y Y Y N 1 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Background Exposure Adjust Y Y 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N 1 Y Y N 1 Y Y N 1 Y Y N 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Sharpness Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Sheet border erase Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Book border erase Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N 1 N 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Separate border erase Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Border Erase 

Auto Selection †† Y Y Y Y Y N 1 N 1 N 1 N 1 Y Y Y N 1 N 1 Y Y Y Y 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N 1 N 1 N 1 N 1 Y Y Y N 1 N 1 

Auto Center Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N 1 Y Y Y Y Y 

Batch Scanning Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

One Page Per File Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

1 sided Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N 

2 sided †† Y Y Y Y Y Y N 1 N 1 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N 1 Y Y Y N N 

Book Y Y Y Y Y N 2 N 1 N 1 N 2 N 1 N 1 Y Y N 3 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N 1 Y Y Y N N 

Original type 

† Requires the optional PDF upgrade kit. 

†† This operation requires the optional document processor. 

Appendix-20

Appendix 



N1: Primary function takes precedence. Secondary function cannot be selected. 

N2: Primary function takes precedence. Secondary function cannot be selected. (When original size 

selection is 11 × 15", 11 × 8 1/2", 8 1/2 × 14", 5 1/2 ×81/2", 8 1/2 ×51/2", 8 1/2 ×131/2", 8 1/2 × 13", A4, 

A5, B5, B6R, B6, Folio, 16KR, 16K) 

N3: Primary function takes precedence. Secondary function cannot be selected. (When transmitted 

size selection is 11 × 17", 8 1/2 ×14", 11×15", 81/2 ×131/2", 8 1/2 × 13", A3, B4, Folio, 8K) 

N4: Primary function takes precedence. Secondary function cannot be selected. (Certain selected 

resolutions and send sizes may not be combined) 

N5: Primary function takes precedence. Secondary function cannot be selected. (Original image 

quality is set to [Text + Photo]) 

N6: Primary function takes precedence. Secondary function cannot be selected. (Black&White 

Mode) 

N7: Primary function takes precedence. Secondary function cannot be selected. (B&W) 

N8: Primary function takes precedence. Secondary function cannot be selected. (TWAIN) 

1 The secondary function is given priority and the primary function is released. 

2 Exposure setting is changed to [Manual]. 

3 Orientation of original document is changed to [Top Edge] ([Back Edge]). 

4 Original image quality is changed to [Text + Photo]. 

5 Orientation of original document is changed to [Auto]. 

6 Sending size setting is changed to [Auto Size]. 

7 The send size selection setting is changed to [- - - - - -]. 

Appendix-21

Appendix 

Dual Access Chart 

Two operations can be performed in parallel from the copy, print and scan functions. Intercompatible 

features are given in the following charts. 

Additional processing 

Copy Printer Scanner 

Regular Memory copy † 

Multiple values 

2 values 

Scan/Print 

Scan 

Output 

Job Reservation 

Document 

Management Output 

Spool 

Output 

Scan 

Transmission 

TWAIN 

Priority processing 

Printer 

Copy 

Scan 

Transmission 

TWAIN 

Regular Scan/Printing N 1 N 2 N N 2 Y N 2 N 1 N 1 N 1 N 1 N 1 N 1 

Scanning N 1 N 1 N N 2 Y Y 3 N 1 N 1 N 1 N 1 N 1 N 1 

Memory copy † 

Printing N 2 N Y N 2 Y N 2 Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Copying N N N N Y N N N N N N N 

Job Reservation Printing N N N N Y N N N N N N N 

Fax Printing N N N N Y N N N N N N N 

Document Management Printing N 2 N N 2 Y Y N 2 Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Spooling Y Y Y N 5 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 

Printing N 2 Y 2 N 2 Y N 2 Y Y 1 Y Y Y 1 Y Y 

Scanning N 1 N 1 N 1 N 1 N 1 Y Y 1 N 4 N 3 N 1 N 4 N 3 

Multiple values Transmitting Y 4 Y 4 Y 4 N 5 Y 4 Y Y N 3 N 3 N 3 N 3 N 3 

Scanner 

2 values 

TWAIN N 1 N 1 N 1 N 1 N 1 Y Y N 3 N 3 N 3 N 3 N 3 

Scanning N 1 N 1 N 1 N 1 N 1 Y Y 1 N 1 N 4 N 3 N 4 N 3 

Transmitting Y 4 Y 4 Y 4 N 5 Y 4 Y Y N 3 N 3 N 3 N 3 N 3 

TWAIN N 1 N 1 N 1 N 1 N 1 Y Y N 1 N 3 N 3 N 1 N 3 

† A scanned original is printed after being first written to the internal hard disk. 



Y1: Unable to switch to printer screen. 

Y2: For priority processing, after scanning, printing begins once the output component is not busy. 

Y3: Output is not printed automatically. Printing is started from the operation component at the time 

of additional processing. 

Y4: When Sending/Compressing is set for the scanner for Continuous Send ON, the scan screen is 

shown on completion or scanning continues, so N1 in this case. 

N1: Priority processing uses the operation component, so additional processing is not possible. 

N2: Priority processing uses the print component, so additional processing is not possible. 

N3: Priority processing uses the scanner network interface, so additional processing is not possible. 

N4: Simultaneous processing not available because additional processing cannot start until the 

priority process has completed. 

N5: Job Reservation not possible unless currently printing, so processing cannot be done. 

Appendix-22

Appendix 

Glossary 

Additional Memory 

Increase the memory available to the printer. Additional memory enables printing more complex 

data. An additional 128 MB, 256 MB or 512 MB may be added. Contact your product service 

representative to find out about memory that can be used in this machine. 

AppleTalk 

A standard network function provided in the Mac OS from the Apple Corporation. Also used to refer 

to the protocol family used in AppleTalk network functionality. AppleTalk provides file sharing and 

printer sharing services. Applications may also be launched from other computers on an AppleTalk 

network. 

Auto Low-Power mode 

A low power mode designed for electrical power saving, activated when the machine is left unused 

or data has not been received for a specific period. Less power is consumed in Low-Power mode 

than in standby mode. The time until Low-Power mode is activated, which is adjustable, is set to 15 

minutes by default. 

Auto Paper Selection 

Automatically selects the same output paper size as the original paper size when copying. 

Auto Sleep mode 

A mode designed for electrical power saving, activated when the machine is left unused or data has 

not been received for a specific period. In Sleep mode, power consumption is kept to a minimum. 

The period before switching to Sleep mode, which is adjustable, is set to 45 minutes by default. 

Default gateway 

The address representing the computer or router used when accessing a computer outside the local 

network. If a specific gateway is not defined for the IP address being accessed, the data is sent to 

the host specified by the default gateway. 

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) 

DHCP is a protocol to automatically resolve IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway addresses 

on a TCP/IP network. Because it is not necessary to manually assign an IP address to each client 

(including printers), it is especially useful to reduce the network management workload for networks 

with many clients. 

dpi (dots per inch) 

A measure of image resolution. Indicates the number of dots in 1 inch (25.4mm). 

EcoPrint 

A printing mode that helps conserve toner. Prints made in this mode are thus lighter than normal. 

Emulation 

A function to decode and process the page description languages of other printers. This printer 

provides support for PCL6, KPDL, and KC-GL emulation. 

Form Feed Timeout 

When sending data to a printer, there may occur time pauses. This printer includes functionality to 

avoid form feeding even when data is not received for a while and continue after a pause in sent 

data. Form feed timeout is a feature to wait the specified time before outputting this auto form feed 

page. The printer automatically outputs a page when the wait period has exceeded the configured 

form feed timeout period. However, no page is output if there is no print data on the last page. 

Appendix-23

Appendix 

FTP (File Transfer Protocol) 

A protocol used to transfer files on TCP/IP networks such as the Internet or private intranets. Like 

SMTP/POP, a protocol in common use on the Internet today. 

Grayscale 

A method of representing colors on a computer. Images are expressed in only shades of brightness 

from black to white, including no color information, or 'monochrome.' The number of gray levels that 

can be expressed is determined by the number of bits. 1 bit allows only black and white and no 

intermediate levels, 8 bits allows 256 levels (including black and white) and 16 bit allows 65536 gray 

levels. 

IEEE1284 

An international standard for connecting printers and computers. This standard was established in 

1994 by the IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers). 

IP Address 

An identification number assigned to every computer connected to a TCP/IP network. Represented 

by 4 octets of numbers from 0 - 255, such as 192.168.110.171. 

KPDL 

A Kyocera page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3. 

MP tray 

The paper supply tray on the right side of the machine. Use this tray instead of the cassettes when 

printing onto envelopes, postcards, transparencies, or labels. 

NetBEUI (NetBIOS Extended User Interface) Setting 

A network protocol developed by IBM in 1985. An extension of the NetBIOS protocol, NetBEUI 

delivers better performance than TCP/IP on small scale networks. However, it is not suitable for 

large scale networks because it has no routing functionality to determine the best suitable route 

from many routes. A standard protocol of IBM OS/2 and Microsoft Windows operating systems, 

which provide file and print services based on NetBEUI. 

NetWare 

A network OS (network management software) from Novell. Netware can be run on many different 

operating systems. 

Parallel port interface 

Data between this machine and the computer is sent 8 bits at a time when using the parallel port 

interface. This device supports the IEEE1284-standard bidirectional communication protocol. 

POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3) 

A standard protocol used on the Internet and private intranets to receive electronic mail stored on a 

server. 

PostScript 

A page description language developed by Adobe Systems. PDL provides flexible font functionality 

and high quality graphics to deliver high quality printing. The first version, now referred to as Level 

1, was introduced in 1985. Level 2, which included support for color printing and double byte 

languages such as Japanese was released in 1990. Level 3, which provided support for the 

Internet, an implementation criteria hierarchy, and support for the PDF format, was introduced in 

1996. 

PPM (prints per minute) 

The number of A4-sized copies (printouts) that can be delivered in one minute. 

Appendix-24

Appendix 

Printer Driver 

Software used to convert application data for printing. The printer driver is stored on the included 

CD-ROM. Install onto computers connected to this machine/printer. 

Send E-mail 

A function to send scanned images to preset e-mail addresses or e-mail addresses entered by key 

input. 

SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) 

A protocol to deliver electronic mail over the Intranet or private intranets. SMTP is used to deliver 

mail between servers and to send mail from an e-mail client to a server. 

Status Page 

Print the Status Page to confirm various information about this device, such as total installed 

memory, number of pages printed or copied, or paper feed settings. The Status Page can be printed 

from the device operation panel. 

Subnet Mask 

A 32 bit value that defines how many bits of an IP address are used to identify a network in a 

network address. 

TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) 

A network protocol to define data transmission standards for communication between computers 

and other devices. 

TWAIN (Technology Without Any Interested Name) 

A technological standard for connecting computers and image input devices such as scanners and 

digital cameras. Images from a TWAIN-compliant device can be imported into any 

TWAIN-compliant software application. TWAIN functionality is included in Adobe Photoshop and 

many other graphic editing applications, and many OCR applications. 

USB (Universal Serial Bus) 

This device includes a Hi-Speed USB 2.0 compliant USB interface. The maximum communication 

speed is 480 Mbps, which supports high speed data transfer. 

Appendix-25

Appendix 

Appendix-26

Index 

Index 

Numerics 

2-in-1 mode 1-14 

3000 sheet document finisher 1-42, 3-25, 7-22 

Specifications Appendix-12 

3000 sheet paper feeder 


4-in-1 Mode 1-15 

A 

Additional memory Appendix-23 

Address Book for Scanner 6-32 

Description 6-32 

Installing and uninstalling 6-32 

Operation method 6-33 

Address Editor 6-13 




Adjusting auto exposure 

Copy 7-8 

Scanner 4-13 

Adjusting date/time 7-24 

Adjusting manual exposure 

Copy 7-8 

Scanner 4-13 

AppleTalk Appendix-23 

Auto cassette switching 7-14 

Auto clear 

Enabling/Disabling 7-26 

Time setting 7-21 

Auto continue 3-42 

Auto detect originals 7-20 

Auto gray adjust 7-31 

Auto Low-Power mode Appendix-23 

Setting timeout 7-21 

Auto paper selection Appendix-23 

Paper type (auto BW paper) 7-6 

Paper type (auto color paper) 7-6 

Setting auto paper selection 7-6 

Auto rotation 1-41 

Default settings 7-9 

Auto selection 

Copy 1-46 

Scanner 4-8 

Auto Sleep mode Appendix-23 

Enabling/Disabling 7-26 

Setting timeout 7-21 

B 

B&W setting 4-7 


Background exposure adjust 

Copy 1-34 

Scanner 4-6 

Batch scanning 

Copy 1-32 

Default setting (scanner) 4-16 

Scanner 4-8 

Booklet 

Book 1-28 

Sheet originals 1-26 

Border erase 

Copy 1-19 


Scanner 4-8 

C 

Centering originals 

Copy 1-18 


Scanner 4-9 

Changing management code 7-25 

Character input method 7-47 

Input type A 7-47 

Input type B 7-50 

Checking total copy count 7-46 

Color 

Auto gray adjust 7-31 

Background exposure adjust 1-34, 4-6 

Color balance adjust ii, 1-49 

Color calibration 7-31 

Color profile 6-47 

Color registration 7-33 

Color/B&W selection 1-53 

Hue adjust iii, 1-50 

MonoColor copy 1-54 

One touch image adjust i, 1-52 

Color balance adjust 1-49 

Sample ii 

Color calibration 7-31 

Color mode 


Default settings (copy) 7-4 

Printer 3-22 

Color output type 4-15 

Color registration 7-33 

Color/B&W selection 1-53 

Combine mode 

2-in-1 mode 1-14 

4-in-1 mode 1-15 

Types of page boundary lines 1-15 

Continuous scanning 4-17 

Conventions in this guide ix 

Copy 


Index-1

Index 

Copy count per department 

Copy count per department 8-14 

Management total 8-13 

Copy functions 1-1 

Copy quantity 1-6 

Preset limit 7-10 

Copy/Printer output management 8-19 

Copying speed Appendix-9 

Correct fine black lines 7-5 

Cover 1-25 

Cassette for cover paper 7-7 

CR (Carriage Return) action 3-20 

Customize (basic screen) 7-11 

Customize (user choice) 7-12 

D 

DB Assistant 6-49 




Default counter limit value 8-20 

Default gateway Appendix-23 

Default settings 

Default settings for copying 7-2 

Document management functions 7-38 

Job accounting 8-17 

Machine default 7-13 

Scanner function 4-12 

Developer refresh 7-36 

DHCP Appendix-23 

Document finisher 1-42, 3-25, 7-22 


Document management functions 2-2 


Shared data box 2-2 

Synergy print box 2-5 

Document processor 


dpi Appendix-23 

Drum refresh 7-36 

Dump received data 3-46 

Duplex mode 3-24 

Error detection 3-44 

E 

EcoPrint 1-43, Appendix-23 


E-mail send setting 5-20 

E-mail basic setting 5-20 

Sender list 5-21 

e-MPS functions 3-34 

Code job list 3-38 

Detailed settings 3-39 

Job storage 3-35 

Private print 3-35 

Proof and hold 3-35 

Quick copy 3-34 

Virtual mailbox 3-37 

Emulation 3-10, Appendix-23 

Alternate emulation 3-10 

Pen and print environment setting 3-11 

Print KPDL errors 3-11 

Selection 3-10 

Environmental specifications Appendix-13 

Erasing hard disk contents 7-27 

Error code 

Scanner 9-18 

Error message 

Copy 9-6 

Hard disk 9-14 

Memory card 9-14 

Printer 9-11 

RAM disk 9-14 

Scanner 9-15 

EtherTalk 3-8 

Exposure level 4-6 

Exposure mode 7-3 

Exposure steps 7-3 

F 

File name input 4-5 


Display/Do Not Display the Auto/Manual 

selection screen 4-18 

File type 4-5 


High compression PDF quality 4-15 

PDF/JPEG quality 4-14 

First copy time Appendix-9 

First print time Appendix-9 

Font 3-13 

Character pitch setting 3-14 

Code set 3-15 

Print list of fonts 3-16 

Selection 3-13 

Size setting 3-14 

Thickness setting 3-15 

Form feed timeout 3-41, Appendix-23 

FTP Appendix-24 

G 

Grayscale Appendix-24 

H 

Hard disk 3-33 

Format (Initialization) 3-33 

Hard disk management 7-42 

HDD encryption key 7-28 

High density print 7-27 

Hue adjust 1-50 

Sample iii 

Index-2

Index 

I 

IEEE1284 Appendix-24 

Image quality 4-7 



Image repeat copy 1-48 

Included guides viii 

Intercompatibility of functions 

Copy Appendix-14 

Dual access Appendix-22 

Scanner Appendix-20 

Interfaces 3-5 

Network interface 3-6 

Parallel interface mode 3-5 

Serial interface mode 3-6 

Inverted copying 1-44 

IP address Appendix-24 

J 

Job accounting 

Activating and deactivating 8-16 

Copy 8-17 


Delete 8-10 


Editing department information 8-11 

Fax 8-20 

Limit in use 8-5 

New account 8-4 

Operation during setting 8-22 

Printer 8-17 

Scanner 8-19 

Total 8-13 

Job build 1-58 

Procedure 1-58 

Setting functions 1-62 

Job separator 1-42, 3-25, 7-22 


Job storage 3-35 

K 

KPDL Appendix-24 

L 

Legal and safety information 

Regarding tradenames iv 

LF (Line Feed) action 3-19 

Limit in use 

Change 8-11 

Copy 8-5, 8-8, 8-9 


Fax 8-8 

Limitation 8-6, 8-7 

Printer 8-6, 8-9, 8-10 

Scanner 8-7 

M 

Margin mode 1-17 


Memo mode 1-30 

Memory card 3-27 

Deleting 3-29 

Format (Initialization) 3-27 

Insertion 3-27 

Partition list 3-30 

Reading data 3-29 

Writing data 3-28 

Mirror copying 1-45 

MonoColor copy 1-54 

MP tray Appendix-24 

Enabling quick access to MP tray settings 7-16 

MP tray mode 3-23 

Registering MP tray paper size 7-15 

Specifying the paper size 7-29 

Specifying the paper type 7-29 

N 

NetBEUI Appendix-24 

NetWare 3-8, Appendix-24 

Network interface 3-6 

EtherTalk 3-8 

NetWare 3-8 

Network status page 3-9 

TCP/IP 3-6 

Notification sounds 7-23 

O 

Offset mode 1-9 


OHP backing sheet mode 1-39 

One page per file 4-9 


One touch image adjust 1-52 

Sample i 

Orientation 3-18 

Original 

Size x 

Original orientation 

Copy 1-7 


Scanner 4-4 

Original type 4-9 

Output management functions 


[Prt Status] screen 2-12 

Using the output management functions 2-12 

Output tray 1-42, 3-25, 7-22 

P 

Page numbering 1-23 

Page protect mode 3-18 

Index-3

Index 

Page set 

Copy quantity 3-17 

CR (Carriage Return) action 3-20 

LF (Line Feed) action 3-19 

Orientation 3-18 

Page protect mode 3-18 

Paper Appendix-2 

Basic specifications Appendix-2 

Choosing the appropriate paper Appendix-3 

Colored paper Appendix-7 

Envelope Appendix-7 

Overhead transparency Appendix-6 

Postcard Appendix-6 

Preprinted Appendix-7 

Recycled Appendix-7 

Size x 

Special paper Appendix-5 

Thick paper Appendix-7 

Paper feeder 


Paper source 

Copy 1-2 

Printer 3-23 

Parallel interface mode 3-5 

Parallel port interface Appendix-24 

PDF encryption function 4-9 

POP3 Appendix-24 

Poster 1-22 

PostScript Appendix-24 

PPM Appendix-24 

Print quantity 3-17 

Printer 

Included printer utilities viii 


Printer driver Appendix-25 

Printer error report 8-18 

Printer settings 3-1 

Printing from unregistered sources (printer) 8-18 

Printing reports 7-43 

Prioritizing copying over printing 7-27 

Private print 3-35 

Programmed copying 1-55 

Deleting 1-56 

Editing names 1-55 

Registering 1-55 

Using programs to copy 1-55 

Programmed scanning 4-20 

Deleting 4-22 

Editing names 4-21 


Using programs to scan 4-21 

Proof and hold 3-35 

Proof copy 1-35 

Punching 1-12 

Q 

Quick copy 3-34 

R 

RAM disk 3-31 

RAM disk size 3-32 

Settting 3-31 

Register keys 1-57 

Deleting 1-57 


Setting to show/hide 7-11 

Repeat copy 


Deleting 1-38 

Output 1-36 

Reviewing jobs 1-37 

Settting 1-36 

Reset (Reboot) 3-46 

Resolution Appendix-9 

Resource protect mode 3-42 

Response to unauthorized requests 8-20 

S 

Sample of color setting adjustment i 

Scan resolution 4-4 


Scan to FTP setting 5-25 


Scan to PC setting 5-16 


Scanner 

Setting from a web browser 5-1 

Setting from the machine 4-1 


Scanner File Utility 6-3 




Service mode 6-5, 6-12 

Scanner utilities 6-2 

Select paper 7-5 

Select sending size 4-3 

Select the main mode 7-23 

Selecting default cassette 7-7 

Selecting default zoom 7-9 


Copy 1-3 

Registration method 7-30 

Scanner 4-3 

Selecting output destination 

Copy 1-42 

Default setting (fax) 7-22 


Printer 3-25 

Send E-mail Appendix-25 

Index-4

Index 

Setting enter e-mail address 4-18 

Sending history 4-23 

Serial interface mode 3-6 

Service settings 3-45 

Setting auto % priority 7-8 

Setting auto color detection 7-4 

Setting handling for special paper types 7-19 

Setting stapling error detection 3-43 

Setting time difference 7-24 

Shared A4/Letter size feed select 3-26 

Shared data box 

Deleting 2-4 

Output 2-3 

Print document list 7-39 


Renaming 2-4 

Resetting 7-40 

Reviewing 2-4 

Sharpness adjust 

Copy 1-33 

Sample iii 

Scanner 4-7 

Silent mode 7-24 

Skip Sender (User) Select 4-18 

SMTP Appendix-25 

Solving malfunctions 9-2 


3000 sheet document finisher Appendix-12 

3000 sheet paper feeder Appendix-11 

Body Appendix-8 

Copying performance Appendix-9 

Document finisher Appendix-11 

Document processor Appendix-10 

Environmental specifications Appendix-13 

Job separator Appendix-12 

Paper feeder Appendix-11 

Printing performance Appendix-9 

Scanning performance Appendix-10 

Specifying the paper size 7-14 

Specifying the paper type 7-15 

Stapling 1-10 

Status page Appendix-25 

Details 3-3 

Print 3-2 

Subnet mask Appendix-25 

Synergy print box 

Batch printing 2-7 

Box name 7-40 

Box password 2-9, 7-40 

Combining and printing 2-6 

Deleting 2-8 

Deleting all documents 2-9, 7-41 

Print document list 7-39 


Renaming 2-7 

Resetting 7-40 

Reviewing 2-7 

Specifying period to store documents 7-41 

System menu 7-1 

System setting 5-6 

Reset 5-15 

Scanner default 5-10 


Setting method 5-6 

System basic setting 5-6 

T 

TCP/IP 3-6, Appendix-25 

Tone mode 3-21 

Total count by size 8-21 

TWAIN Appendix-25 

TWAIN Source 6-42 




Type adjust 

Duplex mode 7-18 

Paper weight 7-17 

U 

USB Appendix-25 

V 

Virtual mailbox 3-37 

Print list 3-37 

VMB 3-37 

W 

Web page feature 5-2 

Index 5-2 

Precautions 5-2 

Screen layout 5-4 

Usage 5-3 

Index-5

Index 

Index-6

For best results and machine performance, we recommend that you use only our original supplies for 

your products. 

E1

Quick Guide to Adjusting Image Quality 

Manuel d’utilisation rapide pour le rélage 

de la qualité de l’image 

Guía rápida para ajustar la calidad de 

la imagen 

Kurzanleitung zur Einstellung der 

Bildqualität 

Guida rapida alla regolazione 

della qualità dell’immagine

Introduction 

If you are not satisfied with the output quality of color images, refer to this manual and make adjustments 

accordingly. For copy images, refer to the chapter on copies. For printer output images, refer to the chapter on 

printer drivers. Make sure to use special color copying paper when printing in color. If you don’t, print qualities 

such as density and hue could be affected. 

If the number of copies printed is extremely large or extremely small, or if a single sheet is continuously printed 

at an extremely high or extremely low print ratio, the print quality could suffer. 

Introduction 

Si la qualité de l’affichage des images en couleur ne vous satisfait pas, référez-vous à ce manuel et faites les 

ajustements idoines. Pour la copie d’images, référez-vous au chapitre traitant des copies. Pour les images 

sorties sur imprimante, référez-vous au chapitre traitant des pilotes d’imprimante. Assurez-vous d’utiliser du 

papier à copier couleur spécial quand vous imprimez en couleur. Si vous ne le faites pas, les qualités 

d’impression telles que la densité et la tonalité pourraient en être affectées. 

Si le nombre de copies imprimées est très important ou très faible, ou si une seule feuille est imprimée en 

continue à une cadence très élevée ou très faible, la qualité d’impression pourrait en pâtir. 

Introducción 

Si no está satisfecho con la calidad de salida de las imágenes en color, consulte este manual y realice los 

ajustes necesarios. Para copiar imágenes, consulte el capítulo dedicado a las copias. Para imágenes de salida 

de la impresora, consulte el capítulo sobre controladores de la impresora. Asegúrese de que utiliza papel 

especial para copias en color cuando realice impresiones en colores. De no hacerlo, componentes de la calidad 

de la impresión tales como la densidad y la tonalidad podrán verse afectados. 

Si el número de copias que se imprimen es extremadamente grande o extremadamente pequeño, o si se 

imprime una sola página continuamente a una tasa de impresión extremadamente alta o extremadamente baja, 

podría verse afectada la calidad de la impresión. 

Einführung 

Wenn Sie mit der Ausgabequalität von Farbbildern nicht zufrieden sind, nehmen Sie die entsprechenden in 

diesem Handbuch angegebenen Justierungen vor. Hinweise zum Kopieren von Bildern finden Sie im Kapitel 

über das Kopieren. Hinweise zur Druckausgabe von Bildern finden Sie im Kapitel über Druckertreiber. Bitte 

beachten Sie, dass beim Drucken in Farbe spezielles Farbkopierpapier verwendet werden sollte. Mit anderem 

Papier könnte die Druckqualität in Dichte und Farbton vermindert werden. 

Falls Sie extrem viele oder wenige Kopien drucken, oder falls ein einzelnes Blatt kontinuierlich bei extrem großen 

oder kleinen Druckbild-Verhältnissen bedruckt wird, könnte die Druckqualität leiden. 

Introduzione 

Se la qualità delle immagini a colori ottenute non fosse soddisfacente, fare riferimento a questo manuale ed 

eseguire le regolazioni necessarie. Per immagini fotocopiate, fare riferimento al capitolo Copia. Per immagini 

inviate alla stampante, fare riferimento al capitolo Driver stampante. Verificare che venga utilizzata la carta 

speciale per fotocopiatura a colori quando si stampa a colori. In caso contrario, si può avere un effetto negativo 

sulle caratteristiche di stampa, come ad esempio la densità e la tonalità. 

Se il numero di copie stampate è molto grande o molto piccolo, o se viene stampato un solo foglio in 

continuazione con un rapporto di stampa molto grande o molto piccolo, la qualità di stampa può peggiorare. 

 

 

English Copying .................................... 7 

Printer Driver ............................ 9 

Français Copie ...................................... 13 

Pilote d’imprimante ................. 15 

Español Copia ...................................... 19 

Controlador de la impresora ... 21 

Deutsch Kopieren ................................. 25 

Druckertreiber ........................ 27 

Italiano Copia ...................................... 31 

Driver stampante .................... 33

Quick Guide to Adjusting Image Quality (Copying) 

Copying 

Selecting Image Quality 

Select the optimal image quality mode to match the type of original you are copying. 

Text + Photo 

Choose this setting when copying an original that combines text, 

illustrations and photos. Each individual area is optimally processed. 

Text is clearly copied and illustrations and photos are smoothly 

rendered. 

Ex: Presentation materials, business documents, catalogs, etc. 

Photo 

Choose this setting when copying a photo taken with a camera, etc. The 

original photo is clearly copied. 

English 

Print 

Choose this setting when copying photos printed in a catalog or 

magazine in halftone dots. This setting reduces the moiré † effect. 

Text 

Choose this setting when copying an original that contains mainly text. 

The text is clearly copied. 

Ex: Business documents and materials with a lot of text 

Map 

Choose this setting when copying maps. Fine text and lines printed on a 

background color are clearly copied. 

1 Press [Function], and then [Orig. Image Quality] ([Image Quality]). 

2 Choose the image quality setting that 

corresponds to your original. 


Ready to copy. (Full-Color) 

Orig.Image Quality 

Shortcut 

Text+Photo 

Photo 

Print 

Text 

Map 

Text+Pho 

Photo: Fo 

Print: Fo 

Text: For 

Map: For 

† Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots. 

7


Adjusting Color Balance 

This setting allows you to adjust the overall color if the whole copy seems too red or yellow. 

It allows you to increase/decrease the levels of yellow, magenta, cyan and black. 

Ex: In the following situation… 

The entire copy seems too yellow 

The color balance adjustment allows you 

to adjust the copy’s overall color. 

NOTE: This feature can not be used together with Auto Exposure mode (see Operation Guide). 

1 Press [Color func.] and then [Color balance] ([Colour balance]). 

2 Press [On]. 

3 Use [O] or [P] to adjust the colors 

indicated to the right (Cyan, Magenta, 

Yellow, Black). 

o copy. (Full-Color) 

Shortcut 

Paper Size 

11x 

100% 

Back 


Cyan 

Magenta 

Yellow 

Black 

8


Other Functions 

Adjusting Sharpness 

Adjusts the strength/weakness of the image’s contours. This function allows you to clearly copy 

text and lines by adjusting sharpness to [Sharpen] when the original you are copying was written 

in pencil, or the text and lines are broken or unclear. You can also weaken the moiré effect by 

softening the contours and adjusting sharpness to [Unsharpen]. Use this setting when copying 

images with halftone dots such as photos in magazines. 

One-Touch Image Quality Adjustment 

Adjusts the settings to a desired image quality that matches ‘Vivid’ and ‘Dull’ images. 

Hue Adjustment 

Adjusts the color tone (hue). This function allows you to copy an image and change its colors by 

creating a red with strong yellow tones or creating a yellow that is closer to yellow-green. 

English 

Refer to the Advanced Operation Guide for further details. 

Printer Driver 

You can set various color printer settings on the printer driver’s Imaging tab. The Imaging tab is 

displayed as indicated below. 

NOTE: These settings can also be changed from an application’s Print menu. 

The following procedure uses Windows XP as an example, but other operating systems use the 

same procedure. 

1 Click the Window’s start button. Click Printers 

and Faxes to display the Printers and Faxes 

screen. 

2 Right-click on the icon of an available printer 

shown on the Printers and Faxes screen and a 

shortcut menu displays. 

3 Click Printing Preferences to display the 

Printing Preferences screen. 

9

Quick Guide to Adjusting Image Quality (Printer Driver) 

4 Click the Imaging tab. 

Color Mode 

You can switch between color and monochrome printing. You can also use Custom to select 

Continuous tone. 

1 Select the following items from the Color mode 

dropdown list. 

Color (CMYK) ... Uses a four-color toner to print 

text and graphics in color. 

Monochrome ... Uses a black toner only to print in 

black and white. 

Custom ... Allows you to specify options from 

Settings. 

2 If you select Custom, select the following items 

from Settings. 

Print text as black ... If you are printing color or 

gray text, the text that would normally be printed in 

color or in gray is printed in black without the use of 

gray scale. White text or color images and graphics 

are not affected. 

Continuous tone ... Pixels are rendered and 

printed over a wide-ranging grayscale. This setting is 

appropriate for printing photo images. 

3 Once you have finished, click the OK button to save your settings. 

10


Balance Adjustment 

This function allows you to adjust the color tone if you have selected Color (CMYK) in Color 

mode. You can save color adjustment settings under Custom 1, 2 and 3. 

Note: If you select Monochrome in Color mode, you can adjust the grayscale Brightness and 

Contrast. Refer to the Extended D river User Guide for information on adjusting the 

monochrome print settings. 

1 Select Color (CMYK) in Color mode and click the 

Adjustment button. The Adjustment Settings 

dialog box displays. 

2 Select Custom 1, Custom 2, or Custom 3 from 

the Custom color adjustment dropdown list and 

click the Settings button. The Custom Color 

Adjustment dialog box displays. 

English 

3 Select one of the following items from Select 

color space. 

HSL (hue, saturation and lightness) ... This setting allows 

you to adjust the Hue adjustment (color), Saturation 

(brightness), Lightness (luminosity), and Contrast 

(sharpness). 

RGB ... Adjusts the Red, Green and Blue balance. 

Click the left/right arrow buttons on Click arrows to change image and choose from one of 

the three image photos. The characteristics of the colors emphasized differs in each of the 

image photos, making it easy to see the degree of color adjustment. 

Crayons 

Saturation or RGB 

adjustment 

Child 

Skin color and half-tone 

adjustment 

Fruit 

Hue adjustment 

11


If HSL (hue, saturation and lightness) is selected. 

Hue adjustment ... Use the slider to adjust the hue 

balance. To adjust a specific hue, select Red, Yellow, 

Green, Cyan, Blue or Magenta from the dropdown list. 

You can adjust all hues as one by selecting Master. You 

can also make adjustments by entering a value from 

-180 to +180. 

Saturation, Lightness, Contrast ... Use the slider to 

adjust the color’s saturation, lightness and contrast. You 

can also make adjustments by entering a value from 

-10.00 to +10.00. 

If RGB is selected 

RGB level ... Move the various RGB sliders to adjust the 

balance of the Red, Green and Blue that correspond to 

monitor colors. You can also make adjustments by 

entering a value from -10.00 to +10.00. 

4 Once you have finished, click the OK button to save your settings. 

Other Functions 

Color Correction 

‘Color Correction’ is a function that corrects the color space difference that exists between each 

color printing system is order to maintain consistency during color reproduction among devices. 

This function allows you to set the method used to make color adjustments during printing. 

Color Reproduction 

If you set Color Correction to Automatic, you can configure Color Reproduction settings. The 

objects in the document that are to be printed are divided into images, texts and graphs to match 

the Color Reproduction mode. This setting allows you to reproduce colors that are clearer and 

closer to the colors displayed on the monitor. 

Refer to the Extended Driver User Guide for further details. 

12

UTAX GmbH, Ohechaussee 235, 22848 Norderstedt, Germany

INSTRUCTION HANDBOOK - Utax

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?